International Journal of Academic Research

Volume 2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 International Journal of Academic Research

Multidisciplinary, Multiple languages, Refereed and Indexed Journal

Published by Office Address Sucharitha Publications Dr.T.V.Ramana Visakhapatnam – 530 017 46-8-10/4, Opp. Aditya Public School Andhra Pradesh – India Jagannaickpur, Kakinada- 533002 website :www.ijar.org.in Andhra Pradesh-India

Design by SS Xerox, Visakhapatnam

EDITORIAL BOARD Editor-in-Chief

Dr. T. V. RAMANA Andhra University Campus, Kakinada - Andhra Pradesh, India, 533 005 ASSOCIATE EDITORS Dr. K. Victor Babu T.S.E. Rani Advisory Council

Prof. M. Sundara Rao, Chairman, Board of Studies, Dept. of Economics, Andhra University, Visakhapatnam

Dr.P.Subba Rao, Director (i/c), Centre for Study of Social Inclusion and Exclusive Policy, Andhra University, Visakhapatnam

Prof. P.Arun Kumar, Special Officer, Andhra University Campus, Kakinada, AP

Prof.B.Kuberudu, Dept. of Management Studies, Andhra University Campus, Kakinada

Dr.J.Chandra Prasad, Director, S.V. Institute of Technology, Tanuku, West Godavar District, AP

Dr.V.Mahipal, Executive Director (Social welfare) & Chief Planning Officer (Rtd), Kakinada, Andhra Pradesh

Prof. J.V.K.V. Pandit, Dept. of .Political Universidad Rural de Guatemala, GT, Science & Public Adm., Andhra U.S.A University Campus, Kakinada

Dr.K.Victor Babu, Guest Faculty, Department of Philosophy, Andhra University – Visakhapatnam; Chief Editor of IJMER and Associate Editor of IJAR

Dr. Zoran Vu, ISI, Rector, St. Gregory Nazianzen Orthodox Institute Editorial council Dr. Sudhansu Ranjan Mohapatra, Prof. M. Sundara Rao, Chairman, Centre for Juridical Studies, Dibrugarh University, Dibrugarh, Board of Studies, Dept of Economics, Assam Andhra University, Visakhapatnam

Dr. C. Jaya Subba Reddy, Dr. P. Subba Rao, Director (i/c), Department of Mathematics, SVU Centre for Study of Social Inclusion College of Sciences, Tirupati and Exclusive Policy, Andhra University, Visakhapatnam Dr. E. Ashok Kumar, Department of Education North- Eastern Hill Prof. J.V.K.V. Pandit, Dept. of. University, Shillong Political Science &Public Adnm, Andhra University Campus, Dr. Merina Islam, Department of Kakinada Philosophy Cachar College, Assam

Prof.P. Dakshina Murty, Prof. in Dr. R. Dhanuja, PSG College of Physics, University College of Arts & Science Coimbatore Engineering, Jawaharlal Nehru Dr. Bipasha Sinha, S. S. Jalan Technological University, Kakinada, Girls’ College University of Calcutta- AP, India Calcutta Prof. D. Satyanarayana, BVC Dr. K. John Babu, Department of Institute of Technology & Science, Journalism & Mass Comm. Central Amalapuram, AP University of Kashmir, Kashmir Dr.J.Ratna Prabhakar, Dept. of Prof. S. Mahendra Dev, Vice- Commerce, Government City Chancellor, Indira Gandhi Institute College,(aff) Osmania University, of Development Research Mumbai Hyderabad Prof. (Dr.) Sohan Raj Tater, Dr. A. Srinivas, Rajiv Ganghi Former Vice Chancellor, Singhania Institute of Law College & Dept. of University, Rajasthan Humanities, JNTUK Dr.Bipasha Sinha, S. S. Jalan Dr. Vidya. H.N, Department of Girls’ College University of Calcutta- History, Government Arts College, Calcutta Hassan, Karnataka

Dr. K. V. Ramana Murty, Dept. of Management Studies, Wollega Management Studies, Andhra University, Ethiopia, South Africa University Campus, Kakinada Dr.K.Chaitanya, Department of Dr. M. Satyanarayana, Dept. of CHEMISTRY, Nanjing University of political Science & public Science and Technology, China Administration, Andhra University Campus, Kakinada, AP Prof. Josef HOCI-ITL, Department of Political Economy Dr.V.V.S.Rama Krishna, Dept. of University of Vienna, Vienna & Ex. Economics, Andhra University Member, Austrian Parliament, Campus, Kakinada, AP Austria

Dr.M.Mani Sekhar, MHRM, Prof. Alexander Chumakov, Andhra University Campus, Chair of Philosophy Department Kakinada, AP Russian Philosophical Society, Russia Dr. T.Ashok, Dept. of English, Andhra University Campus, Prof. Fidel Gutierrez Vivanco, Kakinada, AP Founder and President Escuela Virtual de Asesoria Filosofica Dr.D.Thirupathaiah, Dept. of Economics, S.K.R.B.R College, Prof. Igor Kondrshin, Member of Narasaraopet, Guntur, district, A.P the Russian Philosophical Society, the Russian Humanist Society and Dr. K. Prasad, Dept of Economics, Expert of the UNESCO, Moscow, Dr. S. R. K. Govt. Arts College, Russia Yanam, UT of Puducherry Dr. Zoran Vu, ISI Rector, St. Prof. Roger Wiemers, Professor of Gregory Nazianzen Orthodox Education, Lipscomb University, Institute Universidad Rural de Nashville, USA Guatemala, GT,U.S.A

Prof.V.V.Ratnaji Rao Chowdary, Swami Maheshwarananda, Dept of Business & Economics, Wollo Founder and President,Shree University Dessie, Ethiopia Vishwa Deep Gurukul Swami Dr.B.V Prasada Rao, Associate Maheshwarananda Ashram Professor, Department of Education & Research Center, Rajasthan, India Dr. Momin Mohamed Naser, Mr.I.Ketutdonder, Depasar State Department of Geography Institute Institute of Hindu Dharma, of Arab Research and Studies Cairo Indonesia University, Egypt

Editor-in-Chief, IJAR – January-March, Vol.2. Issue 1, 2015 Typeset and Printed (Sucharitha Publications) in India: IJAR, concentrates on critical and creative research in Multidisciplinary and multiple languages Academic Research. This journal seeks to promote original research and cultivate a fruitful dialogue between old and modern thought. Views expressed in the articles is exclusively of the authors, thus, journal is not responsible of it in any case

visit: www.ijar.org.in

C O N T E N T S Volume 2 Issue 1(3) January-March, 2015 S. Page No No 1 Correlation between children advertisement 1-9 B. Kuberudu and E.Naga Surendra 2 Analysis of Rural Household Food Security in Wonago 10-20 District, Gedeo Zone, SNNP Regional State, Ethiopia Goitom Weldegerima, Abreham Kebedom and Nigussie Yohannse 3 Evaluation of rural development policy and strategy in 21-30 Ethiopia P.NandeeswaraRao and Neduri Suryanarayana 4 Study of Primary School Teachers Effectiveness 31-34 Sunita Godiyal 5 Jainism as Philosophical Backbone of Human Rights-A 35-39 Perspective in Indian Jurisprudence Asha Bhandari 6 Live in relationship in India:- A Legal Perspective 40-44 Sudhansu Ranjan Mohapatra 7 Institute Interaction For Sustainable Growth“ with Special 45-50 focus on Management Education YVVSSS Vara Prasad 8 The operational system of Panchayati Raj in Goa 51-56 Balaji Sudasshenvy 9 Effective Communication Skills to Build Human Capital 57-62 G. Reddi Sekhar Reddy 10 An Analysis of Poverty Reduction And Human 63-68 Development in India Girish M.C 11 SavitribaiPhule First Woman Teacher in India 69-74 Archana Malik-Goure 12 Crafting Campus Awareness –Strategies Towards 75-79 Creation of Campus Sustainability Vidya.H.N

13 Structural Formation of Agraharas in Medieval South 80-83 India –A Case Study of Hosaholalu Agrahara Puttaraju.K. 14 Connecting through language - reflections on the spread of 84-86 Russian Sanskrit scholarship Veena.H.N 15 Self – Help Groups and Economic Empowerment of 87-91 Women in India Rathna Y. D 16 Stress Management In Adolescent Students 92-97 J. Venkata Rama Chandra Rao 17 Using Mother Tongue in teaching vocabulary in the Class 98-101 Room to Enhance Communication Skills Shiny K.P 18 An Analysis on Population Growth of Yanam Region 102-106 K.Prasad 19 The Dynamics of Performance Management 107-111 G. S. Rama Krishna& G.Samuel Mores 20 Enhancing Students’ Grammar by using Games: A 112-116 Practical Classroom Experience B.V.Srinivas Rao 21 The Glass Palace – A Multigenerational SAGA 117-121 M. NageswaraRao 22 Termites Destroying Structural Wood on Cost Basis in 122-125 Hyderabad Urban System S.venkataramaraju 23 An overview on the Child labour 126-130 Suresh Kumar 24 Indian Government Policy on Industrial Relations: An 131-135 overview Thirupathaiah Dulla

25 Special provision to Jammu & Kashmir. Why? 136-143 Pradeepta Kishore Sahoo

26 Ecotourism Tourism in East Godavari, Andhra Pradesh 144-149 NomulaVenkateshwarlu

27 Issues In Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment 150-154 Guarantee Act, 2005 Vijayakumar Bandi

28 Success Through Social Responsibility: A unique Model of 155-161 TATA Group Santanu Kumar Das

29 Anti-Competitive agreements: concepts under competition 162-167 Act 2002 Gunda vedasree

30 Judicial Accountability 168-171 P.Venkata Subba Rao and V.Rama Rao

Editorial ……..

It is great privilege to me to express New Year greetings to the intellectuals of several disciplines. Dear intellectuals, no one really knows what the next twelve months have in store, but one thing is almost certain— intellectual/philosopher will continue to change with new thoughts and do better be ready for it. Only the Intellectual can share the progress and problems of the society as his own and enlighten the minds of the others for 365 days as rotates 360 degrees of circle. It appears the greatness of the philosopher. As such, let’s again make our New Year’s resolution a substantive one this year. By the way, IJAR created a platform to gather the thoughts of intellectuals as a little bit of contribution to better society.

This volume is the glimpses of voice of authors that are enthusiastically associated with various issues of the journal. The present issue is really useful to reference for multi-dimensional aspects. I am grateful to the paper writers for their valuable contributions on different dimensions of disciples. On behalf of the IJAR, once again, I wish you a vibrant progress & benevolent prosperity in 2015.

Editor-in-Chief

Prof.G.S.N Raju, Hon’ble Vice Chancellor, releasing the inaugural issue of the International journal of Academic Research. Dr.Chella Rama Krishna, Associate Director, Press and Media, Dr.T.V, Ramana, Chief Editor AND Dr. K.Victor Babu, Editor of the Journal also seen

International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

CORRELATION BETWEEN CHILDREN AND ADVERTISEMENTS: A SURVEY ON PARENTS’ PERCEPTION

Dr.KuberuduBurlakanti, Professor, Department of Management Studies, MBA department Andhra University M.S.N.P.G. Centre Kakinada, AP

E.NagaSurendra,Assistant Professor,Vishnu Institute of Technology,Bhimavaram,Andhra Pradesh

ABSTRACT: People of early generations used to work and live to meet the basic necessities, while modern generation is striving hard to have all the luxuries in life. Advertisements today created desire among the masses to purchase wide range of products which are not mere necessities. Many worthless products are being sold under aggressive advertisement campaign. Smallnews papers and magazines with less circulation are tempted to accept such types of advertisements in order to improve their financial position. Taking this as an undue advantage many companies are inserting irrelevant advertisements in media. The degree of impact of such advertisements will be very much high on children who do not have discretion. The objective of this research paper is to find out the impact of advertisements on children. Key words: Advertisement, Children, generations, Parents INTRODUCTION: are also increasing drastically. Advertisements give the employees the Advertising in developing feeling of pride about the products they country like India plays an important manufacture which result in high job role in the economy. It is one of the satisfaction and morale of the important subsystems of economic and employees. In developing countries like social systems of a nation. On the name India; business cycles have a huge of various jobs like copywriters, artists, impact on the economy. More painters, graphic designers, singers, advertising in recession and less models, musicians, actors, ad advertising in the boom period helps executives etc, today advertising the industries to control the extent of industry is providing direct business cycle. Advertisements help the employment to lakhs of people. People producer in reducing production costs, of all the countries have started to distribution costs and help him in consume the latest goods and services facing competition in the market. to satisfy their physical, social and psychological needs through Mass production because of demand advertisements which significantly created by advertisements resulted in contributed much to the material various large scale economies like welfare of the people. availability of qualitative raw materials at lower prices, availability of Advertisements by creating better technology and machinery to the demand, are assuring guaranteed producers. This resulted in reduced profits to the manufacturers because of unit cost of production, reduced prices which the research and developmental and customer delight ultimately. When activities initiatives of the producers

www.ijar.org.in 1 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 a manufacturer is talking about new by an identified sponsor”- American schemes like good quality, reasonable Marketing Association (AMA). price, sales promotion activities etc “Advertising is any form of non- others are following him. This resulted personal presentation of ideas, goods or in healthy competition among the services for the purpose of inducing producers because of which the people to buy.”-Wheeler ultimate customers are getting The term ‘advertising’ is benefited. Advertising created product derived from the Latin word ‘advertere’ utility and has encouraged free which means ‘to turn the attention of consumer choice by bringing producers, people to a specific thing.’ Advertising, buyers and marketers together. as anactivity, is not possible for free of Consumers today have wider choices cost. By its very nature, it is paid form and can get best products at cheaper of presentation of an idea, product or a prices because of advertisements. service. The manufacturer and Critics argue that besides positive role consumers are not in direct or personal played by the advertisements; they also contact with one another because of have negative social and economic which advertisement is a non-personal effects on the developing country like presentation and promotion. India. Obscenity,nudity,appeal to drugs Advertisement is not just meant for and sex which are shown in the promoting goods but also contribute advertisements will have serious much for the promotion of ideas and impact on the moral and psychosocial services as well. The receiver of the development of children. Repeating message should be able to identify the uninteresting and non-appealing source of advertisement. messages creates irritation in the minds of the children. A negative stimulus thus generated because of NEED FOR THE STUDY: emotional attack influences children in By laying emphasis on brands in the wrong direction. Many advertisers, the market, advertisements are making taking undue advantage of innocence of the children to become slaves of various the children are trying to create branded products. By showing repeated particular impression for new products emotional appeals like pride, status, by creating adverse advertising. prestige etc they are disturbing and Parents should watch their children controlling the minds of innocent access to various media like television, children. Advertisements are shifting radio, internet etc carefully and give the demand from one product to necessary guidance. The purpose of this another over a period of time and are investigation is to find out the positive multiplying the needs of customers to a as well as the negative effects of great extent. Children thereby are advertisements on the physical and forcing their parents to purchase the mental health of the children. irrelevant and useless articles MEANING AND DEFINITION OF advertised. A middle class man is not ADVERTISING: having the ability to purchase such products that is being advertised “Advertising is any paid form of because of which disturbance is created non-personal presentation and in the family members. Culture, art promotion of ideas, goods and services

www.ijar.org.in 2 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 and philosophy are completely ignored by advertisers to achieve the sales targets which will have serious impact on the personality development of METHODOLOGY: children. Stereotype culture in The study is based on primary and advertisements upgraded certain secondary data. Primary data has been category of people and degraded others. collected from 100 respondents Innocent children and women are the (parents), with the help of a well targets and victims of such structured questionnaire. The advertisements. secondary data has been collected from OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY: books, magazines and internet.A sample of 100 was targeted for the 1. To understand the impact of study. The sample consisted of advertising on children parents.Convenience sampling method 2. Toknow the relation between was used.The survey was confined to creativity of children and Bhimavaram, one of the famous towns advertisements in West Godavari District, Andhra Pradesh. 3.To analyze the importance of social advertisements DATA ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION: 4. To give necessary suggestions to avoid negative impact of advertising Figure 1: Are the kids influenced by certain entertainment actions like rapid jumps, chasing, galloping etc which are shown in a pleasant manner through advertisements

0 Respondents Percentage Opinion: Yes 80 80 Opinion:No 20 20

www.ijar.org.in 3 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Figure 2: Children have started to believe that their importance is measured by the degree of material possessions because of advertisements

0 Respondents Percentage Opinion: Yes 77 77 Opinion:No 23 23

Figure 3: Advertisements of junk foods like pizzas, burgers, soft drinks etc result in child obesity

100

0 Respondents Percentage Opinion: Yes 82 82 Opinion:No 18 18

Figure 4: Emotional and sexual appeals of products are offensive and innocent children are vulnerable to this kind of advertisements

0 Respondents Percentage Opinion: Yes 72 72 Opinion:No 28 28

www.ijar.org.in 4 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Table 5: Do you think tobacco and alcohol advertisements are threat to adolescents

100

0 Respondents Percentage Opinion: Yes 86 86 Opinion:No 14 14

Table 6: Non commercial advertisements issued by government department and social organizations like ‘blood donation campaigns’ will inculcate social responsible attitude among children

100

0 Respondents Percentage Opinion: Yes 88 88 Opinion:No 12 12

Table 7: Attractive advertisements of healthy food products can improve the diet of the child

100

0 Respondents Percentage Opinion: Yes 85 85 Opinion:No 15 15

www.ijar.org.in 5 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Table 8: Creative advertisements enhance innovative thoughts in children

0 Respondents Percentage Opinion: Yes 55 55 Opinion:No 45 45

Table 9: Advertisements enrich children about the existence of alternative technological products and their uses

0 Respondents Percentage Yes 60 60 No 40 40

Table 10:Whether advertisements help children in the process of learning different aspects

0 Respondents Percentage Opinion: Yes 56 56 Opinion:No 44 44

www.ijar.org.in 6 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

FINDINGS: will not have any impact on children. 1. From the Figure 1 it is clear that according to 80% of the respondents, 7. According to table 7, 85% of the children are influenced by respondents strongly believed that dangerous entertainment actions healthy food products shown in advertisements, whereas advertisements are improving the 20% of the respondents said that diet of their children and the those actions have no impact. remaining 15% respondents strongly believed that children are least 2. According to Figure2, 77% of the bothered diet related commercials. respondents said that the children measure their importance by the 8. Figure 8 reveals that according to degree of material possessions while 55% of the respondents, the remaining 23% of the advertisements enhance creativity of respondents disagreed with that children while 45% of the statement. respondents opined that advertisements cannot contribute 3. We can know from Figure 3 that, much to creativity. 82% of the respondents opined that junk food advertisements result in 9. Figure 9 indicate that according to child obesity while according to 60% of the respondents, children remaining 18% of the respondents gain knowledge about the there is no relation between child technological products through obesity and advertisements. advertisements, while according to remaining 40% of the respondents, 4. Figure 4 highlights that according to children are least bothered about 72% of the respondents; children are the advertisements of technological vulnerable to the sexual appeals products and are more concerned shown in the advertisements; about entertainment and food whereas 28% of the respondents related commercials. confirmed that children do not even understand about those types of 10. It is evident from Figure 10 that advertisements. 56% of the respondents agreed that advertisements help a lot in the 5. According to Figure 5, 86% of the learning process of children while respondents said that tobacco and according to 44% of the respondents alcohol advertisements are threat to children are too young to learn from adolescents while according to 14% advertisements. of the respondents because of discretion of the children there will SUGGESTIONS: be no affect. 1. Many children in India have become 6. Figure 6 projects that 88% of the blind in archery, the use of which has respondents hoped that because of been promoted by some advertisements. non-commercial advertisements the So entertainment actions should be social responsibility among children banned in commercials. will increase, while 12% of them 2.Along with material possessions, opined that social advertisements intellectual pursuit, spiritual and mental satisfaction also determines the

www.ijar.org.in 7 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 level of success. Advertising has created awareness of technological innovations a feeling among consumers that among children. material achievement is the sole 10. Advertisements should be planned in principle of life. such a manner that they help the 3. Working parents with no time to cook children in their overall personality , aggressive junk food ads, easy access of development. junk foods to school going children may CONCLUSION: lead to obesity among children. Advertisements by promoting demand 4. Children are lured by the emotional contributed much for the growth in and sexual materials shown in productive, industrial activities, advertisements which will foster the agriculture, service sector, exports etc growth of undesirable activities in the which resulted in the increase of society and thereby distort the values of national income and thereby raised the the society. standard of living of the people of India. 5. Tobacco and alcohol advertisements Both the government and private should be banned by the government for organizations should bring out as many the health, safety and welfare of future non-commercial advertisements as India. possible as they will lay a strong ethical foundation in the growth and 6. Both government and private development of children. Environment companies should initiate social should be created in such a manner that advertisements which provoke the social advertisers should need the media much responsibility attitude in children. rather than media needs the 7. Using celebrities and sports stars in advertisers. Tobacco and liquor healthy food related products advertisements should be banned by the commercials can improve the diet of Government strictly for the health of children. future India. Parents should explain the children regarding the pros and cons of 8. Creative contents in advertisements products that are being advertised and enable unique thinking capacity of enlighten them with ethical values with children. great patience. 9. Advertisements should be designed in an attractive manner that they raise the REFERENCES: 1. S. A. Chunawalla , Foundations of Advertising- 2. Sangeetha, Sharma Advertising- 3. C. R. Kothari ; Research Methodology-

www.ijar.org.in 8 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Prof. B.Kuberudu has been working as a professor in the Department of MBA, Andhra University Campus Kakinada. He has more than 23 years of teaching experience. He has been engaging research and guided several PhD and M. Phil Scholars and published several research papers in International and national journals. He attended conferences/seminars and submitted more than 100 papers. He got Eminent Educationist Award and also life member of various reputed associations. He is one of the advisory members of this IJAR

E.NagaSurendra, Assistant Professor,Vishnu Institute of Technology, Bhimavaram, Andhra Pradesh, He has more than 10 years of Teaching Experience and Published research papers and participated several national international seminars.

www.ijar.org.in 9 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

ANALYSIS OF RURAL HOUSEHOLD FOOD SECURITY IN WONAGO DISTRICT, GEDEO ZONE, SNNP REGIONAL STATE, ETHIOPIA

Goitom Weldegerima, Dilla University, College of Natural and Computational Sciences, Department of Statistics, Dilla University, Ethiopia

Abreham Kebedom, Dilla University, College of Agriculture and Natural resources, Dept of Agricultural Economics, Dilla University, Ethiopia

Nigussie Yohannse, Dilla University, College of Natural and Computational Sciences, Department of Statistics, Dilla University, Ethiopia

Abstract: The research is conducted in Wonago District with the objectives of measuring food security status of rural households and to identify factors influencing rural households’ food security status. The results of Logistic regression model indicated that, Farm size, improved seed, Non-farm income and Soil fertility were important variables which had positively and significantly influenced rural household’s food security status. On the other Slop of Plots had shown negative and significantly affected rural household’s food security status. Based on the finding of the current study it can be concluded that, policy and development interventions should give emphasis towards improvement of such economical, physical and institutional support system so as to change food security, increased productivity and increase income level of small scale farmers.

Keywords: Logistic Regression, Food Security, Rural Household, Wonego Woreda,

1. INTRODUCTION Food security, defined as “access by all Food security is fundamental element in people at all times to enough food for an human existence. Without food, nothing active healthy life”, is one of several happens: no economic growth, no science conditions that support optimal human and technology, no music and literature, health and productivity. Households not even procreation. Food security, as experience food insecurity when defined by [5] is “a state of affairs where availability or ability to acquire all people at all times have access to safe nutritionally adequate, safe foods in and nutritious food to maintain a socially acceptable ways is limited or healthy and active life”. Since the year uncertain. When food access becomes 1974, when the world was in the midst severely limited, adults and children in of food crisis, significant progress has food insecure households may been made towards providing food for experience overt hunger-- “the uneasy or reasonably larger number of hungry painful sensation caused by lack of people. food”. The World Food Conferences of the 1970’s and 80’s made one of the sweetest

www.ijar.org.in 10 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 declaration of “food for all…… within a supports about 85% of the population. decade no child will go to bed hungry, no This subsistence agriculture is actually family will fear for its next day’s bread, dependent on the natural resource base and no human being’s future and of the country. According to several capacities will stunted by reports and studies, the rural malnutrition…” Since these environment of Ethiopia is suffering declarations, however, the world has from heavy land degradation mainly due faced the most uneven distribution of to recurrent drought and food food (both quality and quantity) ever insecurity, shortage of water and other seen in the history of the world [14]. resource materials. Actually, average availability of food In the southern highlands it is said (measured as dietary energy supply) is that the dependence on perennial crops said to increase by over a tenth in the (coffee, chat, Ensete, etc) and the last three decades. During the same adoption of traditional farming systems period, developing countries recorded have reduced the subsistence crop yield increment in food availability by about a and resulted in food insecurity [4]. Even fifth. Today, more than any other time though there are cash crops like coffee in the history of mankind, the volume of and fruits as a source of income mainly poverty and food insecurity coupled with together with others crops in the study serious malnutrition and morbidities are area for food, there is food security knocking many doors of the people in problem. That is the reason why we are most developing world of sub-Saharan interested in this issue. African countries. Ethiopia, as one of the poor nations of the world, is facing Therefore, the main purpose of the repeated macro-and micro level food current study was to measure food insecurity coupled with environmental security status of rural households and degradation and depletion. to identify factors influencing rural households’ food security status in the In the last three decades, it has not study area. To deal with the been possible to produce adequate food aforementioned issues a combined effort to meet the needs of the fast growing of literature study, focus group population, attributed mainly to discussion and questionnaire based fragmented land holdings, successive survey were implemented droughts, untimely and unpredictable rainfall, antiquated farm technology, 2. METHODOLOGY lack of farm input, low producer prices and other ecological factors. On top of 2.1 Description of the Study Area this, the fast growing population has The study was conducted in Gedio zone, forced the practice of unhealthy one of zones in Southern Nations cultivation systems that deplete the soil; Nationalities and People’s Region its valuable nutrients and organic (SNNPR) state, of Ethiopia. It is situated matters, promoted erosion that forced at 368km south west of Addis Ababa. the land to loss its productivity. As a The agro ecology (temperature and result of such poor land management, amount of rain fall) varies from place to there has been excessive deforestation place. Most of people living in the without forestation, over cultivation and district are small scale farmers and the like. On the converse, agriculture is based on crop production and rearing of the main stay of the country, which an animal. Some of crops produced in

www.ijar.org.in 11 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 the district are inset, maize, wheat, a discrete outcome, such as group barley, coffee, chat and others. From the membership, from a set of predictor selling and exportable crops produced in variables that may be continuous, the district, coffee is the most dominant discrete, dichotomous, or a mix of any of crop. It is one of areas of Ethiopia where these. Generally, the dependent or better quality coffee is produced. The response variable is dichotomous study population includes rural (binary), such as presence or absence / households those currently reside in success or failure/ binary logistic Gedeo zone. regression is used. Logistic regression has a peculiar property of easiness to Gedeo zone share the largest boundary estimate logit differences for data with Oromiya region and only in the collected both retrospectively and north- east with Sidama Zone. Wonago prospectively [10]. There are two main Wereda is located approximately uses of logistic regression: Firstly, to between 6013`- 60 26` North latitude predict the group membership, since and 380 13`- 380 24` East longitude. The logistic regression calculates the area of Gedeo Zone is about 134,700 probability of success over the hectares and the two PAs occupy 2506 probability of failure, the results of the hectares. analysis are in the form of an odds ratio. Data collection techniques Secondly, logistic regression also provides knowledge of the relationships The survey was conducted over the and strengths among the variables. period Oct 2013–Jan 2014 in three kebele in the study area. In order to get Model Description the overall image of status of rural The dependent variable in binary household food security in the study logistic regression is usually area, the study was used both primary dichotomous, that is, the dependent and secondary data. The primary data variable can take the value 1 with were collected using interview schedule probability of success Pi or the value 0 (farmers) by considering 160 samples with probability of failure 1-Pi. The respondents. model for logistic regression analysis Data Analysis techniques assumes that the outcome variable  is categorical. The logistic model is defined Comparisons between food secured and as follows. Let  be a dichotomous food insecure were carried out through 1nx application of chi-square. The relative outcome random variable with influences of various explanatory categories 0 (food secure) and 1(food insecure). Let denote the variables on the dependent variable X knx  )1( were also analyzed. collection of k-predicator variables of  , Econometric Method (Logistic where X is called regression matrix and regression) Specification of the without the loading column of 1s is Logistic regression termed as predictor data matrix. Then, the conditional probability that a Logistic regression analysis extends the household head is food insecure given X techniques of multiple regression is denoted by Prob (  =1/  ) =Pi. The analysis to research situations in which i i the outcome variable is categorical. expression Pi has the form: Logistic regression allows one to predict

www.ijar.org.in 12 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

X  ...  X X  yi  y )1( e ii 22110 ikk e n  e xi   1  i P   1......  yL )|(    3... i X  ii 22110 ...  X ikk X   xi   xi  1 e 1 e i 1 1  e  1  e  ' Where, 210  k ),,,,,( The objective of stating likelihood Pi = the probability of household i being function is to get an estimator food insecure ˆˆ ˆ ˆ '  , ,..., k10  of  which maximizes i = the observed food security status of the likelihood function expressed in household i equation (3). Since the likelihood equations are nonlinear in the ' is a vector of unknown  k21 ),....,,( parameters, the Newton-Raphson coefficients. The model given in (1) is iterative maximum likelihood estimation logistic regression modal. The method that expresses ˆ at the (u+1) relationship between the predictor and response variables is not a linear the cycle of the iteration is expressed function; instead, the logarithmic ˆˆ 1 as u1  u   ' u  XRXVX u , where u transformation of equation yields the linear relationship between the = 0,1,2,3 … and Vˆ is a diagonal matrix predictor and response variables. The with its diagonal  logit transformation of Pi given as ˆ ˆ  elements  diagV   ii   )ycov()P1(P . follows:     P    i    Finally,  is the resultant maximum Pit i  loglog   X 2211 ... Xikkiio ...... 2 1Pi  likelihood estimator of ˆ with residual Parameter Estimation of Logistic  PyR ˆ (Collet, 1991; Greene, 1991). Regression Newton’s method usually converges to The maximum likelihood estimation the maximum of the log – likelihood in method is appropriate for estimating the just little iteration unless the data are logistic model parameters due to this especially badly conditioned (Greene, less restrictive nature of the underlying 1991). All the parameters ˆ ˆ  ˆ assumptions [9]. Hence, in this study , 10 ,..., k the maximum likelihood estimation and estimates of Pi for each subject were technique was applied to estimate computed using the SPSS and R. parameters of the model. Consider the Assessment of the Fitting Logistic  e x i Regression Model logistic model Pi   , since 1  e x i After estimating the coefficients the observed values of Y say,  ’s (i=1, 2, importance of each of the explanatory i variables have been assessed by 3… n) are independently distributed as carrying out statistical tests of the binomial with parameter Pi, the significance of the coefficients and the maximum likelihood function of Y is overall goodness of fit of the model was given by: tested. Finally, the predicting power of the model to discriminate between the

www.ijar.org.in 13 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 two groups defined by the response likelihood ratio test. This is appropriate variable will be evaluated [3]. for a variety of types of statistical models. [2] Argues that the likelihood The Wald Statistic ratio test is better, particularly if the The Wald test is a way of testing the sample size is small or the parameters significance of particular explanatory are many. The likelihood-ratio test uses variables in a statistical model. In the ratio of the maximized value of the logistic regression we have a binary likelihood function for the full model (L1) outcome variable and one or more over the maximized value of the explanatory variables. With each likelihood function for the simpler model explanatory variable in the model there (L0). The likelihood-ratio test Deviance is an associated parameter. The Wald statistic equals: test, described by [2], is one of a number L  of ways of testing whether the   0      o 1  (2)log()log(2log2 o LLLLLL 1 5)......  parameters associated with a group of L1  explanatory variables are zero. If for a particular explanatory variable, the This log transformation of the likelihood Wald test is significant, then we would functions yields a chi-squared statistic conclude that on parameter associated when n-(k+1) is large. with that variable is not zero, so that the Goodness of Fit of the Model variable should be included in the model. If the Wald test is not significant The goodness of fit of a model measures then that particular explanatory how well the model describes the variable can be omitted from the model. response variables. Assessing goodness of fit involves investigating how close Wald  2 statistics to test the values predicted by the model with that significance of individual coefficients in of observed values [3]. The comparison the model is: of observed to predicted values using the 2 likelihood function is based on the  ˆ   j statistic called deviance. W    )4.....(......  ˆ   SE( j )  n   Pˆ   1  Pˆ  D   y ln2  i   y ln)1(  i  6......   i   i    The Wald statistic was compared with a i1   y i   1 y i   2 distribution with 1 degree of For purposes of assessing the freedom. It is easy to calculate but its significance of an independent variable, reliability is questionable, particularly the values of D are compared with and for small samples. For data that produce without that particular independent large estimates of the coefficient, the variable in the equation: standard error is often inflated,  2 =D (model without variable)-D resulting in a smaller value for the Wald statistic, and therefore the explanatory (model with variable). variable may be incorrectly assumed to The goodness-of-fit 2 process evaluates be unimportant in the model [3]. x predictors that are eliminated from the Likelihood-Ratio Test full model, or predictors (and their An alternative and widely used interactions) that are added to a smaller approach to testing the significance of a model. In general, the question in number of explanatory variables is the comparing models is whether the log-

www.ijar.org.in 14 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 likelihood decreases or increases 3.2 Determinates of Food security significantly with the addition or among the Rural Household deletion of predictor(s). The second objective of this study was to RESULTS AND DISCUSSION assess determinants of food security status in the study area. This section This chapter presents and discusses the highlights the demographic, economic, results of households’ food security Physical and institutional analysis in the study area. The first characteristics of sample household in section of the chapter reports the food the study area. The variables discussed security status of the households. The under this topic are those expected to next three sections present socio- have certain relations with food economic background, about physical security. factors, institutional characteristics of the sample households. The purpose of Household Personal and Demographic these sections is to provide the first Variables impression about households’ food Table 1: Descriptive statistics between security status. Finally, the results of food security and food insecure econometric analysis of the categories determinants of food security status of the households is presented and Food security category ______discussed. Food secured Food insecure χ2 3.1 Food Security Status of the N % N % Households Age of HHH <30 4 2.67 2 1.33 The households’ food security status was 30-39 20 13.33 15 10 measured by direct survey of 40-49 35 23.33 18 12 consumption. Data on the available food 50-59 28 18.67 11 7.33 for consumption, from home production, >= 60 15 10 2 1.33 purchase and /or gift/loan/wage in kind 45.61*** for the previous seven (7) days before Marital status of the HHH the survey day by the household was Single 10 6.67 5 3.33 collected. Then the data were converted Married 45 30 21 14 to kilocalorie and then divided to Divorced 27 18 12 8 household size measured in AE. Widowed 20 13.33 10 6.67 Following this, the amount of energy in 5.622NS kilocalorie available for the household is Educational level of the HHH compared with the minimum Can't read/write 35 23.33 14 9.33 subsistence requirement per adult per Can read/write 27 18 17 11.33 day (i.e. 2100 kcal). As a result, from all Primary(1-4) 18 12 6 4 respondent households, 48 households Primary(5-8) 14 9.33 8 5.33 were found to be food insecure and 102 High school 8 5.33 3 2 of them food secure. It means that (32%) 31.55*** of the respondent households were food Source: own survey data, 2013; ***, and insecure and (68%) of them were food NS significant at 1 and non-significant secure. respectively

www.ijar.org.in 15 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Economic Variables N % N % Table 2: Descriptive statistics between Access of Improved Seed food security and food insecure Yes 49 32.67 34 22.67 *** categories No 53 35.33 14 9.33 9.421 Access of Farm Credit Food security category ______Yes 50 33.33 25 16.67 Food secured Food insecure χ2 No 52 34.67 23 15.33 38.067*** N % N % Agricultural input availability Yes 53 35.33 27 18 Off-farm activates No 49 32.67 21 14 1.073NS Yes 40 26.67 17 11.33 Source: own survey data, 2013; ***, and No 62 41.33 31 20.67 5.12*** NS significant at 1 and non-significant Farm Land Size respectively 0.25-1 32 21.33 18 12 3.2.1 Summary of Results of 1-1.5 40 26.67 12 8 Descriptive Statistics 1.5-2 20 13.33 10 6.67 >= 2 10 6.67 8 5.33 31.55NS Before passing to the econometric part of Source: own survey data, 2013; ***, and the analysis it is important to NS significant at 1 and non-significant summarize the results of the descriptive respectively statistics. The overall respondent’s personal and demographic, economic, Physical Factors institutional and physical variables were Table 3: Descriptive statistics between discussed using descriptive statistical food security and food insecure techniques. The results on each variable categories were demonstrated using tables and Food security category ______percentage. In doing so, respondents Food secured Food insecure χ2 were treated in two food security N % N % categories. The difference between food Soil Fertility Status securities categories were assessed using Low 12 8 7 4.67 Chi-square test statistics for Medium 60 40 21 14 discrete/dummy variables. Distribution High 30 20 20 13.33 was used to discriminate the two food 52.61*** security categories for dummy variables. Categories of slope Out of the hypothesized discrete/dummy Plain 52 34.67 22 14.67 variables; age, education level of Steep 37 24.67 18 12 household, off-farm income, access of Hilly 13 8.67 8 5.33 credit, access of improved seed, Slop of 36.187*** plots and soil fertility of farm were found to significantly difference across Source: own survey data, 2013; ***, and households at less than 1% level. NS significant at 1 and non-significant Similarly, farm size, agricultural input respectively availability and marital status were also Institutional Factors discrete variables which fail to Table 4: Descriptive statistics between discriminate between food security food security and food insecure categories. categories Food security category ______Food secured Food insecure χ2

www.ijar.org.in 16 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

3.3 The Results of Econometric Model secure than. The possible explanation is that assumption was soil fertility Table 5: Variables in the Final Multiple problem is one of the physical factors Logistic Regression Model affecting crop production and ˆ ˆ productivity. If farmers perceive they Predictor  Wald d.f Sig Exp (  ) have fertile land, they can get more Variables production from a given plot of land than. In the model soil fertility status as Constant -3.96 1.62 1 0.000 0.005 Plot slop -0.712 0.349 1 0.079 1.64 perceived by farmers was positively Farm size 0.789 0.074 1 0.000 1.603 related to food security. As a result, Improved other things held constant, the odds Seed 0.33 0.011 1 0.000 0.866 ratio in favor of farmer’s food security Non-farm status by a factor of 3.55 for a unit income 0.69 0.269 1 0.005 0.285 Soil fertility 1.268 6.406 1 0.011 3.55 increase of soil fertility. Therefore, this Log likelihood = 76.507161 result is in agreement with the finding ANOVA based fit measure (R2) = 0.6387 of [7]. Source: Model output, *, ** and *** Use of Improved seed: As expected this represents significance at 10%, 5% and variable was found to have significant 1% level respectively. positive (p < 0.01) effect with the food Total Farm Size: Land size owned by security status of households. household heads was found to have Households using improved seed are significant (P < 0.01) and positive more likely to be food secure than those relationship with food security status of who did not apply. Improved seed and households suggesting the larger the other technological inputs help farmers land size, the better food secure state of to augment productivity and to boost the household. The possible explanation production. Farmers can enhance their is that the major source of food in the production by using high yielding study area comes form own production varieties and other complementary and there was limited access to other farm. As a result, other things held means of income generating activities. constant, the odds ratio in favor of So the household who have large size of farmer’s food security status increases land has better production which gives a by a factor of 0.886 for a unit increase of better chance for the household to be the use of improved seed. food secured. The odds ratio of 1.603 for Non-Farm income: As expected non- farm size indicates that, other things farm income was found to have being constant, the odds ratio in favor of significant (p < 0.01) and positive farmer’s food security status by a factor relation with the food security status of of 1.603 as the farm size increases by the household indicating farmers one hectare. This result is in agreement engaged in non-farm activities have with the findings of [12, 16, 11 and 13]. better chance to be food secure. This Soil Fertility Status: This variable was might be due to the fact that households also found to be significant (p < 0.05) engaged in non-farm activities are better and positively related with the food endowed with additional income and security status of the household. Model more likely to escape food insecurity. results show that those farmers with The odds ratios 0.805 indicate that relatively fertile land are more food keeping the influences of other factors constant, the use of SWC practices

www.ijar.org.in 17 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 decrease by the rate of 0.285as non-farm improved seed, Access to farm credit and income increases by one unit. This Agricultural inputs. finding is consistent with the finding of A total of ten variables were fitted into food secure authors [1, 16, 12, 11 and the model of which, five variables were 13]. found to have influence on food security Slope of the plot (SLOPLOT): This status. Consequently, Slop of Plots, variable has negatively and significantly Farm size, improved seed, non-farm correlates with rural household food income and Soil fertility were found to security status at less than 10% have influence rural household food significant level. The higher slope security status. category of a plot, the greater will be Policy Recommendations food in security. This means that on sloppy plot the impact of soil erosion To enhance the food security situation of would be more visible to the farmers and the Wereda, concerned development this lead to reduce the fertility of soil actors should give appropriate attention and reduced the a mount of yield that to review the safety net implementation the farmers obtained from their farms manual and forward strategic decision thereby there is high probability that to revise the criteria set for distinguish the households failed in food insecure food secured and food insecure Weredas. category. The results of the odds ratio Land size is one the variables that show that the status of household food significantly influence the food security security by a factor of 1.64 for a unit status. Due to population pressure and increases in slope of the plot. The result the emerging of new prides (households) of this study confirms the findings of [15 every year, land fragmentation and 6] which revealed the slope of the continued. The caring capacity of the plot negatively and significantly related cultivated land decreased year after to the status of rural household food year. This situation more fastens the security. vulnerability of farmers to word food Conclusion insecurity. To cover the situation, enhancing the productivity of land The data were analyzed using SPSS through intensification using different software employing descriptive technologies is become vital. Introducing statistics, logit econometric model and technology like drip irrigation, presentation of group discussion results. promotion of high values crops and high Core Food Secure Modal was used to yielding varieties are some of the determine the status of food security possible alternatives. among sampled respondents. logit model was used to identify the major Diversifications of income through determinants of food security among the non-farm activities are other potential rural household. area for lift up the food secure status of the poor. The development actors should The two Food security categories gear their attention to work on this line differed at less than one percent level in highly required. The wereda also have a most of the hypothesized variables. The huge potential and favorable climate explanatory variables were age of HH condition for woodlot production. head, marital status, level of education, However, market for this potential is not household off-farm income, Farm size, available as expected. Thus, it is vital to soil fertility, slop of plot, Access to

www.ijar.org.in 18 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 facilitate the modern system of woodlot 4. Eshetu Belay, 2000. The root production and its associated market. causes of food insecurity and coping Facilitation of credit service and mechanisms of rural households: A business skill capacity building to case study of Wereilu Woreda. M. farmers (to encourage non-farm Sc. Thesis, AAU, Ethiopia. engagement) especially for youngster 5. FAO, 1998. Agriculture, food and who always leaves their village in nutrition for Africa. A resource search of temporary labor one another book for teachers of agriculture. area of intervention. Rome, Italy. Use of Improved seed varieties was 6. Gebresenbet Sebgaze, 2008. positively and strongly associated with Determinants of Adoption and food security in the study area. Intensity of Use of Improved Soil Improved seed augmented agricultural and Water Conservation Practices production and improved the food in Sodo District, Gurage Zone, security situation of farmers. Southern Part of Ethiopia. Thesis Introduction of different varieties of Presented To School of Graduate improved seed required appropriate Studies of Alemaya attention by relevant actors. Strengthen University.Ethiopia. linkage among farmer, extension and research to the required levels highly 7. Genene Tsegaye, 2006. Farmers. recommended in order to make the Perceptions of Land Degradation technology more suitable to end users. and Determinants of Household Food Security Status at Middle Soil fertility status was one of the Catchments of Bilate Watershed. A critical factors determined food security Thesis Prepared to the School of status in the study area. Improving the Graduate Studies, Alemaya soil fertility status through University. implementing different integrated physical and biological soil and water 8. Greene, W. H. 1991. Econometric conservation practice are some the Analysis. 2nd Edition. New York, possible alternatives. Macmillan.

REFERENCE 9. Hosmer, D. and Lemeshow, S. 1989. Applied Logistic Regression. 1. Abebaw Shimeles, 2003. John Wiley and Sons, Inc. Dimensions and determinants of food security among rural 10. McCullough, P. and Nelder, J.A. households in Dire Dawa, Eastern 1983. Generalized Linear Models. Ethiopia. An M. Sc. Thesis Chapman & Hall, New York. presented to the School of Graduate 11. Mulugeta Tefera, 2002. Studies of Alemaya University, Determinants of household food Alemaya. 152p. security in Eastern Oromia, 2. Agresti, A. 1996. An Introduction to Ethiopia: the case of Boke District Categorical Data Analysis. John of Western Hararghe Zone. An M. Wiley Inc., Singapore. Sc. Thesis presented to the School of Graduate Studies of Alemaya 3. Bewick, L. and Jonathan, B. 2005. University, Alemaya. 151p. Statistics Review 14: Logistic Regression.

www.ijar.org.in 19 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

12. Tesfaye Kumbi, 2005. Household 15. Wageayehu, Lars D., 2003. Soil and food insecurity in Dodota-sire Water Conservation Decision District, Arsi Zone: coping Behavior of Substance Farmers in strategies and policy options. An M. the EasternHighlands of Ethiopia: Sc. Thesis presented to the School a Case Study of the Hunde Lafto of Graduate Studies of Alemaya Area. Ecological economics, 46: 437- University, Alemaya. 142p. 451, 13. Tewodros Alemayehu, 2007. 16. Yilma Muluken, 2005. Measuring Analysis of Household Food rural household food security Security: The Case of Argoba status and its determinants in the Nationality in Fedis Woreda, East Benishangul Gumuz Region, Hararghe Zone of Oromia, Ethiopia: the case of Assosa Ethihiopa. A Thesis Prepared to the Woreda. An M. Sc. Thesis School of Graduate Studies, presented to the School of Graduate Alemaya University Studies of Alemaya University, Alemaya. 147p. 14. UNDP, 1992. Human development report of 1992. New York, USA.

Mr Aberham Kebedom Obtained his MSc in Rural Development in 2012 from Haramaya University. From then, He has published on papers in peer-reviewed journals. He is head, Department of Agricultural economics in Dilla University. Research interest includes Innovative Technology transfer, food security issues, farming system and socio- economical, development issues and so on. Mr Goitom Weldegerima Obtained his MSc in Applied Statistics in 2012 from Hawassa University. From then, He has published on papers in peer-reviewed journals. He is vice Dean, College of Natural and Computational Sciences of Dilla University. Research interest includes Innovative Technology transfer, food security issues

www.ijar.org.in 20 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

EVALUATION OF RURAL DEVELOPMENT POLICY AND STRATEGY IN ETHIOPIA

Dr.P. NandeeswaraRao, Assistant Professor, Hawassa University, Ethiopia Dr. Neduri Suryanarayana, Professor, Dilla University, Ethiopia

Abstract The adoption of Agricultural Development Led Industrialization Strategy provided long-term development framework for economic transformation. Adjustment policies focused on liberalization of prices and markets, removal of subsides, reduction of tariffs, and current account convertibility. The land policy states that land belongs to the people and that the Federal and regional governments administer it on behalf of the people. Land is a factor of production like capital and labour. The FDRE’s rural development policies and strategies have already accorded special attention that these areas deserve. The life of the people in these regions is based on cattle breeding and mobility with cattle from place to place. To improve the life of the people calls for a development strategy that is firmly based on livestock development. Keywords: Ethiopia, Rural development policies and strategies

1. Introduction growth by correcting distortions resulted from the previous regimes centrally Ethiopia is the second most planned command economic system. The populous country in Sub-Saharan Africa macroeconomic policy prescriptions with a population of above 90 million in dictate conservative fiscal and monetary (CSA July 2013). The country has a long policy so as to reduce the fiscal deficit history, mosaic of peoples and diverse and let the market to play its primary cultures. Ethiopia has reasonably good role in resource allocation. During this resource potential for development- period the country also adopted the agriculture, biodiversity, water Agriculture Development Led resources, minerals, etc. Yet, Ethiopia is Industrialization (ADLI) strategy. As a faced with complex poverty, which is result of the fiscal reform measures and broad, deep and structural. The non-inflationary sources of financing the proportion of the population below the budgetary deficit, government savings poverty line is 44 per cent in 1999/2000. increased and budget deficits were Thus, poverty eradication was and is the reduced. central development agenda of the government that guides its development The ADLI include promotion of activities. economic efficiency and growth, development of domestic technological Since October 1992, Ethiopia had capacities and capabilities for the been adopting a series of economic promotion and development of small, reform measures under the Structural intermediate and capital goods Adjustment Program directed and industries. By implementing this funded by the IMF and WB. These national economy policy real Gross measures were meant to faster economic

www.ijar.org.in 21 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Domestic product (GDP) of the country based growth. (Source MOFED, grew for the seventh time in a row in PASDEP and GTP document) two-digit rates from 2003/04 through to 2. Socio-economic Performance of 2009/10. The registered growth was Ethiopia achieved mainly due to the improved performance of the agricultural sector. The country has long-standing This growth has been achieved through history, diverse cultural heritage, and broad-based and diversified activities in reasonably good resource potential for which structural transformation was development. Yet, the majority of the evidenced. Export earnings are steadily population lives in absolute poverty. In increasing owing to the increase in the this context, the 1980s was marked by a value and volume of export commodities. state of crisis. Thus, by the turn of the As a result of the economic growth, the 1990s economic policies and total imported commodities of the management under the command country have also increased. economic system, protracted civil war and recurring drought left the economy The country launched three in deep crisis which manifested itself, consecutive PRSPs namely Sustainable among others, in: weak economy where Development and Poverty Reduction growth plunged in most of the years and Program (SDPRP) in 2002, Plan for accompanied by loss of productive Accelerated and Sustainable capacity, competitiveness, and increased Development to End Poverty (PASDEP) food insecurity; severe macroeconomic in 2005/06 and Growth and imbalance and instability, and social Transformation Plan (GTP) in 2009/10. crisis involving millions of displaced Real GDP has been growing at double persons, refugees, demobilized soldiers, digit since between 2002/03- 2010/11 for homelessness and unemployed people. the last consecutive years averaged real GDP growth is 11.3%. The success for The adoption of Agricultural economic growth the government Development Led Industrialization economic policy and the commitment are Strategy (ADLI) provided long-term taking great shares. To achieve the development framework for economic economic growth government has taking transformation. Adjustment policies a lesson from SDPRP and PASDEP plan focused on liberalization of prices and period, and continuing economic growth markets, removal of subsides, reduction by designing GTP five year program to of tariffs, and current account achieve the higher economic growth an convertibility. These were buttressed average 11% of real GDP growth for next with fiscal and monetary policy five years. During 2010/11, the country discipline. The favourable policy has registered 11.4 % real GDP growth environment created by the economic rate surpassing the GTP target of 11 reform, coupled with macro-economic percent. Particularly, the agriculture stability, invigorated the domestic and industry sectors have registered private sector, which was suppressed growth rates above their targets set for during the Derg period. The smallholder the year. Clearly, more effective farming family was made the focus of implementation of prudent economic development with a massive macroeconomic and sectoral policies has agricultural extension and credit contributed to this faster and broad- scheme, and expansion of primary

www.ijar.org.in 22 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 education, primary health care, rural volatile due to weather induced water supply and rural roads. fluctuation in the agricultural sector as well as associated terms of trade. Apart Clearly notable during this from the growth in agricultural sector, period is that the country’s economy the sustained growth since 2003/04 is shifted to a higher growth trajectory and complemented by strong performance in more diversified sources. As shown construction, manufacturing, trade and below the table Real GDP has been tourism, banking and insurance and real growing at double digit since 2003/04 estate sectors and sub sectors. averaged 11.3% between 2002/03- 2010/11. In the past growth had been Table1: Trends in Economic growth between 2001/02-2010/11 Sl.no Years Real GDP (in Millions Birr’s ) Growth of real GDP 1 2001/02 68,012 1.6 2 2002/03 66,587 2.1 3 2003/04 74,397 11.7 4 2004/05 83,804 12.6 5 2005/06 93,474 11.5 6 2006/07 104,499 11.8 7 2007/08 116,190 11.2 8 2008/09 127,844 10 9 2009/10 141,187 10.4 10 2010/11 157,464 11.4 Source: NBE Report 2010/11

3. Rural Development Policies and development activities as well as the Strategies in Ethiopia – Core opportunities that could be realized. Objectives: The coordination of the various tasks can make significant contributions to a Rural development is not solely rapid and sustainable growth. confined to agricultural development; it Coordination is required not only embraces a number of activities outside among the activities within agriculture agricultural development proper. but also with the rest of the socio However, in the Ethiopian context, economic sectors. agricultural development is central to rural development. The basic principles b) Development Path Compatible with that govern agricultural development Different Agro-Ecological Zones: policies and strategies in the country Ethiopia is endowed with a variety of are outlined below: The Major agro-ecological zones that differ in Directions of Rural and Agricultural terms of rainfall pattern, soil types, Development policy and strategy are: altitude and other physical landscapes. (a) Coordinated Development Path: The c) Adoption of Labour Intensive agricultural development effort needs Strategy: Within the framework of the to be an integrated and coordinated strategies enunciated above, one. There is a need for identifying the accelerated and sustainable growth in linkages among the aspects of rural Ethiopia can be brought about by

www.ijar.org.in 23 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 utilizing labour-intensive rather than overall socio-economic development. capital-intensive production The need for developing the profile of processes.This is more so for the land resources and harmonization of agricultural sector than the other existing land use policies of regional sectors. An important mechanism that states is high on the agenda. Land enables to introduce labour-intensive resources earmarked for pasture, strategies and help to employ modern cultivation, urban development, and agricultural inputs and practices is the commercial farm need to be worked out adoption of new agricultural and articulated by each regional technologies and the training of the state/city administration. agricultural labour force with effective Improving Utilization of Water skills. (b) Resources: d) Proper Utilization of Agricultural A reliable water supply and Land: It is impossible to ensure management system is essential for agricultural development at the desired accelerated and sustainable rate and on a sustainable basis, unless agricultural development. Ethiopia is we are able to use our land efficiently. endowed with vast surface and In this respect, guaranteeing the underground water resources. availability of land for people who are Ethiopian government has been trying able and willing to make a living out of to develop the country's water farming is fundamental and is a step in resources by using its own financial the right direction for proper use of resources. land resources. A careful use of our natural resources is expected to With regard to the Nile basin, contribute to sustainable development Ethiopia, Egypt and the Sudan have via enhancing productivity of the already agreed on a 20 year water agricultural sector. The utilization of development and utilization plan. The land in a manner that maximizes its need for primarily addressing contribution to overall development is environmental protection is a priority the direction that will guide agenda on the part of Ethiopia. agricultural policies and strategies. Ethiopia is expected to benefit to a greater extent from hydropower 4. Evaluation of Key Policies and generation, which is to be partly strategies in Ethiopia: exported to neighbouring countries. (a) Land Policy: There is also a potential for developing a number of irrigation schemes. The land policy states that land belongs to the people and that the Supplying adequate and clean Federal and regional governments water to the population improves many administer it on behalf of the people. of the economic and social dimensions The farmer may use his/her own labour of poverty. It improves the health of the as well as that of the family to cultivate population with concomitant advances the land or hired labour could be in the quality of life. Moreover, it used.Land, whether private or releases the labor used to carry water, government owned should be utilized in which in turn could be used elsewhere, such a way that its opportunity cost mainly in education for girls. does not nullify its contribution to

www.ijar.org.in 24 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Access to safe potable water in The development efforts here the year 2000 for urban areas in should be based on the integrated Ethiopia was 72%, and if Addis Ababa development programmes of these is excluded the figure drops to 38%. regions and oriented towards Access to safe potable water for rural accelerating regional development in Ethiopia is about 24%. The country general as well as overall national utilizes only a small proportion of its economic development. aggregate annual run-off of 122 billion Pastoralist is a method of cubic meters and its ground water agricultural exploitation based upon potential of 2.6 billion cubic meters. extensive herding where movements of Moreover, the country's hydropower herds and men are the major generation potential of 650 TWH per components of the system. The human year and 10 million hectare of population of pastoral areas is potentially irrigable land is almost estimated to be between 12- 15% of the untouched. Except for Addis Ababa and country of which 93% are pastoral/agro a few urban centers, sanitation pastoral and the remaining 7% depend facilities are basically non-existent. on other agricultural activities (c) Pastoral development: (hunting, petty trade, mining etc). Pastoral areas in Ethiopia are located The FDRE’s rural development in the North-eastern, Eastern, policies and strategies have already Southern-Eastern, and Southern, accorded special attention that these &South-western part of the country. areas deserve. The life of the people in these regions is based on cattle (d) Agricultural Marketing initiatives: breeding and mobility with cattle from a) Market Forces’ and the Marketable place to place In pastoral areas, the Surplus need for the development of institutions which administer pasture lands among Farmers in Ethiopia allocate pastoral communities without violating most of their agricultural produce for indigenous long standing community is their own consumption. Moreover, most of paramount importance. of them do not produce enough for their own consumption. Hence, the farmers’ The following issues are worth own hither to unsatisfy consumption considering in this regard: Assessing demand would absorb initial increases the physical and climatic endowments in agricultural production.The of the lands and the operating transition to a market-based constraints thereof, Putting in place agricultural system is possible provided the necessary infrastructure facilities that development packages are selected and ensuring an adequate supply of and prepared carefully, technologies labour, As these are disease prone are continuously improved and areas (particularly malaria), availing supplied to farmers on a sustainable adequate basic health delivery system, basis and are provided with adequate Implementing appropriate settlement education, technical training and programmes side by side with services on a sustainable basis. These encouraging private investors to, need to be supplemented by relatively participate in the establishment of stable and remunerative prices and large-scale commercial farms and agro- industries

www.ijar.org.in 25 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 well-functioning input and output productivity and ensure sustainable markets. development of the agriculture sector. Hence, if we wish to increase b) Improving the Agricultural investment in agriculture and Marketing System accelerate development, rural sources The success of agricultural of finance that can extend loans and development depends, among others, credits to farmers in sufficient amounts on the existence of an efficient and sustainably need to be expanded. marketing system. If the marketing Moreover, the existence of a system is inefficient, high marketing strong financial system is essential for costs will render products a strong agricultural marketing uncompetitive particularly on the system. Cooperatives can serve as international market. Standardization distribution agents for major importers of agricultural products, improving the and factories without actually having to supply of market information system, buy agricultural inputs and expanding and strengthening implements in cash and thereby settle cooperatives, and strengthening private their bills from farmers after sales. sector participation are key elements Such trading modalities will be affected for proper functioning of the when there are cooperatives that are agriculture marketing system. financially viable and strong. Thus, Attempts will be made to setting a mechanisms must be instituted specified standard for agricultural whereby cooperatives can trade with products well ahead of time to be farmers and other economic actors in observed by both suppliers and cash. produces of agricultural products. (f) Rural Electrification (e) Rural Finance It is clear that Ethiopia has one The Government's agricultural of the lowest levels of electricity development strategy relies heavily on generation per capita in the world, enhancing the productive capacity of which stood at 28KWh. Only 13% of the our people (labor) along with population has access to electricity. mobilization of the complementary Electricity is, thus, a major constraint scarce financial resources. Lack of towards establishment of agro- financial resources threatens farmers' processing industries, commercial productivity and put them into a enterprises and irrigation facilities in vicious circle from which it is almost the rural areas. Besides, delivery of impossible to extricate them. Enabling health and education services remains smallholder farmers’ access to credit inefficient in the absence of can break this vicious circle.They will electricity.The Rural Electrification use such credit to increase their output Project is designed to address the and earn more income and in turn this aforementioned constraints, which will enable them repay their loans, take impeded the development of rural additional loans, and use these in towns. The project will also support the conjunction with their own savings to Agricultural Development Led buy inputs and implements in larger Industrialization Strategy (ADLI) by quantities and improved qualities. This providing consumers access to in turn would help improve their electricity and thereby enhancing

www.ijar.org.in 26 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 overall development efforts. In brief, sector and complement the sect oral the project will facilitate all rounded development programs. economic growth in the rural areas and The first phase of the Program create employment opportunities for (1997-2002) is a culmination of the the poor, including women, thereby Government’s effort, with significant increasing income levels and reducing support from the donor community, to poverty. The project is targeted to create adequate capacity in the road electrify 164 Woreda towns to provide sub-sector to facilitate and hasten the customers access to electricity. economic recovery process and restore Successful completion of this project the essential road networks to an shall bring all regional governments to acceptable condition. The Program the same level of electrification of covered measures aimed at: (a) creating Woreda towns. a conducive atmosphere in the road (g) Rural Telecommunications sector through introducing a serious of Development policy and institutional reforms, and (b) rehabilitating critical roads that have Although the introduction of been identified as major impediments telecommunication in Ethiopia dates towards the attainment of the back to 1894, it has remained under objectives of the Economic Recovery low level of development under Program. In this regard, the different organizational structures. At rehabilitation of trunk roads and present the Ethiopian upgrading of some link roads have been Telecommunications Corporation (ETC) accorded highest priority as they had provides all the telecommunication proved to be a major constraint in the services in Ethiopia. The objectives of evacuation of crops, the delivery of ETC as stated in its establishment agricultural inputs, and access to ports. regulation of 1996 Article 5 are: To engage, in accordance with The second phase of RSDP is development policies and priorities of now being launched. It will the Government, in the construction, dramatically improve the road network operation, maintenance and expansion connecting different regions of the of telecommunication services; To country. Besides, the Ethiopian Rural provide domestic and international Travel and Transport Sub-Program telephone, telex, telefax and other (ERTTP) is also now being launched to communication services; address the constraints of transport at the village level. (h) Roads (i) Food Security Road infrastructure in Ethiopia had reached such a level of The magnitude of consumption deterioration in the early 1990s that it poverty indicators outlined in the became a serious hindrance to the section on poverty profile of Ethiopia is Government’s efforts in reviving the clear manifestation of the scope and economy. In recognition of this, the depth of the food insecurity problems in Government launched the Road Sector Ethiopia. It is manifested directly in Development Program (RSDP) in 1997 three food security components: to tackle the shortcomings in the road adequacy of supply (production, reduction of post harvest loses, import

www.ijar.org.in 27 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 levels), stability of supply (production (j) Human Capacity Building and stability, regional and inter temporal Utilization price stability) and access to supply The economic development (purchasing power, or income level and strategy, in general and our access to employment). agricultural development strategy in In any one year, more than four particular, is based on building the million people face food shortages and productive capacity of the labour force need relief assistance which is met and employing the same intensively in through annual appeals. The figure development activities. Building the includes those who are both in chronic productive capacity of the labour force and transitory food insecurity. The includes: Further developing the drive, regional profile of food insecurity preparedness and industriousness of reflects variation in deprivation among the labour force, Upgrading regions. The food poverty has become agricultural skills, improving the equally important in both rural and health status of the population, urban areas. The proportion of the aligning the above with the supply, population under food poverty declined replication and diffusion of technology. from 47% in 1995/96 to 42% in (i) Education 1999/2000 whereas the corresponding level for urban areas stood at 32.5% Realizing the positive role that and 46.7% respectively-reflecting education plays in the development of a growing problem in urban areas. The society and reducing poverty, the consequences of food insecurity are Ethiopian government has adopted a reflected in the high level of new Education and Training Policy malnutrition (stunting and wasting of (ETP) in 1994. The document outlined children less than five years of age). A the mission and goals of the new combination of factors has resulted in education system of Ethiopia to achieve serious and growing problem of food the present and future national insecurity in Ethiopia. economic and social development goals. The policy focuses on increasing access Adverse climate changes to educational opportunities with (drought) combined with high human enhanced equity, quality and relevance. population pressure, environmental This was the basis for the multi-year degradation, technological and Educational Sector Development institutional factors have led to a Program (ESDP) that stared in 1997/98 decline in the size of per capita land with the long-term goal of achieving holding. This was exacerbated by policy universal primary education by the induced stagnation of agriculture and year 2015. The second phase of this internal conflict and instability in the program, ESDP II, shall span for three past resulting into the widening of the years similar to that of PRSP, from food gap for more than two decades, 2002/03 to 2004/05. which had to be bridged by food aid. Increasing urban poverty is largely (ii) Health attributed to limited broad based Ethiopia is known to have one employment and income earning of the lowest health statuses in the opportunities in urban areas. world. This is mainly due to backward socioeconomic development resulting in

www.ijar.org.in 28 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 widespread poverty, low standard of established at hospitals and other living, poor environmental conditions health facilities. and inadequate health services. Conclusion Realizing this state of affairs, the Federal Democratic Republic of The problem of widespread Ethiopia, embarked on a rapid poverty is one of the most serious economic development and a multi- challenges facing Ethiopia. Currently, pronged poverty reduction the government is seriously engaged to programmes. In line with this strategy, deepen the process. Commercialization, it took a number of measures in the diversification and Specialization is to health sector including the design of an be intensified through farmers training appropriate sectoral policy, strategy and support of the extension system. and a twenty-year rolling health This will help the farmer to transit development programme. In response from producing for subsistence to to the prevailing and newly emerging producing for the market, in the health problems as well as in process realizing market driven recognition of the weaknesses of the agricultural development. This creates existing health delivery system, the a basis for strong agriculture industry first phase of Health Sector linkage for structural transformation of Development Programme (HSDP I) was the Ethiopian economy.The launched in 1998 (EFY 1990). It was government is working towards developed in the context of a strong effective mobilization and coordinated government commitment to democracy use of the resources of the public, and decentralization, and was designed private, NGOs and communities to explicitly to respond to the health care ensure rapid, broad based development needs of the rural population who and effectively attack one of the most constitute 85% of the total population. serious challenges that Ethiopia is The sectoral programme demonstrates facing –deep and wide poverty.There is the priority that the Government an expectation for increased inflow of accords to health, and backed by a firm ODA resources to support the country’s commitment to allocate the necessary strategy and priority programs for internal and external resources to broad-based development and poverty facilitate HSDP implementation. reduction. It is also expected that aid flows are not impeded by traditional The need for broad partnership aid delivery mechanism. There is a between, and active involvement of all clear and strong preference for budget potential partners involved in the support, which becomes an imperative financing, delivery, management, and with the ongoing decentralization from use of health services was also regions to Woreda and Kebeles. recognized at an early stage, and HSDP Development partners are also I was therefore developed through a expected to facilitate market access broad consultative process. It included trade and foreign investment flows to mechanisms for transfer of power to the Ethiopia to contribute to the realization communities and their representatives of development and poverty reduction in the management and support of local objective of Ethiopia. health service delivery, through health committees and management boards

www.ijar.org.in 29 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Reference: the 1980s, FSS Discussion Paper 1. AlemayehuSeyoum, et. Al. (2006) No. 11, Addis Ababa, Forum for Agricultural Growth Linkages in Social Studies. Ethiopia: Preliminary Results from 9. Devereux, S., AmdissaTeshome and a Fixed-Price Model, EEA/IFPRI Sabates-Wheeler, R. (2005) Too Seminar, Addis Ababa. Much Inequality or Too Little? 2. AmdissaTeshome (2005) “Policy Inequality and Agricultural Dialogue with Regional Key Stagnation in Ethiopian Informants”, for Young Lives Agriculture, IDS Bulletine Vol. 36, Project, Save the Children UK, No. 2 (pp 121-126). Addis Ababa. 10. Devereux, S. Sharp, K. and 3. Bijlmakers, L. (2003) Process and YaredAmare (2003), Destitution in Impact of the PRSP in Ethiopia: A Wollo, Ethiopia, IDS Research case study commissioned by Report 55, Brighton, Institute of Wemos. Development Studies. 4. Buckley, G. J. (2004) Decent Work 11. EEA/EEPRI (2005) Report on the in a Least Developed Country: A Ethiopian Economy, Volume IV critical assessment of the Ethiopia 2004/05, Ethiopian Economic PRSP, Working Paper No. 42, Association, Addis Ababa. Policy Integration Department 12. Ethiopian Business Community’s National Policy Group, (c2006) A Review of SDPRP 1 and International Labour Office, Recommendation for Inclusion in Geneva PASDEP’, Addis Ababa. 5. Bureau of Finance and Economic 13. Ethiopian Herald, Jan 14, 2006. Development (2004) Public 14. FDRE (2002) Food Security Expenditure Administration and Strategy, Addis Ababa. Control sub programme, Southern 15. FDRE (2002) Rural Development Nations and Nationalities and Policies, Strategies and People’s Regional State, Awassa. Instruments, Addis Ababa. 6. Carswell, G. (2002) “Complexity, 16. FDRE (2002) Sustainable Change & Continuity in Southern Development and Poverty Ethiopia: the case of crop-livestock Reduction Programme, Addis integration”, in Pathways of Ababa. . Change in Africa: Crops, Livestock 17. Keeley, J. and Scoones, I. (2000). & Livelihoods in Mali, Ethiopia & “Knowledge, Power and Politics: Zimbabwe, I. Scoones and W. the environmental policy-making Wolmer (eds), James Currey, process in Ethiopia”, The Journal of Oxford. Modern African Studies, 38, 1, pp 7. DessalegnRahmato (2004) 89-120. Also (2003), in: Searching for Tenure Security? The Understanding Environmental Land System and New Policy Policy Processes. Cases from Africa. Initiatives in Ethiopia. Forum For Earthscan: London. Social Studies, Discussion Paper No. 12 8. DessalegnRahmato. (2003) Resettlement in Ethiopia: the tragedy of population relocation in

www.ijar.org.in 30 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

A STUDY ONPRIMARY SCHOOL TEACHERS’EFFECTIVENESS

Prof. Sunita Godiyal, Department of Education, H.N.B.Garhwal University Campus BadshaiThaul, TehriGarhwal, Uttarakhand

Abstract The earlier research gives details that there is no any research has specifically focused on the effectiveness of the primary school teachers, it would be reasonable to assume that teachers’ effectiveness would positively influence the school environment and students achievements in different levels in large extent. The findings of this study suggest that effectiveness make teachers as well as workers more sensitive toward their work. Key words: Intellectual, investment, successful, Teacher

Introduction Teacher has to set new ideals and norms, and inculcate the values of Teacher is significant agent in human welfare and mutual goodwill causing learning and intellectual among the students. The goal of every development of the learners (Tuxworth, teaching is effective teaching. However, 1982). NCTE (1998) noted that, “The only that teaching is successful that teacher is the most important element in brings about effective learning. How far any educational programme. It is the the teaching is successful can be judged teacher who is mainly responsible for by the results that last and that a implementation of the educational learner can and does actually use in his process at any stage. No amount of life (James, 1956). investment in improving the physical and educational facilities can improve In the whole educational education unless there are adequate process a good and effective teacher number of well qualified teachers who occupies a place of tremendous can and willingly implement the importance and the importance of educational process in such a way that it teachers in the educational process is brings about the desired educational unquestionable. An effective teacher is development of the students. A amongst the foremost factors competent and effective teacher will help contributing to educational in national development. An effective improvements. According to Ryans teacher must have a positive attitude (1969), “the problem of identification of towards teaching as a profession and effective teachers is, therefore, of prime dedication to teaching, because attitude importance for realizing desirable is an important aspect in quality educational goals. An effective teacher teaching (Parmaret al. 2008). According may be understood as one who helps to Remmers (1952), “Teachers development of basic skills, effectiveness is the degree to which an understandings, proper work-habits, agent of teaching produces effects on the desirable attitudes, value judgment and learners.” adequate personal adjustment of the students.

www.ijar.org.in 31 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Teacher effectiveness is an area as well as workers more sensitive toward of research which is concerned with their work. relationship between the characteristics OBJECTIVE: To study the effectiveness of teacher, teaching acts and their effects of teachersworking in Primary Schools on the educational outcomes of classroom teaching (Flanders and Simon 1969). METHODOLOGY Nenty (1988) also found that teachers The sample for the study comprised of attitude to work to be important factor in 300 teachers (180 male teachers and 120 accounting student’s academic female teachers from primary schools) of performance which serves to the most district Tehri of Uttarakhand State.For important factor in the educational the assessment of Effectiveness of process. Anderson (1982) has reported teachers theKulsum Teacher that teachers’ commitment to improve Effectiveness Scale was used. The scale students’ academic performance as a reliability has been reported 0.82 to 0.79 significant variables in school climate. (Split half reliability and Test - re- Test Anand (1983) has expressed that reliability). The scale consists of 60 items teachers’ effectiveness is decidedly to measure the Effectiveness of governed by a number of factors such as Teachers. The weightage allotted from 5 personality component, behaviour, and to 1 point. Thus the maximum score on relationship with school community, scale to be 300 and the minimum is to be qualifications and job-satisfaction. 60 respectively. Teacher obtained 282 or Therefore, no research has high score on effectiveness scale specifically focused on the effectiveness considered as high effective and teacher of the primary school teachers, it would obtained 242 or less score on be reasonable to assume that teachers’ effectiveness scale considered as low effectiveness would positively influence effective teacher respectively. the school environment and students HYPOTESES: There exists significant achievements in different levels in large difference between the effectiveness of extent. The findings of this study male and female teachers working in suggest that effectiveness make teachers Primary schools.

Results and Discussion:- Scores were calculated for the Effectiveness of Primary School Teachers as follows:-

Table:1: Effectiveness of Primary School Teachers No. of Teachers Mean Sd. t- value

Male 180 253.16 29.17 0.97 Female 120 256.43 28.42 N.S df- 298 .* Significant at 0.05 level

www.ijar.org.in 32 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

It is apparent from the table 01, difference was not found up to level of that female teachers obtained more significant. This might be due to the mean value (M=256.43) in comparison to personal as well as professional liking or male teachers (M=253.16). The school environment . Table:2: Mean, sd and t-value on Effectiveness of Teachers working in Urban and Rural Area’s Primary School No. of Mean Sd. t- value Teachers Male Teachers (Urban 90 249.38 35.43 0.83 Area) N.S (df-138) Female Teachers (Urban 50 254.44 30.67 Area) Male Teachers (Rural 90 256.93 20.67 0.23 Area) N.S (df-158) Female Teachers (Rural 70 257.84 26.84 Area) * Significant at 0.01 level It is apparent from the table 02, that The female teachers having female teachers working in urban better degree of mean values than to locality obtained more mean value male teacher either they are working in (M=254.44) in comparison to male urban locality Primary schools or teachers (M=249.38). Whereas, female primary schools situated in rural teachers working in rural locality locality. It indicates that female primaryschools also obtained more mean teachers’ effectiveness does not affected value (M=257.84) in comparison to their by the location of schools they are male counterparts (M=256.93). The equally effective either they are working difference was not found up to level of in urban locality schools as well as significant. This might be due to the school situated in rural locality. personal as well as professional liking of REFERENCES male teachers working in urban locality primary schools or rural locality primary Anand, S.P. (1983): Teacher schools. Effectiveness in Schools. Journal of Indian Education, Vol, 8, No, March As such, the hypothesis that, 1983, p. 3-12. “There exists no significant difference between the effectiveness of male and Anderson (1982): The Search for Social female teachers working in Primary Climate: A Review of the Research. schools”, stands to be accepted. Review of Educational Research, 52 (3): 368-420. Conclusion:- Flanders and Simon (1969): Teaching- On the basis of the results effectiveness: A Review of Research obtained in present study the following 1960-66 in R.L. Ebil (Ed.), conclusions were drawn- Encyclopaedia of Educational Research, Rand M.C. Nally, Chicago, 1423-38.

www.ijar.org.in 33 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

James, D. (1956): Dictionary of Rayans, D.G. (1969): Characteristics of Psychology. Harmonds, Worth Teachers. Sterling Publication (P) Ltd., Middlesex, Penguin Books. New Delhi Parmar, S., Haide, Q. and Joshi, V. Remmers (1952): Rating Methods in (2008): Attitude of Student Teachers Research on Teaching by N.L. Gage Towards Teaching Profession and (Education.) Chicago. Rand McMcnally Teaching Competency, University News, and Company. 1963. 46 (17), May, 2008. Nenty, H.J. (1988): Influence of Some School Climate Factors on Students Academic Performance, Journal of Applied Psychology, 36 (1). Prof. SunitaGodiyal has been working as a Professor in Department of Education, H.N.B.Garhwal University Campus BadshaiThaul, TehriGarhwal, Uttarakhand. She has 26 years of Teaching Experience and Published more than 52 research papers. She has Administrative Experience- holding different administrative post in campus

www.ijar.org.in 34 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Jainism as Philosophical Backbone of Human Rights-A Perspective in Indian Jurisprudence

Dr. Asha Bhandari, Faculty of Policy Science, National Law University, Jodhpur, Rajasthan

Abstract This paper is an earnest approach to draw the similarities among the various provisions of Indian Constitution (related to human rights) and Jainism. The principles of Jainism give religious sanction to some of the most important rights, which are in modern time safeguarded by the laws of state, and thus act as an implicitly guiding light for these provisions. This paper is an earnest approach to draw the similarly between two and to show that how the dream of making father of Constitution can be fulfilled by adopting Jain philosophy in our practical life. Key words: Human right, philosophy, mankind

INTRODUCTION spirit of cooperation, enhance peace and good will among the people. Jain The idea of human right is an old as the humanism is based on their history of human civilization but the metaphysical background. The Jain name human right given to it in the metaphysics is a realistic and relativistic recent in origin. The rights of man have pluralism. On these basic metaphysical been the concern of all civilization from foundations Jainism treats all persons time immemorial. The philosophy of equal and respects their dignity. Jainism human right has already occupied a accepts the basic foundation that place of prime importance in ancient ‘Human race is one’ (1). Jainism India. Actually what the west has advocates the principle of cooperation discovered now in the field of human and does not believe in any sort of right has been an accepted principle of discrimination based on caste, color or Indian tradition since time immemorial. race. This is an opinion of Jainism that Jainism is also true representation of ‘man is superior due to his actions and Indian culture. The concept of equality, qualities not by his birth or caste’ (2) “No respect for dignity, morality, justice, one is inferior or no one is unwanted righteous, non-violence, non- thus nobody shall feel proud on the basis possessiveness are guiding and directing of caste”. (3) On this basic thought principle of spirit and action of Jain Jainism opens the door of employment philosophy. There is an essence of for all people.’ it is our actions which humanism in the Jainism. make us brahamin,kshatriiya,vaishy or ANALYSIS shudras’ Jain religion is open for all without any discrimination on the basic The Jainism dedicate itself to save of caste, classes or places of birth. mankind and stands for the dignity and Jainism accepts the oneness of human worth of human person, believe in the race and opposes those man made equal rights of men and women, support divisions of class and creed. The right of the human right of all individual, create

www.ijar.org.in 35 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 equality is the faith and creed of our the observance of ahimsā,– non-injury of democratic republic also. It forms the living being by the all persons to the foundation of socio economic justice. maximum extent possible. Principle of Article 14 based on right of equality. The ahimsā, is a logical outcome of Jain succeeded article 15, 16, 17, 18 lay down metaphysical theory that -all souls are specific application of general rule lay potentially equal. Since all living being, down in article 14. Article 14 guarantees possess soul, the principle of non-injury the equality of all persons before law. and love to all obviously extend to cover Article 15 prohibits the discrimination all living being. “Ahimsā, is disciplined on the basic of religion race, caste, sex or behavior towards every living being”(4) place of birth. Further article 16 The scripture tell us that do not injure, provides equality of opportunity to all abuse, enslave, insult, torture or kill any citizens in the matters of public creative or living being “ Absence of employment. Article 17 is also very violence of any sort towards all being at important from the point of view of all times is ahimsā) Concept of ahimsā, equality before law. It guarantees socials emerged from the doctrine of equality of justice and abolishes the practice of any all soul. Through the preaching of form of untouchability. These articles ahimsā,the Jain scriptures and Acharya advocate the non-discrimination on the emphasized the basic fact that every basis of general rule of equality. Once living being has sanctity and a dignity of the principle of equality is accepted it its own and therefore one must respect it becomes impossible to discriminate as one expects own dignity to be against any group or respected by others. Jainism emphasized person.Discrimination can be said to the the basic philosophy that ‘Live and let denial of fundamental and universally live’. In this way the Jain teaching accepted rights of all human being. convinced the people that the practice of These articles support the same ahimsā, has a positive force and philosophy. collective appeal. In this context anekāntavāda is an extension of Personal liberty is also one of the ahimsāin realm of thought. most important of all human right. To be born free and having right to liberty Article 19 to 24 of the Indian presuppose that each human being has constitution deals with the different the freedom of choice in the conduct of aspect of this basic principle ‘personal his or her life. Freedom next to life itself liberty’.Article 19 grantee the freedom of is viewed as the most precious human speech and expression, which is value closely linked to human dignity indispensable in a democracy.Article 21 and worth of human life. Jainism has provides that No person shall be emphasized on the same philosophy, deprived of his life or personal liberty which could be easily found out in except according to procedure various concepts like ahimsā, (non- established by law.Article 22 violence), anekāntavādaand Karma supplements Article 21.it prescribes the theory of Jainism. Jainism upheld the minimum procedural requirement that worth of life very much hence it mainly must be included in any law enacted by emphasized on those thought, which the legislature in accordance with which respect and secure the human freedom. a person may be deprived of his life a The most distinctive contribution of personal liberty. Jainism consists in its great emphasis on

www.ijar.org.in 36 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Article 23 and 24 prohibits the Apart from the protection of religious traffic of human being and beggar and freedom Jainism, also believe in the self- other similar form of forced labor. These development by the help of educational are article, which prohibits the and cultural development of mankind. exploitation of any form. These articles The same philosophy is contained in the are various aspect of personal liberty, religious, educational and cultural rights which respect the human dignity. of Indian constitution. India is a secular state. Articles 25 to 28 of the Indian Apart from thisKarmvaad of Constitution specifically provide freedom Jainism is also provides protection of of religion. Article 25 of the constitution human rights.In short karmvad may ensures equality of all religions. Article summarized as the theory of infallible guaranteed two-fold freedom, i.e. (i) consequences of one’s action. Karma freedom of conscience and (ii) freedom to doctrine involves freedom of will of the profess, practice and propagate religion. individual. Jainism lay down that it is However, these freedoms are not ones Karma that primarily regulates the absolute. They are subject to the future destiny and course of life of all restrictions. Every person is given the soul without and interference of freedom to profess, propagate any powerful god. The same philosophy we religion but in doing so, he cannot can find out in the Article 20 which interfere with the religion of another protects the basic human right of the person. people that no person can be punished for an act, which was not offence at the Under Article 26 of the date of commission. It further protects constitution, every religious the person by providing that no person denomination has been given the could be subjected to a penalty greater freedom to manage the religious affairs. than that, which might have been Article 27 further advances the secular inflicted under the law in force at the character of the nation. It provides time of commission. freedom as to payment of taxes for promotion of any particular religion. As a religion, Jainism unveils Article 28 prohibits the imposition of the meaning and purpose of life. Its religious beliefs on the persons attending attitude towards other religion is that of any such educational institutions. All non-criticism. It preaches universal these provisions are of great importance tolerance and humanism. Jain Acharya to India, which comprises of people believe in cooperation yet for them unity belonging to different religions, faith and does not mean absolute unity. By unity, belief. Similarly, cultural and they mean an organic whole in which educational rights are indispensable for every organ has its individual existence the dignity of a person for the free but works for a common goals human development of the personality. good. For them unity means unity in diversity. They maintain that every race, Jainism has laid great stress on the every religion and every culture has full observance by the householders of right right to develop with all its conduct. For this purpose Jain ethics particularities but at the sometime, it is emphasis on various vow. Obviously pious duty to scarify its own interest in these value as they around a religious the larger interest of humanity. sanction to some of the most important public and private interest and rights

www.ijar.org.in 37 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 which are in modern time safeguard by economic justice for all and everyone. the law of state. It could be seen that Article 38 and 39 provided that state has these vows merely reproduce the to secure a social order for the promotion unwritten moral code of the best of welfare of people and making of societies of men. Householders must certain principles or policy to be followed have practice these vows in their daily by state by securing socio economic life with almost care so that justice to all. These article promote the transgression of these vows can be objectives of establishing a social welfare avoided to a great extent. It means that state and further article 41to 43 provides the observance of these vows has to be the right of education, provision for just made as faultiness as possible. Similarly and human conditions, maternity relief, in constitutional provision, also there is living wages etc. for workers. Article 45 a need of effective machinery. If there is provides provision for free and no effect remedy against the violation of compulsory education for children. human right, there is no meaning of Article 47 says that it is duty of the state these rights in real sense. Article 32 to raise the level of nutrition and the provide and give power of Indian court to standard of living and to improve public stand between individual and state health. protecting human right of individual The basic aim of these provisions from any interference which is not is to develop a social security and justified by law. However, these welfare of the people. Finally article 51 fundamental rights cannot be enjoyed as provides the promotion of international absolute rights in Constitution. There peace and security. It is the duty of state are many grounds on the basis of which to achieve those objectives. restriction can be imposed in the exercise of those fundamental rights. Jainism respect the dignity, equality and rights of every person but Jainism is a religion whose at the same time, it also emphasis success lies in a state of internal and certain duties towards other in the term external, mental and physical discipline of Anuvrata(ethical code)(4) to promote with principles of good behavior and harmony and brotherhood among all high morality for individual as well as people. According to Jainism it is duty of for society. Vrata are heart of Jain every person to believe in human unity. ethics. Jainism emphasis on many It is duty of every person to practice the Vrata. Out of which 5 are main and various forms of non-violence, religious other are supplementary vrata. It is tolerance and restrict himself not to emphasis that in order to practice main harm other for selfish gain and not to vrata those supplementary vrata must discriminate based on caste, creed, race, be practiced. Similarly in the and a religion nor encourages the evil constitution, there is a provision of custom. The practices of these vows wills directive principle. To make definitely bring the harmony in the fundamental rights meaningful, exercise society. Similarly in Indian constitution, of directive principle is must. Directive also there is provision of Fundamental principles (article 36-51) intend to bring Duties (5) we find that it is duty of every about the socio economic revolution. The Indian to promote harmony and thee main aim of these articles is to create a spirit of common brotherhood amongst new order of socio economic order people, to strive towards excellence in all wherein there will be social and

www.ijar.org.in 38 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 sphere of individual and collective, which  GopalBhargav, Human Rights is possible if we protect and promote the concern for Future, Delhi:Gyan Book human right of all the people. Pvt. Ltd.2001 CONCLUSION  Chuhan O.P., Human Right This comparative analysis shows that Promotion and Protection, Delhi: various concept of Jainism lies at the Anmol Publishing Pvt Ltd, 1974 roots of various provision related to  Singh Ramjee, Jaina perspective in human rights in Indian Constitution. philosophy and religion. Varanasi: The teachings of Jain humanism are classical Pub, 1993. universal in essence and if sincerely practiced by the human beings they are  “Facets of Jainology : Selected guarantee the kind of understanding and Research Papers on Jain Society, peace that are really needed to exercise Religion and Culture” basic human rights. An honest Ed.VilasAdinathSangave.,Mumbai:P application of various concepts of opularPrakashan, 2001 Jainism in life like nonviolence, ethical  Ahimsa, Anekanta and Jainism code and metaphysical teachings can edited by Tara Sethia. Delhi: ensure peace and social security.The MotilalBanarsidass, 2004 humanism of Jainism thus can be a powerful source of peace and national  Human Rights, Justice and understanding among the people of Constitutional Empowerment, country. Editor C Rajkumar ,K. References Chockalingam,Oxford University Press ,India, 2007  Surenranath Das Guppta, A History of IndainPhilosopy,Vol –I, Delhi  S. RadhaKrishnan, Indian MotilalBanarsidas Publisher Pvt Philosophy, Vol-I, Delhi:Oxford Ltd.,2000 University Press,1999 ------

Dr Asha Bhandari is Senior Asst. Professor of Philosophy and Sociology at the Faculty of Policy Sciences, National Law University Jodhpur (Rajasthan). She has more than 10 years of teaching experience. She has published four books and various papers in academic journals and also presented papers in national and international seminar. She has also completed two major research project funded by UGC and ICSSR. Three national seminars on women issues were organised by her. Her area of interest is Gender Studies, Applied Ethics and Legal Reasoning.

www.ijar.org.in 39 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Live in relationship in India: Legal Perspective

Dr. Sudhansu Ranjan Mohapatra, Associate Professor, Centre for Juridical Studies, Dibrugarh University, Dibrugarh, Assam

Abstract Live in relationship is one of the emerging changes taken place in society that has legal as well as societal ramifications. Live in relationship has been a matter of debate for a long time. It has created lively debate in international and national levels. The Supreme Court of India has recently opined that that live in relationship is neither a sin nor a crime. Keeping in mind this lively debate, an attempt has been made to through a light on the legal aspects of live in relationship. The paper is based on both primary and secondary sources. The primary sources include the Acts and decisions of the court. The secondary sources include the books and journals. Key words: - Live in relationship, society, court

Introduction: to analyse the socio legal impact of the live in relationship in India. Change in a society is a universal truth. The change in the society may be due to Concept of Live in relationship:- To a variety of reasons be it change in the define live in relationship is a difficult social mores, or other changes like task. It may be qualified by the person technological, economic changes. Social who defines it and upbringing of that institution of marriage has also person, society in which he lives. While undergone a sea change in the recent women may view it as a committed years. Marriages are now being replaced relationship moving towards marriage by cohabitation or live in relationship. and a man may view it as an alternative This transition in the society has been to marriage. David Knox and Caroline viewed differently by the legal systems Schacht have defined live in relationship and societies of the world. India is also as “two unrelated adults involved in an not an exception to this form of emotional and sexual relationship who transition. The proactive judiciary of sleep overnight in a same residence on a India has been instrumental in regular basis.”1 The authors have given protecting the rights of the partners of eight types of cohabitation relationships. live in relationship. The recent judgment These are – 1. Here and now type of of the honourable Supreme Court of relationship in which partners are India that live in relationship is neither a sin nor a crime has created a lively debate as to the acceptability of the live 1 David Knox and Caroline Schacht, Choices in relationship by judiciary as well as by in Relationships: Introduction to Marriage society. Here an attempt has been made and the Family. 11th Edition ( to give a comparative picture of the legal Belmont:Thomson Higher Education 2012) at status of live in relationship in USA, UK 120 and India. Attempt has also been made

www.ijar.org.in 40 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 focused on here and now and not on the been made to analyse the legal status of future relationship. the live in relationship in United States of America and United Kingdom. 2. Tester type of relationship in which the partners want to assess whether United States of America:- In United they have a future together. States of America, unmarried partner households made up at least 5.2 percent 3. Engaged type of relationship in which of total households and included some the partners are in love and planning to 5.5 million people, 4.9 million in marry. opposite-sex households.2 Except three 4. Money saver type of relationship in states of United States (Mississippi, which the couple live together primarily Florida, and Michigan) the cohabiters to save money. are regarded as domestic partners. It was after the judgment of the Marvin v. 5. Pension partners type of relationship Marvin3. The facts of the case are such in which partners are generally old and that Lee Marvin, the Hollywood actor have been married before and derive and his companion, Michelle, who lived benefits from previous relationship. In together as a couple, having begun that such type of relationship, the pensioners relationship while Lee was married to want to retain the previous earning from another woman. Early in the the previous relationship but still want relationship, Lee divorced his wife and to enjoy a family life. So, they choose live continued living with Michelle who in relationship. changed her name legally to Michelle 6. Security Blanket cohabiters. Marvin. Lee and Michelle lived together for six years, never having gone through 7. Rebellious Cohabiters a formal marriage ceremony. The 8. Marriage never type of live in Supreme Court of California recognized relationship in which partners believe in the rights of non-marital couples to sue the commitment of heart and of not a each other for compensation if the facts legal document. They are the persons support either contract or some equitable who need companionship and sexual life doctrine. Marvin laid the predicate for outside the marital relationship. Registered Domestic Partnership legislation in the United States. The Live in relationship In international main feature of a registered partnership level:- The institution of marriage in all is that it formalizing a non-marital over the world has undergone a sea relationship that would otherwise have change and gradually being replaced by to be proven in order for the individuals live in relationship. The countries of the in that relationship to have rights and world be it European, American or Asian responsibilities. It is a model for same- have witnessed the phenomenon of live sex couples to use to formalize their in relationship. This type of change in the society has not only created complexities for the society but also 2 Cynthia Grant Bowman, Legal Treatment posed a challenge to the legal system. of Cohabitation in the United States. Cornell The socio legal problems of varying Law Faculty Publications. Paper 148. dimensions have occurred due to live in Available at relationship. Keeping in mind the http://scholarship.law.cornell.edu/facpub/148 limitation of the study, an attempt has 3 557 P.2d 106 (Cal. 1976).

www.ijar.org.in 41 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 relationship. The preamble of the New (3) 741,880 cohabiting couples had a Jersey Domestic Partnership Act (2003) dependent child or children. succinctly summarizes the rationale In UK generally, couple can behind extending the benefits and make cohabitation contracts and can obligations of marriage to cohabitants also make express trusts of personal who fall within the qualifying property. Apart from that legislations characteristics of mutual caring and also govern live in relationship in UK. economic responsibility for one another’s One such legislation dealing with live in welfare. It acknowledges both the relationship in UK is the Civil existence of substantial numbers of Partnership Act, 2004. In order to form a cohabitants and the functions they civil partnership in the UK, both parties perform for the state by privatizing must be over the age of 16, of the same support for the welfare of its citizens, sex, not already in a civil partnership or reaching the conclusion that the state marriage, and not be within the should therefore support these couples in prohibited degrees of relationship. If of their performance of these functions. the age of 16 or 17, the consent of the Apart from Registered Domestic individual's parent or guardian will be Partnership legislation, express required, except in Scotland, where contracts between partners are also marriages and civil partnerships can taken into consideration while dealing take place from the age of 16 with no with live in relationship. With the need for parental consent. In order to exception of Illinois, Georgia and complete the registration process, the Louisiana, almost every state recognize couple must each give notice of their express contracts between cohabitants, intention to the registry office. After 15 especially if they are written. days they can complete the registration process. The couple can also enjoy a Some of the states in USA ceremony if they choose but this is not a extend rights based upon the status of requirement of the Act. The first date on cohabitation, either by imposing that which notice could be given was 5 status upon cohabitants at the December 2005 and the first registration termination of their relationships or by was on 21 December 2005. The 15-day providing for entrance into civil unions notice period allows the registrar to or domestic partnerships. check that the couple is eligible to go United Kingdom:- The 2001 ahead with the registration. Census records just over two million International Law:- 1. Article 16(1) of cohabiting couples in England and UDHR states that men and women of Wales, an increase of 67% on the figures full age, without any limitation due to from the 1991 Census. The 2001 Census race, nationality or religion, have the for England and Wales further records right to marry and to found a family. that: They are entitled to equal rights as to (1) 1,278,455 children were dependent on marriage, during marriage and at its a cohabiting couple; dissolution (2) Of those, 558,426 children were in Article 8 of the Convention for cohabiting step-families; and the Protection of Human Rights and Fundamental Freedoms (European Convention on Human Rights ) gives the

www.ijar.org.in 42 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 right to respect for private and family the married couple are to be followed life. It provides that and subsequently solemnized. In this instance case the petitioner has been a 1. Everyone has the right to respect for spinster before she gave birth and that his private and family life, his home and the respondent was a bachelor before his correspondence. developing sexual relationship with the 2. There shall be no interference by a petitioner. Both of them led their marital public authority with the exercise of this life under the same shelter and begot right except such as is in accordance two children. Therefore, the petitioner's with the law and is necessary in a rank has been elevated as the 'wife' of democratic society in the interests of the respondent and likewise the national security, public safety or the respondent's rank had been elevated as economic wellbeing of the country, for the 'husband' of the petitioner. The the prevention of disorder or crime, for Court accordingly granted maintenance the protection of health or morals, or for to the wife. the protection of the rights and freedoms In Indra Sarma v. V.K.V. Sarma of others. Criminal Appeal No. 2009 of 2013, the India:- In Indian context, judgements of Supreme Court of India held that live-in the Supreme Court have clearly or marriage like relationship is neither a established that partners of the live in crime nor a sin though socially relationship are protected under unacceptable in this country. The domestic violence Act, 2005. decision to marry or not to marry or to have a heterosexual relationship is In D.Velusamy vs D.Patchaiammal intensely personal. The chief question Criminal Appeal Nos. 2028-2029__of before the Supreme Court of India was 2010, the Supreme Court through justice whether a live-in relationship would Markandey Katju held that in order to amount to a relationship in the nature of get benefit of Domestic Violence Act, marriage falling within the definition of 2005 a couple in live in relationship has domestic relationship under Section 2(f) to fulfill the following conditions. of the Protection of Women from (a) The couple must hold themselves out Domestic Violence Act, 2005. All live-in to society as being akin to spouses. relationships are not relationships in the nature of marriage. The court opined (b) They must be of legal age to marry. that if the relationship has no inherent (c) They must be otherwise qualified to or essential characteristic of a marriage, enter into a legal marriage, including but a relationship other than in the being unmarried. nature of marriage then that relationship would not fall within the (d) They must have voluntarily cohabited definition of domestic relationship under and held themselves out to the world as Section 2(f) of the Domestic Violence Act, being akin to spouses for a significant 2005. period of time. The general perception of the In Aysha Vs. Ozir Hassan Indian society towards the live in Crl.R.C.No.674 of 2007 the Supreme relationship is that it is immoral to Court of India held that a valid cohabit without undergoing the marriage does not necessarily mean that ceremonies of marriage. However, it is all the customary rights pertaining to

www.ijar.org.in 43 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 getting prominence in the big cities of health benefit may be extended to India. A substantial portion of the such population. Indian population is LGBT and they are 3. There is a need to enact special laws more prone to exploitation. One regulating live in relationship. It argument is often given that in live in may be in the model of Civil relationship stability of the relationship Registration Act, 2004 of UK. is uncertain. However, it is not true, even in cases of marriages the rate of ------divorce is increasing day by day. Kerala, the most developed state in terms of education in India has witnessed registration of 1937 no’s of cases in three months period (January 2013 - March 2013). In a recent study reported in Indian express newspaper, researchers has revealed that couples who live together before getting married could be helping to lower divorce rates.4 In case of India, the old age people who are Dr. S.R.Mohapatra has been working as neglected by their child may resort to the Director and Associate Professor in live in relationship as it will give Centre for Juridical Studies, Dibrugarh comfort to them. University, Dibrugarh, Assam. He did Conclusion and Suggestions:- From the his masters in Law from Utkal above analysis, it appears that the University in 1991 and joined as a judgments of the Supreme Court has lecturer in Dhenkanal law college, Utkal created many paradoxes. It has both University, Odisha. He is a member of legal and social ramifications. However, different academic organization and it is up to the society to accept or to consultant to various NGOs. He has decline live in relationship. The more than 10 years of teaching following suggestions may be put experience and he published several forwarded in the light of above research papers at international and discussion. national journals. A lot of publications and books written by him extend his 1. In census, data should be collected credit. as to the status of domestic relationship, live in relationship so that policy measures may be directed towards them. 2. The LGBT population should be identified through census so that HIV and AIDS prevention policies,

4 Available at:- http://archive. indianexpress.com/news/livein-relationships- behind-falling-divorce-rates-study/851231/

www.ijar.org.in 44 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

REDISCOVERY OF PURPOSE: ALUMNI-INSTITUTE INTERACTIONFOR SUSTAINABLE GROWTH -with Special focus on Management Education

Dr. YVVSSS Vara Prasad, Associate Professor, Gitam Institute of Management, Gitam University, Visakhapatnam

Abstract: This study examines the relationship of excited alumni and dynamic management institutes. The observations of this study reveal that mutual cooperation and support enhances the opportunities for their sustainable progress. The results also indicate that career progression of the alumni influences the strength and brand image of the parent institute, and, in the same way, the institute success and image multiplies the opportunities of the career progression of the alumni. This study provides several instances where the leading B-schools and prominent alumni established this unique relationship. Key words: Alumni, Management, B-School, Relationship and Sustainable INTRODUCTION: An alumni association is an association of graduates or, more broadly, of former Management is now a part of the students.Alumni Association providesa mainstream. Management education is single platform for all the students of a considered as everyone’s aspiration department/ institute/university with irrespective of their functional area and the objective of connect, network and it attracts youngsters who are usually engage. These associations often motivated by the positive consequences organize social events, publish associated with management education. newsletters or magazines, and raise In India, higher education, especially funds for the organization. With the management education, is witnessing an contribution and support of each other, exponential growth in terms of number both the alumni and institute wish to of institutes imparting management enhance their potential. They feel that education which are usually termed as this is the collective excellence of their Business Schools. Management contribution to the growing generation, education has tremendous potency the Institute and the society as a whole. across the globe due to its nature and They seamlessly connect with the scope. Without management we can’t Institute, faculty, young students and imagine any other discipline and its fellow alumni. functioning.In order to administer the human and other resources of the Objectives of the Study: organization,management intervention  To understand alumni and is obligatory. No wonder then, somebody instituterelationship in management has rightly said that,without the education contribution of management we can’t envisage the inception and progress of  To examine its opportunities to any sphere. enhance their sustainable growth

www.ijar.org.in 45 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

 To find out alternatives to make network among the Stanford GSB's alumni-institute relationship more 27,705 alumni around the world.The vibrant. GSB Alumni Association provides a wide range of opportunities, services and RESEARCH PROBLEM: resources, including local The basic research problem of this chapter activities, continuing education conceptual paperis how to make this programs, alumni career services, alumni-institute relationship more international conferences, reunion vibrant for their well being in the events, alumni/student programs, and contemporary global environment. The access to the online alumni directory. All author has assumed some alternatives this and more, is available to you when and drawn his own inference through you become a member of the GSB secondary data, which will give a Alumni Association. direction towards the probable solution. The GSB's graduates are a living THE STRENGTH OF ALUMNI- advertisement for the quality of the INSTITUTE School, not only through their considerable accomplishments, but also Alumni and Institute should go and grow because of the enthusiasm they express hand in hand. The alumni progress and for their GSB experience.As of strength is a great aid and ad for the September 2013, the Stanford Graduate success of the institute. Alumni are the School of Business has 27,705 living real brand ambassadors of the institute. alumni and 4095 students actively Right from the admission to participated in a GSB volunteer role in placement,theinstitute can make use of the fiscal year 2013. their alumni network strength. At the same time, alumni always want to see In the same way Harvard Business their parent institute in number one School has 80698 alumni at HBS position in the global rating which will Community and 4000+ alumni actively give them great mileage and enhance participated as HBS volunteers in the their marketability. Both the institute fiscal year 2013. HBS constituted alumni and alumni flourish with mutual balance achievement award with the mission to and trust. To understand this, the educate leaders who make a difference in following institutes are the best the world. HBS gives a wonderful examples. platform to their alumni to connect, interact and share their updates with The Stanford GSB(Graduate School of their fellow alumni and the faculty. HBS Business) gives a platform to the alumni organized 5,582 events for the fiscal year to connect with fellow alumni, faculty, 2013. present students and take advantage of professional development opportunities The London Business School has over and career services, and learn how 36,000 alumni in over 130 countries. Its volunteering your time and talents can global network offers a wealth of connect you with current students and knowledge, resources and networking enrich Stanford GSB. opportunities. It creates a diverse community of high achievers connected The Stanford GSB Alumni Association is by a shared experience. Alumni also dedicated to promoting professional enjoy privileged access to many of the development and building a strong

www.ijar.org.in 46 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 services London Business School has to Association was formally established in offer. 1967 with a central executive committee and chapters (14 national and 6 The Oxford Business Alumni (OBA) international) in major cities in India, as Network is the official global business well as US, Singapore, UK and Muscat. alumni network for the School’s degree Membership is open to all who have programme alumni, current post- participated in the Institute's PGP, FPM graduate students, and qualifying and MDPs. They organize educational Executive Education participants, as and social activities like Management well as University of Oxford graduates Awards and Seminars. The Annual with an interest in business. With more Alumni Reunion has now become a than 10,000 members living in 129 regular feature held in the last week of countries, the OBA Network, its alumni- December. led regional OBA Chapters, and student- led Oxford Business Networks provide The IIMA Alumni VVEF Outstanding lifelong intellectual, professional and Researcher Award was instituted by the social connections to the Oxford VidyaVardhini Education Foundation, a community long after the alumni have Section 25 Company run by IIMA left, wherever they may be.The OBA alumni. Every year, the Award goes to Network also provides students with an one faculty member, recognized for important connection to the wider his/her sustained research contribution business alumni community during their and/or significant research of a path time at the School, as all the School’s breaking nature. post-graduate degree programme The graduating batch of 2014 has students – including MBAs, EMBAs, committed to contribute Rs. 200 per MFEs, and MLFs – are uniquely month as direct debit from their salary welcomed as full members upon accounts to the institute, in order to fund matriculation. scholarships for the succeeding batches. In India, IIMs are the prestigious This is extremely helpful considering institutes. IIMA is one of them with over that more than 80% of the batch takes 20,000 alumni. IIMA has built its loans for their studies. This is evidence alumni networkover the years.In fact, of how the alumni have begun their IIMA consider alumni to be their great reciprocation to the institute from day strength. The alumni family is an one. important component for realizing the Another prestigious institute, IIM- goals of the Institute - the creation, Bangalore, has10,000+ members application and dissemination of worldwide with 14 chapters. It management knowledge. In fact, they hasproduced leaders, entrepreneurs, are the crucial change agents who social entrepreneurs, artists, writers and transform leadership. The Institute's managers who collectively have a great activities and programmes for its alumni wealth of knowledge and experience. The are directed towards building lifelong IIM Bangalore Alumni Association bonds of kinship with the Institute. brings all these outstanding people A vast number of IIM-Ahmedabad together on a single platform. This Alumni have distinguished themselves collective excellence is their contribution in almost every aspect of management to the growing generation, the Institute across the world. The IIMA Alumni and the society as a whole. Engage,

www.ijar.org.in 47 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 energize and enhance - keeping this address the requirements of the motto in mind, the alumni seamlessly market. connect with the Institute, faculty,  Strengthening Student Intake: students and fellow alumni. Potential student intake is a great The IIMB Alumni Association aims to challenge for the management link the alumni to the institution, institutes; in fact, thestudent has a develop synergistic plans to support the wider choice than the institutes.Only a institution and achieve its vision, and to few leading institutes across the enable the institute to add value to all worldareexceptions to this. To attract its stakeholders. the best student intake, alumni is one the best alternatives, becausethey are REDISCOVERING THE PURPOSE the real brand ambassadors and can THE INSTITUTE PERSPECTIVE: directly or indirectly influence Management education is at major prospective students to join the crossroads, the business world has institute. Institutes should realise this changed a lot,in fact, it is ever dynamic. fact and make use of this resource At this juncture, the need of the hour is effectively. rethinking of conventional strategies and  Putting a student to identifyingprospective alternatives. work: Management students get Obviously, one of the major prospective benefits from the real-world work alternatives for Institutes is alumni. The experience. The best way to get this alumni play a significant role in all the experience is through paid or unpaid key practices of management internships and co-ops. Alumni of the institutesand are one of their great institute extend their helping hand to sources of strength. In order to maintain their next generation with a deep sense high brand value and unique image in of belongingness. the global arena,alumni andinstitutes need to work together.  Bringing jobs tothe institute:If management institutes consider Management institutes, in particular, student admission as a great challenge, expectpositive reciprocation from their then placement is the greatest alumni to strengthen the following challenge.The aspirations of the practices: students and parents are increasing  Updating Curriculum: The day by day, and at the same time, job management education has shifted market conditionsare ever dynamic. At from institute centric to industry this juncture, management institutes centric. Hence,the management student should take the support of alumni. should be groomed to take up the Based on the talent, performance and challenges of changes in the stability of alumni, the parent institute contemporary business gets a brand image which gives great environment.Curriculum design is a mileage to the placement activity. very challenging task for the  Network Building:Networking is management institutes.Here, the the latest mantra for success and can contributions of the industry, parents make all the difference. In the and alumni will upgrade and customize contemporary social network era, the institute’s academic inputs so as to alumni chapters offer a great platform

www.ijar.org.in 48 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

for management professionals to career. One of the major develop their networks.When most of conditions/factors in career planning the established institutes can count and development is the brand image of their alumni in thousands, there is no the parent institute.For example, reason why they cannotutilize this vast majority of the alumni of Harvard networkin order to maximise their Business School always recollect the opportunities. institute’s brand name and its role in their progress.  Rebuilding Institute Image: Top management institutes of the world  Network: Having a wide network strongly believe that, they are there is a great advantage for any becauseof their alumni. One of the main professional. Building a network is not criteria of the ranking agencies is the so easy, but, with the support of the strength and support of the alumni alumni association of the parent towards their institute. Therefore, all institute,one cannaturally strengthen the management institutes are working one’s network, year after year. Along on alumni activities. As AjitRangnekar, with this, managementprofessionals Dean, ISB has rightly pointed out, ‘only now have an added opportunity to alumni can create the real brand in the enhance their income through employee public perception’. Institutes should referels,which corporates consider to be realise this fact and should work on it. one of the best sources of talent acquistion. Harvard Business School set a benchmark for fellow institutes when  Alignment with the they rejected financial aid from the contemporary issues through Academic Government of America in order to Interaction: Every professional should minimize government intervention. be updated with contemporary issues They got thecourage to do this on irrespective of his/her career. For this, account of their strong financial they need to align with the reserves which aremajorlysponsored by contemporary issues in the world. When the alumni. people are busy in their own careers, sometimes, it becomes difficult to follow THE ALUMNI PERSPECTIVE: contemporary issues. Active As Louis Pasteur rightly participation as alumni with their alma mentions,“Chance favours the prepared mater can help them to update and mind.”The Alma Mater plays a key role align with the contemporary world. in the growth of management This dynamism gives them confidence professionals.Leading organisations to tackle uncertain conditions. follow different strategies in hiring  Sense of contentment:As people for top managerial positions. Winston Chuchill rightly mentioned, Whilescreening select profiles for the “We make a living by what we get, we final interview, if the profile strength of make a life by what we give”. People candidates is more or less similar, can derive satisfaction when they are organisations may make the final recognised by the society for their selection based on the image and status contributions. Most of the prominent of their alma mater. aulmni contribute so much to their  Enhancing Marketability:Every alma matersto enjoy the feeling of professional strives to excel in his/her giving. A very recent and striking

www.ijar.org.in 49 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

example is that of Mr. Ratan Tata who References: has contributed towards the building of IIMA Alumnus, Volume 46, Number 2, a 1,50,000 square foot hallat Harvard, June 2014. Tri-annual which was named in honor of Ratan N Tata (batch AMP 71, 1975). Mr.Ratan IIMB Alumni Magzine, summer 2014. Tata commented on this gift saying, “I Med Yones,KASAC: A New Paradigm for am so proud to give back to an Executive Education Executive institution that has done so much for Education: Management White Paper, me and for many other people.” International Institute of Management Conclusion: As discussed earlier, the Sanjeev Kumar, M. K. Dash, institute-alumni relationship is very Management Education in India: important for the benefit of both Trends, Issues and Implications, Institute and Alumni.If they work with Research Journal of International the core mantra of Connect, Network Studies - Issue 18 (January, 2011) and Engage, they can not only help each other but also render great service to https://www.alumni.hbs.edu/Pages/defau future generations. The need of the hour lt.aspx is for management institutes to http://alumni.gsb.stanford.edu rededicate themseves to reach out to their alumni by establishing chapters http://www.london.edu/ourcommunity/al where the alumni presence is high and umni.html by conducting regular interactions. https://www.oxfordbusinessalumni.org httos://www.livemint.com

------Dr. YVVSSS Vara Prasad, M.Com; Ph. D, FDP-(A), presently working as Associate Professor in Gitam Institute of Management, GITAM University, Visakhapatnam since 2004. He has more than 15 years of teaching experience, and published several papers in international and national level journals. His thesis on Technology Change and Impact on Human Resources in Select Organizations was published by Excel publications and also authored one book. ------

www.ijar.org.in 50 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

The operational system of Panchayati Raj in Goa

Mr. Balaji Shenvy. Research Assistant, Dept of Political Science, Goa University Abstract Decentralization and participatory democracy gained importance after the passage of 73rd Constitutional Amendment which is the landmark in the history of India. Accordingly all the states in Indian Union were asked to create modify or ratify their Panchayat Raj Act. Accordingly the Goa Panchayat Raj Act came into existence in 1994. But the Panchayats were there in Goa prior to the existence of Legislative Assembly i.e. since 1962. The traces of decentralization in Goa can be traced back to times of Bhoja dynasty that rule Goa in the pre Portuguese period. This article is about the working of Panchayati Raj Institutions in Goa. The article is divided into two parts the first part deals with the Panchayat Raj Institutions prior to the 73rd Amendment Act and the second half deals with new Panchayat Raj Act 1994. Key words: Decentralization,participatory democracy, progress, Constitution Introduction considerations. They were not fought on party lines but were contested by Since India had achieved independence individuals who were in one way or the from the British largely through the use other connected with public life or of non-violent means, Nehru was activities at the village level and were reluctant to resort to force. But generally considered by the people fit to eventually, Pt. Nehru, at the persuation be their leaders at the level. Although of his Defence Minister V.K. Krishna such elections were hardly known to Menon eventually accepted the idea of Goansupto that time, there was using force to free Goa from the alien considerable excitement among the rule. Indian Government formulated one people for they felt confident that many plan called “Operation Vijay” to liberate of their village problems would receive Goa from the Portuguese clutches. With attention at the hands of their own hardly any resistance by the Portuguese elected representatives. This was but and with light casualties on either side, natural because to the Goan it is his all operations in Goa came to an end on village that means much more than the the evening of 19th December 1961. Thus state or the central government. within 40 hours, the Indian army had successfully carried out the Operation Goa Daman & Diu Village Vijay and ended Centuries of Foreign Panchayat Regulation domination in Goa. The Goa Daman & Diu Village The first Panchayat elections Panchayat Regulation was the first of its which gave a taste of Democracy to the kind in the history of goa to envisage villages for the first time in the history development of rural areas and to of Goa Daman and Diu were held on 24 transfer power to the people at the October 1962. The elections aroused grassroots level. The first elections to great enthusiasm and interest among the village Panchayat under this the people which cut across all regulation had two features. Firstly, in communal, caste and ideological the rest of India, Panchayati raj was an

www.ijar.org.in 51 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 extension of democratic decentralization 1962 all the members of the Gram i.e. Panchayati Raj was established after Panchayat, known as “Pancha” are sufficient experience had been gained in directly elected by the Gram Sabha, operating Parliamentary institutions at from among themselves. In every the National and State Levels. In Goa, Panchayat one seat was reserved for The process was reversed. The women. The Chairman of Gram Panchayats were established and began Panchayat was called “Sarpanch”. He t\o operate a little before the state was elected by the Panch from among assembly and the members of the union them. The term of the office of the Parliament were elected. Secondly the Village Panchayat was 4 years which system of Panchayats was not altogether could be extended for one year by new to the Goan Society since the lieutenant Governor. The Gram similar type of institutions called Panchayat was required to hold one “Gauncaria” “Communidades” “Maand” meeting a month. All the meetings were were present in Goa but with the conveyed by the Sarpanch or in his limitations. absence the deputy Sarpanch. The GOA Daman & Diu Village Each Panchayat had one secretary in Panchayat Regulation 1962 order to carry out the Panchayat work. He is entrusted with the work of After the liberation of Goa Daman & collection of taxes, maintenance of all Diu a single tier Panchayati Raj system the registers and other day-to-day was introduced in the Union territory by works. The Secretary was appointed by virtue of the Goa Daman & Diu Village the Government and his pay and Panchayat Regulation- 1962, allowances were paid by the promulgated by the Hon. President of government. Though the secretary India under Article 240 of our worked under the supervision of the Constitution. According to this Panchayat Council, he was under the regulation the Union Territory had a Control of Block Development Officer single tier Panchayat raj System, there (BDO) was only one unit of democratic decentralization operating at the village With regard to the functions, according level, known a Gram Panchayat.1 There to the second schedule of the Goa, was another body called the Gram daman and Diu Village Panchayats Sabha, the general assembly, Regulation 1962, the following matters comprising of all adult residents whose came under the Jurisdiction of the name figures in the electoral rolls of the Panchayat: village. The powers anf functions of Sanitation and Public Health. Gram Panchayat and the Gram Sabha were according to the rules and Public works regulations laid under the Goa Daman Planning and Development And Diu village Panchayat Regulation 1962. According to the Regulation of Administration Social welfare Education and culture.

1Halarnkar T.D. Gram Panchayats in Goa a Gram Sabha critical Study; Rajhaunsa1990

www.ijar.org.in 52 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

As per the Regulation 1962 there was a National Parliament.3 Former Prime Gram Sabha for every Village MinisterRajiv Gandhi rightly questioned Panchayat. The Gram Sabha was and it the system in which 5 ½ thusand MLA’s, is the general assembly comprising of all MLC’s, and MP’s decided the fate of adult residents who are electors in the then 900 million people, without often electoral roll for those villages that being accessible especially to the socially covered under a particular Panchayat. and economically deprived sections There use to be two meetings of Gram living in 5 ½ lakh villages in the Sabha every year. The first meeting of country. Though to some extent driven the Gram Sabha in every financial year by political exigencies, he proposed to was held within two months of its improve the nature of representative commencement. And the second governance by providing for a third tier meeting use to take place in the month of government. Rajiv Gandhi’s initial of November. In addition to this there effort, of 1989, intended to provide was a provision to have an constitutional status to local bodies extraordinary meeting of the Gram through 64th Constitutional Amendment Sabha. The Sarpanch or in his absence was defeated in RajyaSabha. This the Deputy Sarpanch or any other radical democratic and Participatory person chosen by the Gram Sabha initiative took shape of 73rd presided the Meetings. One tenth of the Constitutional Amendment Act 1993 total Number of the Gram Sabha was passed by Parliament on 20th April 1993 the quorum. and came into force from 24th April 1993, under Prime Minister “The Goa Daman and Diu Panchayat Narasimharao. Regulation 1962 was borrowed from neighbouring state of Maharashtra. The The 73rd Constitutional Amendment Act Government of Goa Daman and Diu had compelled all the states to amend or adopted Panchayat rules and replace the existing legislation of the Regulations that were in existence in Panchayat. Accordingly the Goa Maharashtra Then. ”2 Goa’s Panchayati Panchayat Bill was passed on 20th April Raj sustained on these rules and 1993 to lay a strong foundation for regulations for a long period of almost ‘democratic decentralization’ and pave 33 years until the Goa Village the way for activating the planning Panchayat Act was notified in 1996 after process from the grassroots; a concept 73rd Constitutional Amendment was which has eluded the people ever since made. the beginning of the era of planned development. Thus the Goa Panchayat Goa Panchayat Raj Act 1994 Raj Act-1994 came into force. The Goa Untill1993; the level of democratic Panchayat Raj Act-1994 was assented governance in India had not gone far by the governor on 9th July 1994. The act enough with elections of representatives repealed the ordinance of 1994 as well only to provincial Legislatures and the as the regulation of 1962. The preamble to the Goa Panchayat Raj Act-1994- “ An

2CardozTomazinho, The Navhind Times dated 3FernandesAureliano; Panchayatantra, February 19, 2012 University Book House Pvt. Ltd. Jaipur 2008

www.ijar.org.in 53 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 enactment to establish a two-tier supporters or the elected members Panchayati Raj system in the state with create confusion. They start making elected bodies at village and district noise; they ask irrelevant questions in levels, in keeping with the chorus so that the serious issue raised Constitutional Amendment relating to by the member dies in that chaotic Panchayats for greater participation of situation. The anti-social elements the people and more effective having vested' interest many-a-time implementation of rural development threaten the members of the gram programmes.” According to this act a sabha who take the lead in questioning two tier Panchayat Raj system was the elected members. If the sarpanch is introduced in Goa; i.e. one at the district politically strong, many a time the police level- The ZillaPanchayat and one at the also have played dirty by warning the village level- The Village Panchayat. members of the gram sabha and not the Goa has two ZillaPanchayats and 189 supporters of the sarpanch. This Village Panchayats. attitude of the elected bodies and of the law enforcing authorities has been Gram Sabha responsible for killing the spirit of the The 73rd Constitutional Amendment has 73rd Constitutional Amendment. virtually converted the gram Sabha of The ZillaPanchayats every village panchayat into a supreme decision making body in the affairs of The ZillaPanchayats are constituted on the development of villages. In fact this the bases of Goa Panchayat Raj Act - body can check the progress in the 1994 at district level. ZillaPanchayats village thoroughly, can suggest various started working in Goa since February innovative ideas for the all-round 06, 2000. ZillaPanchayat institution in growth of the village and can help the Goa has completed 10 years. So far three elected members in carrying further the general elections have held. programmes envisaged by the ZillaPanchayat Institutions are Panchayat body for the betterment of supposed to be vehicles of Socio- the people. It is for this reason that the economic transformation in rural India. architects of the 73rd Constitutional But the indifference of the people Amendment have made the gram sabha towards the elections to the a very powerful organ of the village ZillaPanchayats held so far in the state development by making the decisions of of Goa explicitly underlines the fact that the gram sabha binding on the this institution is losing its relevance. functioning of the panchayats. Even after a decade, it appears that Zilla bodies are still in limbo as full The gram sabhas, being the supreme devolution of power has not been decision making bodies in the village affected so far. The members of last two administration, unfortunately are not ZillaPanchayats and the present allowed to function as per the ZillaPanchayat members are fighting democratic principles in many village fiercely with the state government over panchayats. When the members of the devolution of powers but the latter has gram sabha raise issues which concern not shown “Political Will” to confer more the future of the village, and in most powers and responsibilities on them. On .case the issues raised by the members the one hand ZillaPanchayat bodies go against the interests of the elected have to fight with the state government members, the blind and selfish

www.ijar.org.in 54 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 for more functions on the other hand all Goa is a small state. Secondly Goa is some programs allotted to over represented, i.e we have One ZillaPanchayats clash with the functions Hundred and Eighty Nine Village enjoyed by the Village Panchayats. The Panchayats, Twelve Municipalities, One ZillaPanchayat concept just cannot work Municipal Corporation, Forty Members in Goa; it is clear waste of public time of Legislative Assembly and on the top and money. There was not much of that these Two ZillaPanchayats with enthusiasm among the voters of Fifty members. Thirdly ZillaPanchayat ZillaPanchayat constituencies as is Members are not able to use their otherwise seen in gram Panchayat or Powers. Some of their powers clashes assembly elections. Peoples’ indifference with the powers of The Village is in need the matter of concern for the Panchayats. ZillaPanchayats are not future of the ZillaPanchayats. The provided enough funds by the State reports emanating from the two districts Government hence the elected make it clear that the indifference of the ZillaPanchayat members cannot state government towards the perform much work. Even Adhyaksha is ZillaPanchayats by refusing to develop not able to perform his duties with the powers to this grassroots local body, limited powers. More powers are found its reflection in the peoples’ concentrated with that of The Chief averseness. Executive Officer (CEO). To carry out any work or to allot money for any Most of the voters had turned up project ZillaPanchayat members need to because the local MLA or other leaders take the assent of the Chief Executive wanted them to vote for particular Officer. So what is the use of candidates. Significantly, the role and ZillaPanchayat members? If nature of the style of functioning of the ZillaPanchayats are having so many particular leaders and parties also made internal problems in its functioning then the people to remain inside their homes. why do we need these ZillaPanchayats Both, The ZillaPanchayats and the in Goa? Village Panchayats are functioning like extended arms of the State government Conclusion and are being treated like the personal Local Government is important to make property of MLAs. Because we see that ZillaPanchayats, which were constituted democracy strong and powerful in the just ten years ago, are yet to get their world. Local Government provides more powers. So also the village Panchayats opportunity to the local people to re-constituted after the coming into participate in the Government affairs. It force of the Goa Panchayati Raj Act in can play a key role in initiating radical 1994 are yet to see any significant social change. Decentralized governance powers devolved to them. It is demand enables government to make policy of the ZillaPanchayat member that the successful. Panchayat Raj institutions State Government should immediately are the agent of Local Governance which devolve the rightful powers to the plays very crucial role in running the government affairs. The 73rd ZillaPanchayat as listed in Schedule II of The Goa Panchayati Raj Act – 1994. Constitutional Amendment Act of 1992 brought a significant change in the According to me we don’t require administration of local areas and in ZillaPanchayats in Goa because first of small state like Goa these institutions

www.ijar.org.in 55 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 can really play a significant role in the Sarpanch. So a new trend of overall development of the area. The ‘sharing’ the term of office as Sarpanch gram Sabhas can really play an between the ruling Panchas has important role when it comes to emerged. This is not an appreciate development because Gram Sabhas are method to promote healthy democracy at entrusted with such powers. Now it is a the grass root level. matter of research to study how far References Gram Sabhas are successful. . In fact this body can check the progress in the Cardozo Tomazinho; “Panchayati Raj in village thoroughly, can suggest various Goa”, Thenavhind times dated January innovative ideas for the all round 16, 2011 growth of the village and can help the EstevesSarto; Politics and Political elected members in carrying further the Leadership in Goa, Stearling programmes envisaged by the Publications, New Delhi, 1986 Panchayat body for the betterment of the people. It is for this reason that the FernandesAureliano, “ architects of the 73rd Constitutional ReconnectingSabha to Gram” National Amendment have made the gram Sabha Institute of rural development; a very powerful organ of the village Hyderabad: 1999 development by making the decisions of FernandesAureliano“Panchayatantra: the gram Sabha binding on the Empowering Local Governance through functioning of the panchayats. Gram role definition”, university book house Sabha should have been a torch bearer pvt. Ltd. Jaipur 2008 to other states in the country. Unfortunately such a thing has not Gune V.T; “Gazetteer of Goa Daman & happened. Today people are up in arms. Diu part 1”; department of District In every Gram Sabha there are protests Gazetteer Goa Daman & Diu; Panaji: and voices of dissent. This is only 1979 because our Panchayat administration Halarnkar T.D. “Gram Panchayats in is not transparent and is seen to be Goa a critical Study”; Rajhaunsa:1990 more pro builder and pro industrialist instead of pro people. Elected The Goa Panchayat Raj Act, 1994 (Goa representatives have become so greedy Act No 14 of 1994 that everyone of them wants to become ------

Mr. BalajiShenvy, Research Assistant , Department of Political Science , Goa University

www.ijar.org.in 56 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

EFFECTIVE COMMUNICATION SKILLS TO BUILD HUMAN CAPITAL

Dr. G. Reddi Sekhar Reddy, Soft Skills Trainer,ELT@I TIRUPATI

Abstract: Regular and practical practice of language skills certainly endowed with overall and complete command to the students over the language. It has its generous help for effective communication. It is clear that the five language skills are interrelated; all should be practiced with equal significance and fortitude. Then only it is possible for the students to be the best and effective human capital. These are the precious steps to reach the pinnacles of effective communication skills in English that will be the only weapon for success in the battle of entrepreneurship. Key words: Communication, Skills, vocabulary

Introduction Within a short period the It is fact that effective budding entrepreneurs can Communication Skills is vital for mend themselves as the best building human capital. It is communicators with a little bit crystal clear that communication of firm practice; that is skills in English are playing a integrating the practice of key role in the present scenario. language skills (LSRW&T). At It is inevitable that management first the difference between the students should be sound in the terms ‘listening and hearing’ three core areas, they are: should be identified to practice Effective Communication skills, listening skill. Listening is a Personality and Hard skills. concentrated activity but Communication is mutual hearing is not. Hence they sharing of information. Proper should practice concentrated syntax and accent are essential listening. They should for effective communication. concentrate on the expressions Proper syntax is possible with and vocabulary while listening perfect command over grammar which will offer immense helpful and vocabulary, proper accent is for effective expression. possible with phonetics. Effective ‘Speaking English’ is the decisive communication skills are needed solution for effective instead of communication skills, communication skills in English. it is necessary to identify the ‘A voracious reader can become difference between the two. an eloquent speaker’. So, colossal

www.ijar.org.in 57 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 practice of reading skills is wants to share his ideas, one has to necessary. ‘Great leaders are express them clearly. If he wants to great readers,’ hence it essential express clearly, he needs proper to practice reading something syntax and accent. Proper syntax is English regularly. Writing skill possible with perfect command over grammar and vocabulary, proper plays a vital role in effective accent is possible with phonetics. It communication. ‘Think in is the open secret that English’ is the newly added skill communication skills are playing a to the LSRW, always thinking in vital role to succeed as English can do a better help entrepreneurs. If a management than all other language skills. student wants to be successful in Regular and practical practice of his career it is inevitable to be language skills surely provides perfect with effective overall command over language; communication skills along with it has its generous help for hard skills (subject knowledge) and effective communication. It is personality. Hence it is clear that management students should excel clear that the four language in the three core areas they are: skills are interrelated; all should Effective Communication skills, be practiced with equal Personality and Hard skills. It is importance and determination. necessary to identify the difference Human Capital: The True between communication and Capital: Capital refers to effective communication, as the finance which has been playing present world demands effective an imperative role in the communication but not mere entrepreneurship. But in the communication. One can present scenario it is identified communicate an idea in different that human capital is the real ways (either verbal or nonverbal). Now-a-days it is not enough just to capital and it has been playing a speak English but it should be vital role. The best human formal and pleasing. The English capital can create required should be spoken with effective finance. It is essential for the syntax, fluency and accuracy. It is budding entrepreneurs to be possible to a learned person who is effective communicators to prove practically applying it. Fluency is themselves as human capital for possible only if one has zeal in successful entrepreneurship. phonetics and it should be learnt practically. Communication and Effective Need of Communication Skills Communication: Communication in English: It is crystal clear that is sharing information, either communication skills in English are receptive or distributive. If one playing a key role in the career of

www.ijar.org.in 58 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

any professional in the present practical determination, they scenario. It is necessary that each can mend themselves as the best and every graduate in general and and effective communicators. Let technical and management us discuss how to practice them students in particular should have in detail. effective communication skills in (a) Listening skill: For effective English to be successful. There are results by practicing listening skill, many instances in which many the difference between the terms students about 90% of marks in ‘listening and hearing’ should be their subject were unsuccessful in identified. Sometimes the students their profession, it was only because don’t find the difference between of their poor communication skills. hearing and listening. Listening is Whereas some other students with a concentrated activity but hearing just 60% of marks in their subject is not. While they listen to a lecture were successful in their career; it with an intention to listen, they was only with the weapon of may hear some other sounds from effective communication skills. outside the class room which Effective Communication Skills distract them. If they got distracted, - Winning Strategy: In the it is not effective listening. Hence present scenario success of an they should practice concentrated entrepreneur lies in his effective listening and they should not be and impressive communication. It deviated their concentration to each is a general tendency that it is and everything they hear. Here I difficult to speak English in would like to suggest that it is effective and impressive manner better to practice concentrated but in fact it is not so. Within a listening particularly in English. If short period they can make they listen something English on themselves as the best each and every day for at least 15 communicators with a little bit of minutes, it is sure that they can determined practice; that is the develop their effectiveness in practice of language skills. communication. Here they may be LSRW&T are the Language doubtful what to listen? Where to Skills: listen? And how to listen? They can L- Listening utilize these to listen to English. S- Speaking  Television sets to watch R- Reading some English channels like W- Writing Discovery, Animal Planet, T - Thinking National Geographic channel Actually students are familiar and the like. Particularly at the with these LSRW&T first level it is better to go for theoretically but not practically. such channels as the narration If they practice them with

www.ijar.org.in 59 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

in these channels will be slow they have to try to speak English. and clear to understand. They need not worry about  DVDs, CDs, cassettes etc. mistakes, first they have to speak for listening. (ample of DVDs, out the simple English they knew. CDs & Cassettes are available in If there are mistakes, they should try to rectify them with available the market) guidance. If they do it practically no  Radio - to listen to the doubt they can develop their news bulletins, programmes of communication. current affairs etc. (c) Reading Skill: ‘Great leaders They should concentrate on the are great readers’ exposes the expressions and vocabulary eminent persons’ secret of success. while listening which will be The quoted words of Francis Bacon: exceptionally helpful for effective “Reading maketh a full man”, expression. Here students can specifies the role of reading for grasp syntax and accent for the communication. ‘A voracious reader best communication. can become an eloquent speaker’, yes, it is a fact. Hence it is (b) Speaking Skill: ‘Practically necessary to practice reading skill speaking English’ is an ultimate with determination. Students have solution for effective communication to practice reading something in skills. The quoted words of Francis English regularly. The same Bacon: “Conference maketh a ready question when, what, where, how man”, specifies the vital role of and why to read may arise. It is speaking for communication. better to cultivate the habit of Students have to practice speaking reading English newspaper, at first English regularly. It requires a attempt, it seems to be difficult to determined practice, they have to understand but it should not be try to speak English for at least 15 stopped, it should be continued. minutes every day and there won’t After a few days they can feel the be any limit for maximum time. As difference with them practically. much time they speak English that They have to go for a small article much enrichment will be there in at first, read it once, twice or thrice their English. Here also they get and identify the new or difficult the same doubts like what, where, words and try to get their meanings when and how to speak English? No by consulting a dictionary, so that more doubt, their day has to be they can understand the content as started with English by saying good well as they can develop their morning to their family members or vocabulary. Vocabulary is the most whoever is available and the day significant tool for effective should be completed by saying good communication. If they read much, night. In between they have they can speak more. When they numerous situations to speak read much, they can be familiar English. Wherever they may be,

www.ijar.org.in 60 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

with innovative, impressive and them as human capital it is eloquent expressions for effective recommended: communication.  English in M.B.A. is only (d) Writing Skill: ‘Handwriting for name sake in one semester as can change the fate of an individual’ Business Communication, it is is an apt statement but it doesn’t not much helpful or useful. mean simply script but the sentence  structure and effective expressions. English should be The quoted words of Francis Bacon: introduced throughout the four “Writing maketh an exact man”, semesters of M.B.A, if not at specifies the vital role of writing for least in the three semesters communication. It plays an instead of only one in the first imperative role in the effective year. communication. Students are well  It’s better to have conscious of the importance of functional grammar in the first writing as they get marks or semester. percentages depending upon what  Comprehensive grammar they write in the examinations. It in the second semester. needs firm and regular practice.  Hence they have to practice writing Advanced English something in English every day. communication skills lab for Writing means not copying or fluency practice and mock taking dictation but the sentence interviews in the third semester. structure should be their own, then  As the students are they can learn effective expressions, addicted to the method of by which will be helpful while they hearting in the schools and need to speak. It is better to have junior colleges, and in the habit of writing diary or for the graduation they should be given students it is better to write the awareness that “Grammar synopsis at the end of the day, should be learnt and practiced about what they have understood in each and every class of the day. but not by hearted”. Here they have to identify one more  Once again grammar has point that speaking and writing to be taught in a clear and have mutual relationship as they systematic manner with can write what they speak and they practical approach, as it was can speak what they write. theoretical at the lower levels.  Then only the phonetics Conclusions will be useful for communication To develop effective and fluency. communication skills among  Then only we can expect management students to mould the effective and full-fledged

www.ijar.org.in 61 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

communication from the make them successful human upcoming entrepreneurs which capital.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Foster, John. Effective Writing Skills for Public Relations. London: Kogan Page Publishers, 2008. Print

Rivers, W. M. Teaching English Language Skills. Chicago: Chicago University Publication, 1970. Print.

Robert, Lado. Language Teaching: A Scientific Approach. New York: McGraw Hill, 1964. Print.

Dr. G. Reddi Sekhar Reddy, Assistant Professor and soft skills trainer. He has 18 years of glorious experience in teaching English. He is an exemplary soft skills trainer and has trained thousands of students successfully He is the author of four books on English grammar, communication skills and soft skills. He presented 25 research papers in International and National conferences and 16 research papers were published in reputed journals and books. He has to his credit chairing 5 paper presentation sessions in the international/national conferences. He has to his credit the founder of ELTAI Tirupati Chapter and playing active role as its Secretary at present apart from serving as the editor of ELT@I Tirupati Chapter Journal of English Language and Literature. He has memberships in many professional associations such as ELTAI, ISCA, IAAS, IACS, and AP State Bar Council., etc.

www.ijar.org.in 62 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

AN ANALYSIS OF POVERTY REDUCTION AND HUMAN DEVELOPMENT IN INDIA

GIRISH M.C, AssistantProfessor, Dept. of P.G.EconomicsGovt. Arts College, Hassan, Karnataka

Abstract The present study focuses on how human development influenced by poverty factor and their consequences on various economic factors including gender development in the country. Poverty is a social-economic phenomenon in which a section of society is unable to fulfil even its basic necessities of life. The minimum needs are food, clothing, housing, education health and other basic minimum human needs. Humanity faces caution and miseries if it does not attain a subsistence level of such needs. It is generally agreed in this country that only they who be unsuccessful to reach a certain minimum consumption standard should be regards as poor. Key words: consumption, Human development, poverty

INTRODUCTION world’s population account for only 5 percent of global income. On the other Poverty is a social-economic hand, the richest 20 percent account for phenomenon in which a section of 75 percent of world income, according to society is unable to fulfil even its basic the United Nations Development necessities of life. The minimum needs Programme. Poverty is the principal are food, clothing, housing, education cause of hunger and under nourishment. health and other basic minimum human According to most recent estimates of needs. Humanity faces caution and the Food & Agriculture Organization of miseries if it does not attain a the United Nations (FAO, 2009), the subsistence level of such needs. It is number of hungry people worldwide has generally agreed in this country that reached 963 million, or roughly 15 only they who be unsuccessful to reach a percent of the estimated world certain minimum consumption standard population. Poverty essentially consists should be regards as poor. “No society of two elements, narrowlydefined can surely be flourishing and happy, of “income” poverty and a broader concept which the far greater part of the of “human” poverty. Income poverty is members are poor and wretched”. defined as the lack of necessities for Poverty is about refutation of minimum material wellbeing opportunities and fulfilment of human determined by the national poverty line. potential. Poverty and inequality are Human poverty means the denial of closely related, and inequality appears choices and opportunities for a tolerable to have been on the rise worldwide in life in all economic and social aspects recent decades at both national and recognising the problem, the Millennium international levels. More than 80 Development Goals of the United percent of the world’s population lives in Nations also contain a commitment to countries where income differentials are halve the proportion of the world’s widening. The poorest 40 percent of the population living in extreme poverty by

www.ijar.org.in 63 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

2015. Poverty is widespread in India, and Poverty – a Perspective Across with the nation estimated to have a Indian States- It underlines the need of third of the world's poor. Poverty expansion of economic activities and eradication has been one of the major educational facilities along with their objectives of planned development in equitable distribution. Thus, it can be India. concluded that to raise the level of human development concrete efforts at The concept of human grass root level, not only towards raising development was first laid out by economic resources and developmental AmartyaSen, a 1998 Nobel laureate and opportunities but also to ensure their expanded upon by Martha Nussbaum, equal distribution, should be made. Sabina Alkire, Ingrid Robeyns, and others. Development concerns Gender inequality, economic expanding the choices people have, to development, and globalization: a state lead lives that they value, and level analysis of India. In recent years improving the human condition so that gender has become a significant part of people have the chance to lead full lives. the mainstream discourse on economic Thus, human development is about growth and development. Gender much more than economic growth, perspective has been adopted by the which is only a means of enlarging international organizations such as, people’s choices. Fundamental to World Bank, WTO and IMF in the enlarging these choices is building formulation of millennium development human capabilities —the range of things goals, trade policies and macroeconomic that people can do or be in life. structural programmes. Capabilities are "the substantive OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY:- freedoms enjoying the kind of life reason to value." Human development disperses The study confined following the concentration of the distribution of objectives to fulfil their requirements goods and services that underprivileged regarding poverty reduction and human people need and centre its ideas on development in India. human decisions. 1. Poverty reduction can lead to LITERATURE REVIEW: Human development of a country means to improve the phenomenon with the Ghanshyam Shah-Growth, alleviation of poverty problem in the Poverty and Human Development in country. India-Economic growth is important but not universal remedy for human 2. To state that poverty influences development. There is no significant on overall human development relationship between level of growth and strategies. decline in poverty. At the most the 3. Through providing all basic relationship is weak and does not take amenities to downtrodden people to into considerations the households who improve their standard of livings. were not poor become poor in the high growth regions Methodology:- I. G. P. G. Regional Centre, The methodology of the present Mirpur, M. D. University, Rohtak, study can be broadly outlined with the Haryana, India Human Development help of the secondary source of data and

www.ijar.org.in 64 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 information of national and state in the number of poor persons in the level.“An analysis of poverty reduction country. There were about 32.1 crore and human development in India” is persons living below poverty line in estimated on the basis of available 1973-74. It remained almost stagnant annual data. Secondary sources such are during a decade of 1973-1983 but it Government publications, reports of come down to 26 crore in 1999-2000 and ministry of finance, departments, 22 crore in 2004-05. Poverty in rural various state level and national level sector always has been on higher side as journals and books. compared to urban India. But it came down in 2004-05 in both rural and urban Poverty Estimation in India sector. By the end of 11th plan number Poverty line is a cut-off point on of poor persons are expected to come the income distribution, which divides down to 10 crore. A brief analysis the population as poor and rich. People showing absolute trend in poverty in below poverty line, are poor and above India is shown through following table that line are average or rich. Poverty 1: line is therefore a derivation from In India different states have different inequality of income distribution. monthly income such as Utter Pradesh, However cut-off level of income or Bihar, Tamilunadu Rajasthan, expenditure is determined differently in Utterakhand, Madhya Pradesh etc. have different countries and regions. relatively more number of less income According to Planning Commission of persons as compared to other states. In India, “Poverty line is drawn on the percentage form Orissa has the highest basis of barest minimum desirable % of persons living below poverty line nutritional standards of 2400 calories which reflect by the following table 2: per person per day in rural areas and 2100 calories for urban areas” .During the five year plans, several programmes has been introduced to alleviate poverty in India, yet there has been an increase Table 1.Trends in poverty in India (Crore) Year Rural urban Total 1973-74 26.1 6.0 32.1 1977-78 26.4 6.5 32.9 1983-84 25.2 7.1 32.3 1987-88 23.2 7.5 30.0 1993-94 24.4 7.6 32.0 1999-2000 19.3 6.7 26.0 2007-08 17.0 3.0 20.0 2010-11 - - 10.0 Source: Economic Survey 2002-3 & 2010-11, Eleventh Five Year Plan

www.ijar.org.in 65 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Table 2.State specific Poverty Lines for 2011-12 States Monthly per capita States Monthly per capita (Rs.) (Rs.) RURAL URBAN RURAL URBAN Andhra Pradesh 860 1,009 Maharashtra 967 1,126 Arunachal 930 1,060 Manipur 1,118 1,170 Pradesh Assam 828 1,008 Meghalaya 888 1,154 Bihar 778 923 Mizoram 1,066 1,155 Chhattisgarh 738 849 Nagaland 1,270 1,302 Delhi 1,145 1,134 Odisha 695 861 Goa 1,090 1,134 Punjab 1,054 1,155 Gujarat 932 1,152 Rajasthan 905 1,002 Haryana 1,015 1,169 Sikkim 930 1,226 Himachal Pradesh 913 1,064 Tamil Nadu 880 937 J & K 891 988 Tripura 798 920 Jharkhand 748 974 Uttarakhand 880 1,082 Karnataka 902 1,089 Uttar 768 941 Pradesh Kerala 1,018 987 West Bengal 783 981 Madhya Pradesh 771 897 Puducherry 1,301 1,309 All India 816 1,000 Source: Computed as per Tendulkar method on Mixed ReferencePeriod (MRP)

Defining Human Development beneficiaries and the agents of long term, equitable human development, In 1990, Human Development both as individuals and as groups. was often described as ‘enlarging Hence Human Development is people’s choices’. We haveretained that development by the people of the people fundamental motivation of human and for the people. development as expanding people’s capabilities; we have also added two further features that have been Human development has three discussed, deliberated, advocated and components: capabilities, process clarified over the past twenty years. Our freedoms and principles of justice. new statement of human development is Human development focuses on this: Human Development aims to expanding people’s real freedoms, their expand people’s freedoms – the capabilities. When human development worthwhile capabilities people value – is successful; people are able to enjoy and to empower people to engage activities and states of being that they actively in development processes, on a value and have reason to value. With shared planet. And it seeks to do so in human development, people live long ways that appropriately advance equity, and healthy lives; enjoy education and a efficiency, sustainability and other key decent quality of life. They are able to be principles. People are both the

www.ijar.org.in 66 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 productive and creative at home and/or through the accessing required at work, shape their own destiny and factored to human lives. together advance shared objectives.  Sustainability is the view that we all With human development, people are have the right to earn a living that able to enjoy human relationships and can sustain our lives and have access feel relatively secure. In human to a more even distribution of goods. development, the ‘focal space’ is people’s lives. Resources, income, institutions Happiness & Human Development and political or social guarantees are all The recent gush of interest in happiness vitally important means and policy and subjective well-being reflects an goals; yet ultimately success is increased desire to consider how evaluated in terms of the lives people material well-being translates into are able to lead, the capabilities they psychological experiences of fulfilment. enjoy. Some of the “happiness” literature defines well-being sufficiently broadly that it is more or less synonymous with Measurement of human development human development. For example, the One measure of human concept of Gross National Happiness, development is the Human Development and its Gross National Happiness index, Index (HDI), formulated by the United has nine domains: health, education, Nations Development Programme. standard of living, governance, Though this index does not capture environment, community vitality, every aspect that contributes to human culture and spirituality, time use, and capability, it is a standardized way of emotional well-being. The domains and quantifying human capability across indicators used to reflect Gross National nations and communities. Aspects that Happiness thus could be seen as a could be left out of the calculations country-specific articulation of human include incomes that are unable to be development, in which the goal itself quantified, such as staying home to was named in a culturally appropriate raise children or bartering manner. goods/services, as well as individuals' Conclusion perceptions of their own wellbeing. Other measures of human development India had large population at the same include the Human Poverty Index and time it pursued the economic and social the Global Empowerment Measure. and also other unsustainability like poverty, inadequate basic necessaries, Pillars of human development unemployment, and regional There are basic pillars of human inequalities across the India. But 21st development: equity, poverty eradication century tried to increase or upgrade and sustainability,etc., human welfare with reduction of poverty by providing required necessary  Equity is the idea of fairness for amenities and particulars for their every person, between men and people in order to that millennium women; we each have the right to an development goal had their objectives to education and health care. reach by 2020. Hence need to improve  Poverty eradication reduces income the human development in respective inequalities; enhance capabilities manner for necessary to reduce poverty

www.ijar.org.in 67 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 and inequalities across the country by critical exploration. Journal of adopting different policy features. Philosophy of Education, 37(1), 17- Through the proper allocation of 33. budgetary funds to all states as well as  Streeten, Paul (May 1994). "Human classes in the society. That all should Development: Means and Ends". necessarily consider and taken up as a Human Development (84.2): important to increase the human 232–237. development in India.  "Human Development - Human References: Development Reports (UNDP)" 22  Human Development and October 2009. Capability Association. "Capability  Economic Survey 2004-2005, & Functioning’s: Definition & website : Justification". Human Development http:/indiabudget.nic.in.visited on 9 and Capability Association Briefing May 2012 Note: 1–5.  Economic Survey 2008-2009,  Vizard, P. (2006). Poverty and website : http:/indiabudget.nic.in. human rights: Sen's 'capability Visited on 9 May 2012 perspective' explored. Oxford: Oxford University Press.  Economic Survey 2009-2010, website: http:/indiabudget.nic.in.  Saito, M. (2003). Amartyasen's Visited on 9 May 2012 capability approach to education: A

GIRISH M.C, Assistant Professor, Dept. of P. G. Economics Govt. Arts College, Hassan

www.ijar.org.in 68 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

SAVITRIBAI PHULE FIRST WOMAN TEACHER IN INDIA: AN ANALYSIS

Prof Archana Malik-Goure, Assistant Professor, Department of Philosophy, University of Mumbai

Abstract:This paper introduceSavitribaiPhule as first female teacher in India and discusses the relation between women’s education and a humane, peaceful society by taking Savitribai’s radical philosophy with special reference to her collection of poems “kavyaphule” as its point of departure. It argues that her perspective is still relevant in a world where education has not reached the girl child across caste and class barriers at a mass level. This paper begins by examining the relation between peace, education and women’s lives. It proceeds to explore Savitribai’s philosophical arguments in this context and concludes by saying that she is a first Indian woman teacher and arguing for her contemporary relevance. Key words: education, philosophical, literature

Introduction ēmasomethingcomposed,created,frompoi eintomake.Poem is a way of expression; SavitribaiPhule was a social reformer of it has emotional values but also has nineteenth century India (Maharashtra), cognitive values as SavitribaiPhule’s capable teacher, leader, thinker, writer, poem express both kind of values. Her and committed companion to her poem ‘Kavyaphule’ (1854) reveals that husband. SavitribaiPhule is credited Savitribai had many sides and shads to with being the first native teacher of her nature and personality. In her poems girls in Maharashtra. She also happens she addresses social issues like getting to be the first modern, radical, Marathi an English education, fighting caste and poet. Savitribai was not a typical untouchability. The influence of Jyotiba’s passive Indian woman who blindly thought on Savitribai is quite clear in followed her husband. She was a her writings. courageous woman who stood by her husband and supported all his radical “…Let knowledge be your God, pursue it initiatives. She was a major figure of her all the way time. She was revolutionary in her own With determination attain success; don’t right. let your mind sway She was Mother of Women Education Knowledge is so precious; it is the and vision of her philosophy is to give greatest gift of all freedom to woman from so called Indian tradition. Poem (Kavya) is a piece of One with a treasury of knowledge, a wise writing in which the expression of person people do call.”1 feelings and ideas is given intensity by Savitribai’s literature expressed the particular attention to diction agony, aspirations, and feeling of the (sometimes involving rhyme), rhythm, modern, liberated Indian woman. She and imagery.Poem fromLatinpoēma,fromGreek,variantofpoi 1LalithaDhara, (Ed.), Kavyaphule, p. 67.

www.ijar.org.in 69 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 was the first biographer of Mahatma contemporary, a more progressive and Phule. While her contemporaries were forward looking country.Phule was one busy re-constructing the images of the of the most important makers of modern mythological pativratawomen such as India.4JyotibaPhule one of the Sita-Savirti module, in contrast, she “Mahatmas’ (Great Soul) of India, expressed the passion of modern Indian occupies a unique position among social literature. She was able to develop her reformers of Maharashtra in the own voice and agency at a time when nineteenth century. He was first teacher women of all classes were ruthlessly of oppressed, critic of orthodoxy in the suppressed and lived a secondary-human social system after Buddha and a being existence. She was actively revolutionary. supported and constantly encouraged in In the philosophy of Phule the place of this endeavour by her husband and equality and humanity was the most mentor JyotibaPhule. She was an important. He, to develop the qualities of exemplary role model for the Indian justice, through education wanted woman during her lifetime and she is equality, freedom and fearlessness. and will be a role model for future Phule took education for the oppressed woman. M.G. Mali her biographer and women. It also essential, that it rightly noted her as ‘the mother of should create the feeling of unity. He modern Marathi poetry’.2 experience that women have not got the self-dependence due to the lack of education. He was of the opinion that the The influence of Jyotiba’s thought on development made in society is judged Savitribai is quite clear in her writings. by the extent of education made She had internalized Jyotiba’s thought available to women in society. He was in and had the intellectual capacity to favor of giving compulsory education to understand its significance in society. women. She seems to be the first person who had understood and assessed Jyotiba’s JyotibaPhule fought for the fights of pioneering role in the liberation of the women and work for their emancipation. exploited masses. She categorically He started a school for girls in Pune. states in her last poem ‘Dialogue at Who worked towards the abolition of dawn’ that Jyotiba is the new dawn on untouchability and started educational the untouchable’s horizon.3Savitribai institutions for untouchables in the was probably one of the first published second half of the 19 century. Women’s women in modern India. Her writings education was given ample stress in were important both as the strength and these schools. When PanditaRamabai product of the social culture of converted into Christianity, Phule nineteenth century India. defended her right to conversion. This had a gender aspect to him. He does not Jyotiba Phule Father of Indian Social seem to have been particularly in favour Revolution: India has produced of conversion as such but he certainly numerous social reformers who have was in favour of any movement against played a significant role in making India

2Dr. M.G.Mali, SavitribaiPhule- 4Here I am extending G.P. Deshpande’s claim SamagraVangamaya, pp. 56. that Phule was a maker to modern Maharashtra 3LalithaDhara, (Ed.), KavyaPhule, p.11. to the whole of India

www.ijar.org.in 70 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Brahmanical orthodoxy. That a woman He made significant efforts to lead the had asserted her right to move away society on the path of Liberty, Equality from Brahmin orthodoxy and tyranny and Fraternity. Phule believed in the was important for him. strength of women and their role in the process of social change and social peace. Jyotiba said, “Without knowledge, His initiatives have influenced various intelligence was lost, without spheres of life and transformed the way intelligence morality was lost and India today looks at socio-economic without morality was lost all dynamism! policies, education and affirmative action Without dynamism money was lost and through socio-economic and legal without money the shudras sank. All encouragement. Jyotiba developed a this misery was caused by the lack of critique of the interrelationship between knowledge.”5 For him Education is a tool women’s question and patriarchy. He to achieve liberation from ignorance, visualized equality and mutual which is the reason of all sufferings. permission as the basis of the man- Jyotiba’s philosophy is synthesis of woman relationship. JyotibaPhule and Indian and western thought. He was his wife SavitribaiPhule were pioneers of impressed by Thomas Pane’s ideas of women’s education and empowerment in Rights of man. Humanism is the lead India. note in Jyotiba’s philosophy and religion. His philosophy is not repetitive but SavitribaiPhule First Educated Woman critical, progressive, revolutionary and and teacher formative. One of his abhang he said: Savitribai internalized the vision and “JichyaHatiPadnyachidoritichsansaresa philosophy of Phule, and was a devoted mbhali” supporter of his work. In the philosophy of Phule the place of equality and On his opinion woman educated means humanity was the most important. He, whole family educated because she to develop the qualities of justice, nurtured the whole family. Phule made a through education wanted equality, sever attack on tradition which denied freedom and fearlessness. Phule took genuine rights of women. JyotibaPhule education for the oppressed and women. started a school for untouchables as He experience that women have not got early as 1848. He started a school for the self-dependence due to the lack of girls in Pune. Women’s education was education. He was of the opinion that the given ample stress in these schools. The development made in society is judged main inspiration to raise the women by the extent of education made question in India during this period was available to women in society. He was in from the ‘First wave feminism’, which favor of giving compulsory education to was characterized by the demand that women. women should enjoy the same legal and social rights as men. Its expression can It was the fact women in nineteenth be traced in many feminist works. Phule century India was leading the life of a perceived education as a means for a subordinate-human being. She was movement for self-respect and self considered an object of male-desire. dependence, and social peace. Education of women & the lower castes, Phule believed, deserved priority. Hence 5Phadke Y.D., Mahatma at home he began educating his wife PhuleSamagraVangmaya), p. 253. Savitribai& opened a girl’s school in www.ijar.org.in 71 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

August 1848. The orthodox opponents of male-lust. One of her composition she Jyotiba were furious & they started a described the good man. According to vicious campaign against him. He her, “one who looks after his family with refused to be unnerved by their care and responsibility, one who is malicious propaganda. As no teacher always industrious and inquisitive, who dared to work in a school in which has quest for knowledge, one who is untouchable were admitted as students, worship of freedom, one who is Jyotiba asked his wife Savitribai to teach compassionate towards family, one who the girls in his school. is caring, sacrificing and dedicated is truly a good man”. In Savitribai’s JyotibaPhule was a visionary who thought Jyotiba was good human and understood the value of education in the husband and he precisely passed the empowering of women. He started by mission of humanism. sending Savitribai to school and then training her as a teacher to run schools ‘To attain self-reliance let us pledge for girls from oppressed communities. In And accumulate a wealth of knowledge her poem she expresses the importance of education. Without learning, life is an animal existence, a waste Go, Get Education6 Be self-reliant, be industrious Don’t rest, get an education, make haste Work, gather wisdom and riches, The outcasts can wipe away their woes if All gets lost without knowledge they wish We become animal without wisdom, Here’s a golden chance to learn English Sit idle no more, go, get education Learn English and do away with caste discrimination End misery of the oppressed and forsaken, Cast away the tiresome tales of the Brahmins to damnation7 You’ve got a golden chance to learn She always said in her poetry--- So learn and break the chains of caste. “Just one enemy do we have today Throw away the Brahman’s scriptures fast. Let’s thrash him and drive him away On the opinion of SavitribaiPhule a ………Ignorance!” woman has right to become intellectual She also offered one composition where and only through education woman can she is giving the message of social peace become intellectual. In her literature she and also provide the possible way for has repeated the distress, aspirations, social harmony. Moral teaching is and feelings of modern, liberated woman important as she said in her poem of India. Her composition also reflected ‘Offerings’. Her poem has emotional to anger of the new emerging woman of values like love, care and sharing, India who wanted to be treated as a sacrifice etc but it also has cognitive human being and not just as an object of

6KavyaPhuel,KavyaPhule, pp. 36-71. 7KavyaPhule, pp. 36-71.

www.ijar.org.in 72 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 values, which helps to provide peace in objective of the Samaj was “to give society. freedomto shudras and ati-shudras from thetyrany of the Brahmanical scriptures These fragrant flowers I offer thee. and tradition, teach them their human Strung in a garland of rhymes rights and liberate them from mental Each poetic blossom (Flower) is full of and religious slavery. glee (Happiness) . Prof. HariNarakewrote in Mahatma Their fragrance brings peace PhuleGsauravGranth, “More than sublime.(Inspiring) Jotirao, his wife deserves praise. No matter how much we praise her, it would Advice that is amusing not be enough. How can one describe her Easy to understand and charming stature? She cooperated with her husband completely and along with him, Simple moral education faced all the trials and tribulations that Knowledge that appeals to emotion…. came their way. It is difficult to find such a sacrificing woman even among the JyotibaPhule founded the highly educated women from upper SatyashodhakSamaj (Society of Truth castes. The couple spent their entire Seekers) as a socio-spiritual movement lifetime working for people.” on September 24, SavitribaiHeaded SatyashodhakSamaj after BrajRanjan Mani writes:SavitribaiPhule MahatmaPhule’s death, and broke new struggled and suffered with her ground in socio-cultural creativity. Moto revolutionary husband in an equal of SatyashodhakSamajwas to Liberalize, measure, but remains obscured due to Equalize and Modernalize member of not casteist and sexist negligence. Apart only member society but all member of from her identity as JotiraoPhule’s wife, India. Savitribai headed the women’s she is little known even in academia. unity of the SatyashodhakSamaj.The Modern India’s first woman teacher, a Conclusion radical exponent of mass and female This discussion is really education, a champion of women’s important on feminism because we have liberation, a pioneer of engaged poetry, a to bring women into discipline of courageous mass leader who took on the philosophy. They have different forces of caste and patriarchy certainly philosophy; they have different had her independent identity and summumbonum, highest goal in their contribution. It is indeed a measure of philosophy. Like PanditaRamabai and the ruthlessness of elite-controlled SavitribaiPhule, the greatest women knowledge-production that a figure as produced by modern India & one of the important as SavitribaiPhule fails to greatest Indians in all history, the one find any mention in the history of who lay the foundation for a movement modern India. Her life and struggle for women’s liberation in India. Their deserves to be appreciated by a wider goal was freedom from Indian tradition, spectrum, and made known to non- freedom from religious rights and Marathi people as well.”8 rituals. By studding these thinkers in the Contemporary Indian philosophy 8‘A Forgotten Liberator’, the life and struggle curriculum, we learn the relevance of a of SavitribaiPhule, p. 28. gender sensitive approach to treating

www.ijar.org.in 73 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 women as equals. This is enshrined in Y.D. Phadke, Editor, .Mahatma the constitution of Indian. The PhuleSamagraVangmaya, Publisher Constitution of India gave women equal Maharashtra RajyaSahitya and rights with men from the beginning. SanskrutiMandal, Mumbai, 1991. Thanks to Phule couple who initiated LalithaDhara, (Ed.), Phule’s and this academic endeavor, and gave equal Woman’s Question, Dr. Ambedkar opportunity of education to all women in college of Commerce and Economics, India. Mumbai, 2011. References: LalithaDhara, (Ed.), KavyaPhule, Dr. Archana Malik-Goure, JyotibaPhule: A Ambedkar college of Commerce and Modern Indian Philosopher, Suryodaya Economics, Mumbai, 2012. Publication, New Delhi, 2013. Mani, BrajRanjan and Pamela Sardar Dr. M.G.Mali, SavitribaiPhule- (Eds), A Forgotten Liberator’, the life SamagraVangamaya, Maharashtra and struggle of RajyaSahityaSanskritiMandal, SavitribaiPhule,Mountain Peak Mumbai, 2006. Publication, New Delhi, 2008.

Archana Malik-Goure is an Assistant Professor at the department of Philosophy, University of Mumbai. She has published two books on Women Asceticism in Jaina and Buddhist Traditions, and Jyotiba Phule: A Modern Contemporary Philosopher. She has published three papers in International Journals and almost twenty papers in National Journals & presented many research papers at national & international fora. She is currently working on a comparative study of Indian & Greek conceptions of virtue.

www.ijar.org.in 74 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

CRAFTING CAMPUS AWARENESS – STRATEGIES TOWARDS CREATION OF CAMPUS SUSTAINABILITY

Dr. VIDYA.H.N, Associate Professor, Department of History, Government Arts College, Hassan,Karnataka state

Abstract These days campus has become a breeding place for sustainability development. A college campuscan generatereceptiveness of sustainability goals by engaging the campus community in sustainability awareness programs. Students can be made attentive towards rendering individual effortsin reducing theecological stressin the campus. All the Staff, faculty and students should exert together to reduce energy consumption, promote waste reduction strategies, alternative transportation options, and other sustainability initiatives in offices, classrooms, labs, libraries, buildings, residences and in personal lives. This paper spotlights the campus initiatives to bring about sustainability.The campus sustainability should become a participatorymovement involving all with a belief that the purpose of higher education is to provide opportunities for all through learning to practice sustainability of a healthy environment and creating just and fair eco system inside the campus. KEY WORDS :Sustainability , Individual, Initiatives , Institutional Movement

“First challenge in the design of a new campus is not to create new buildings, but to create a shared vision towards campus sustainability”. INTRODUCTION: 1. Identifying the in-campus behavior for each student. In a College campus each student hasa unique role to play in making the 2. Determining group behavior. campus a sustainable place.One can 3. Identifying the student's present incorporate values of environmental level of conceptualization of responsibility in the campus . Students sustainability can be made to involved directly by joining a sustainability action team or 4. Listing the steps to make them form their own club or forum and aware of the concept of sustainability become a sustainability leader through 5. Finalizing the skills towards adoption of innovative sustainability orienting the campus behavior goals. ( LealFilho, Walter (ed.)( 2012 towards sustainability with an )Sustainable Development at action plan Universities). After these steps can be initialized as an Institution moves to take steps to INITIAL CAMPUS ACTION PLAN- The strategize the concept ( Leal Filho, following can be the initial methodology Walter (ed.)( 2012 )Sustainable adopted Development at Universities).

www.ijar.org.in 75 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

THE STRATEGIES OF ACHIEVING served as demonstration gardens to CAMPUS SUSTAINBILITY showcase the beauty and diversity of edible landscaping in a campus To engage the campus community in the setting. implementation of sustainability goals and actions, certain strategies were 10. Additionally, the gardens provide required which could beachieved service opportunities for student through . volunteers to serve in the garden in their free time. 1. Providing peer support to sustainability programs in each 11. The flowers of the rose garden can department. beused in functions to welcome the dignitaries & for decorative 2. Provision for environmental purposes inside campus activities. education & programs that promote sustainability 12. The flowers can alsoused to worship the goddess Saraswathi 3. Introducing Environmental studies idol inside the campus garden. as a topic by the Affiliating University. 13. The herbal plants such as hibiscus &tulasi can help the environs with 4. Motivation through creativity healthy& fresh air. activities to identify new procedures of campus 14. The Trees of Teak , sandalwood , sustainability Neem, Gulmohar , Acasia , Eucalyptus ,Asoka along with fruit 5. initiatives to promote trees mango, papaya , jack fruit sustainability through orientation ,plums , chikkoos , etccan help the programs to fresher students campus with fresh air & water where they will be offered sustainability.( LealFilho, Walter opportunities to exchange ideas, (ed.)( 2012 )Sustainable experiences and plans. Development at Universities). 6. Recognizing and rewarding PROCESS PHASES OF PROGRAMME successes through Award of Excellency to departments and A formalized process for advancing Student volunteerscan be mooted sustainability in acollege campus can be through innovative sustainability done in phases . activities 1. Phase one- It has had targeted 7. To Reduce energy consumption, all outreach. -This includes identifying students can be made to turn off and providing support for students, the lights when they leave their volunteer student leaders, building class rooms. student capacity and communicating with all 8. To reduce Greenhouse gas stakeholders. The Stake holders emissions local students can be such as Parents, Alumni ,& college advised to take cycles to college development Council members were instead of bikes. convinced of the concept of campus 9. A beautiful in house campus sustainability. garden can be developed .It also

www.ijar.org.in 76 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

2. Phase Two- This phase involves Hyderabad campus can be helping campus sustainability launched the “cycles on campus” activists to create general 6. Most of the students come from awareness and broadenoutreach far off places they are supported programs . NSS /NCC /Scouts by Public transportations facility &guides , red cross , Eco club , thus reliant on pool Garden club , campus club student transportation facility in volunteers can be involved in campus. campus cleaning activities.Faculty can join hands with peer support. 7. An institution can moot the Parents & old alumni can also be intention of ordering high involved. efficiency multi-purpose machines to consolidate printers, 3. Phase Three- This phase involves faxes, scanners and copiers. consultation with all departments in developing into a coherent 8. All faculty & administrative staff campus action Plan. On this basis carry a reusable water bottle the campus can be made greener with them. every year. This action plan helps 9. All faculty can set their PC & in evolving an annual plan which computer screen to go into can be initiated with certain standby mode after 15 minutes outreach extension each year. of inactivity 10. Several of the Faculty can leave CAMPUS SUSTAINABILITY the car at home &take a walk in OUTCOMES- When an institution the second session of the College. supports itself with 11. Use natural light to light sustainabilityactivities the outcomes officeinstead of Tube lights can be measured in actions such as LEDs & CFLs. 1. All students strive to turn off the 12. Using 100% post-consumer lights when theyleave theirclass recycled paper for use in the rooms. office 2. All students voluntary 13. All faculty cancarry their own themselves todeposit waste in bagsfor shopping outside the specific areas only. . campus. 3. In the computer lab students 14. Students can be advised to avoid shut down their PCs completely wasting food inside the campus. at the end of the day. 15. Reducing the wastage of 4. The Office has set all printers stationery inside the campus can and copiers to default double- be gradually motivated to pick sided mode. up 5. Using Cycle inside campus - 16. Watering the plants through Toward promoting sustainability channels with waste water on campus, on the model of recycling can be a reality .

www.ijar.org.in 77 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

THE OUTREACH METHODOLOGY work towards achieving their full potential.These initiative will also aim to An Institution can strive towards increase awareness among the student enhancing the concept of campus community on the issue of sustainability, sustainability further more through to keep the campus clean and green 1. Engaging the faculty and students in while improving the overall health of research and creative projects in the student community. A holistic campus Sustainability.( approach, more commonly including Bantanurshaila& others - social, economic and traditional Sustainability issues in Indian environmental considerations in universities of Higher education sustainability goals has to become a part 2012). of the syllabi in the campus. Colleges and universities across the globe are 2. Such as conducting environmental making the concept of campus art exhibitions, energy saving sustainability a reality. These initiatives demonstration projects such as solar are influencing curriculum decisions, street lighting, solar hot water for operational budgets, facility plans, and hostels, solar thermal cooking, campus culture. Students, faculty, & institutional biogas plants , staff are leading these earnest efforts. electrical mobility, etc , adopting a Certainly bringing about a campus water Harvesting System etc. ( Leal culture is a difficult work, requiring Filho, Walter (ed.)( 2012 coordination and cooperation yet a )Sustainable Development at common motivation towards achieving Universities). sustainability will follow. 3. All these initiatives will lead to References- outcome such as reducing the negative environmental impact of 4. Poyyamoli- G- A critical review the college or university ( of campus sustainability in India- a road Bantanurshaila& others - map for the future 2012 Sustainability issues in Indian 5. Bantanurshaila& others - universities of Higher education Sustainability issues in Indian 2012).Saving the college money, universities of Higher education 2012 educating and empoweringstudents thereby creating a sustainable 6. Brundtland Commission. ( 1987) generation for future. World commission on environment and development. Our common future. CONCLUSION Oxford, United Kingdom: Campus sustainability is the need of the OxfordUniversity Press; 1987. hour and is one of key focus areas for 7. Leal Filho, Walter (ed.)( 2012 sustainability initiatives.These )Sustainable Development at initiatives will make a sustainable Universities: New HorizonsSeries/ difference in campus communities and Environmental Education, will assist students to focus on building Communication and Sustainability - capacity at individual level and Volume 34: 2012 institutions at large . These strategies will help to drive inclusive growth and 8. Alshuwaikhat.H.M,Abubakar enable institutions and individuals to (2008)“An integrated approach to

www.ijar.org.in 78 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 achieving campus sustainability: environmental management practice”, assessment if the current campus Journal of Cleaner Production 2008 ******************** Dr. Vidya is working as an Associate Professor and Head of the Department of History Government Arts College Hassan. She has 18 years of teaching experience and more than 10 years of research experience. She has been guiding M. Phil & Ph. D Research Scholars of various universities. She is pursuing a major research project funding by University Grants Commission. She has published more than 50 articles on a variety of issues in newspapers & published two books & published research articles in various national and international journals. She is also one of the editorial members of the International journal of Academic Research. She has been conducting exhibitions in Historical artifacts & rare coins. She has delivered lectures on different topics.

www.ijar.org.in 79 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

STRUCTURAL FORMATION OF AGRAHARAS IN MEDIEVAL SOUTH INDIA –A CASE STUDY OF HOSAHOLALU AGRAHARA

Dr. PUTTARAJU.K. Lecturer In History, Sir M.V. Post Graduate Center , Tubinakere, Mandya District, Karnataka State

ABSTRACT This paper examines the significance of establishing Agrahara in sub urban locality & highlights the HosaholaluAgrahara as a center of superior education & learning. An Agrahara was the most important center of education and learning in medieval south India. The Brahmans who were well versed in the Vedas and other branches of knowledge were to transmit their learning and scholarship to pupils in this Agrahara. There were several political issues behind the creation of a scholastic center. These Agraharacenters were concerned with secular education along with religious and traditional education .The work of teaching was regarded as a sacred duty by all masters and not a merely a business transaction. The kings & their political atmosphere supported several kinds of political readjustments& setting up of an agrahara was one of them. KEY WORDS- Agrahara , Promotion , Learning , Political Readjustments, Societal Impact.

AGRAHARA OF HOSAHOLALU EPIGRAPHICAL EVIDENCES This Agrahara was the most important An Epigraph of Krishanrajapete where center of education and learning in south the place of present study is located, India. It was a villagegiven to a group of registers the gift of land below a tank to Brahmins for their maintenance while Somayya for offerings to god Somanatha they engaged themselves in learning and by Hulegere deva, son of education. The income from these Sapeyaketayawhen Madanna son of villages was enjoyed in perpetuity by the Ishwarapeddi was the Masaveggade (Kr descendants of the original donors. As 8 EC Vol.VI- The Introduction – pp1-12). the main duty of the Brahmins was to The gift was made with the approval of acquire knowledge and all other worries pandaladeva the officer of Hosavolalu were kept at a distance. The Brahmans under padumanna the Senubhova (Kr 8 who were well versed in the Vedas and EC Vol.VI- The Introduction – pp1-12) of other branches of knowledge were to MahapradhanaMadi deva transmit their learning and scholarship dannayaka,Dekanna and all the to pupils in this Agrahara. There were mahajans of Hosavolalu. This place had several political issues behind the been converted into an Agrahara creation of a scholastic center . The kings renamed Rayasamudra by the & their political atmosphere supported Mahajanas of Hoysalanadu and several kinds of readjustments& setting Kongunadu.( Kr 8 EC Vol.VI- The up of an agrahara was one of them. Introduction – pp1-12)

www.ijar.org.in 80 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

GIFT OF LAND- land and serving people. It was large enough to hold temples of magnificent Hence this Agrahara was created as a nature. gift to well versed Brahmans with a promise to promote learning among Moreover it was bordering a big tank students of that vicinity. A large number and River Hemavathy -a big tributary of of pupils from different parts of Southern River Cauvery, flowed in the bordering India flocked to this center for higher villages closely. The elevated hills in the learning.As this center imparted west ward direction enhanced the scenic education of an advanced type several beauty of this place. The land was fertile students from Tonnuru, Tondanuru, Paddy and Ragiwere grown along with kikkeri, Sindhagahtta, Melukote, cotton and silk. The place had contacts Bachenahalli, Somanathapura, Mahisha with markets of Srirangapattana, mandala, Madapura, Lakshmipura, Mysore and Pandavapura. The land Kalale, Channarayapattana routes connected the markets of ,pandavapaura , etc came here to study. Melukote and Todanuru on the northern These students were very eager to learn borders Chananrayaapttana and Hassan education from the hands of several on the southern borders. Akkihebbalu masters who excelled in their and Holenarasipura on the eastern subjectssuch as borders and Santhebachenahally and Nyayangashastra(Jurisprudence ) and Sasalu on the western borders and hence Ganitha ( Mathematics) Tarka (Logic) it was suitably located to be an a focal Philosophy Vyakarana (grammar) etc. learning point. After the center became Philosophy Mathematics, Astronomy and an Agrahra twoVaishnava temples came Astrology were the important subjects up gradually one in Kikkeri another in which were taught generally in all these Akkihebbalu. One Lakshmi Narasimha study centers. such as temple was built in Holalu itself. Nyayangashastra(Jurisprudence ) and Another village renamed as Ganitha ( Mathematics) Tarka (Logic) Hariharapura was also converted into Philosophy Vyakarana (grammar) etc ( an Agrahara by the then ruling Hoysala Kr 8 EC Vol.VI- The Introduction – pp1- king. A great area was thus located and 12) it was renamed as HolaluAgarahara by Hoysala king Narasimha III. In course of LOCATING AN AGRAHARA time this Agrahara grew into a learning The HosaholaluAgrahara was situated center forming a university called as at a nearby distance from the town of Ghatikasthana. Kogunadu. This was a key & strategic EDUCATION IMPARTED place in the Hoysala empire. Great care was taken in the selection of this town. The type of education imparted here was The City was selected on the basis of its different from that of other mutts and proximity. Its scenic beauty quietness temples. They were concerned with tranquility and large space was secular education along with religious primarily taken into account& it’s and traditional education. Because this boundary line . Several lands were center catered to all types of learned earmarked for building temples in the masters and pupils from different nearby vicinity. It could afford localities. Traditional learning included accommodation for any number of the Four Vedas and their countless students. It could hold privileges such as Commentaries while secular learning

www.ijar.org.in 81 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 included Mathematics, Logic, by all masters and not a merely a Metallurgy, Botany Agriculture, business transaction.In the age of sutras Astrology philosophy, Astronomy etc. also a definite code of ethics, principles and regulations both for the teacher and STRUCTURAL FORMATION the taught was laid down, here during After it was created a large bodies of Hoysala kings also the master pupil students were attracted to this center relationship was held high. The violation through Shishyavritti which meant of any of these principles was treated as attracting students through a sin which could not be rectified by scholarship.This was established by the any expectation.It attracted severe grants made by the rulersand by the punishment also.Education taught here village head men for earmarked purpose included both mundane and ultra such as Dhoopa, deepa, naivaidya, mundane life of man and hence it played geetha, nritya ,ahaara, khanda, sputita, a significant role in the life of and jeernodhadhara , yateenamvidyarthinam process of internal development of an cha satramnimittam ( EC vol 5 BKI I individual. This education inculcated the 1,85 1049 A.D).There were instances of spirit of dutifulness, faith, morality and well versed Brahmans joining together self discipline. This education was to form an Agrahara for the purpose of always considered a necessity for carrying educational activity but here attaining sublimation of life or salvation. learned Brahmans were attracted to Men were given the knowledge of the settle here to promote learning ( almighty his ultra powers and Mudigere inscription no.36 E C Vol. VI cognizance god through religious p.5). instruction and practicality. CHARACTERISTICS OF AGRAHARA- CONCLUSION: Several inscriptions in which the The HosaholaluAgraharawas asuperior subjects taught were also recorded .The learning center created to become a sub education so imparted was residential in urban center attracting students from character.The teacher Acharya or distant localities. The Agrahara punditha or Bhattastayed along with gradually became a great center of the students. This created a rare learning with temples added, residential atmosphere of reciprocal and joint living buildings , the revenue generation and benefitted the society to a very sources were added. Kings took large extent. imperative steps to ameliorate the center METHODS OF TEACHING in to a higher educational axis. The work of teaching was regarded as a sacred In the ancient Indian method of duty by all masters and not a merely a teaching, ’the individual’ and not a group transaction of benefactions. This center was the immediate concern. In this had a great socio religious impact & it Agrahara also the individual pupil was lived up to the expectations of medieval given highest concern. This assisted in south Indian society. building up a strong master pupil relationship and consequently personal REFERENCES- attachment between the preacher or 1. Annual report of south Indian preceptor and the pupil and the master Epigraphy was of an abiding nature. The work of teaching was regarded as a sacred duty

www.ijar.org.in 82 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

2. Chttopadhaya B.D.- Trade and 5. EpigraphiaCarnatica Vols. .I-XI Urban centers in Early Medieval I(1898-1894 Ed . by Lewis Rice North India – Indian Historical 6. GurukulaRajan - Non Brahman Review Vol 1 No 2 September 1974 resistance to the Expansion of 3. Derrett J.D.M.- An Indian Brahamadeyas – The Early Pandya Contributions to the study of Experience – Proceedings of the property Bulletin of the School of Indian History congress 45th session the Oriental and African studies Vol Annamalinagara university 1984 18 1956 7. Hermann kulke – A Passage to 4. Dhavalikar ,M.K. –The second India - Temples Merchants and the Urbanization -Indian Historical Ocean -Journal of the Economic and Review -Vol 16 No 1-2 July 1989 & Social History of the Orient -Vol 36 January 1999 Part Ii May 1993

Dr. PUTTARAJU.K.

www.ijar.org.in 83 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

CONNECTING THROUGH LANGUAGE - REFLECTIONS ON THE SPREAD OF RUSSIAN SANSKRIT SCHOLARSHIP

Dr. VEENA.H.N. Associate Professor & HOD Department of Sanskrit, Government Arts College, HASSAN- Karnataka

ABSTRACT Sanskrit language & literature has attracted scholars across the world to involve themselves in its pedagogy. Scholastic attributes of several scholars around the world have been exposed through their in-depth study of Sanskrit language &literature . Even in Russia Sanskrit language has had several scholars. They were instrumental in introducing the richness of Sanskrit language into Russia. This paper looks at the significant scholarlycontributions of Russian scholars towards popularizing Sanskrit language. Key words: Sanskrit language, Russian scholars, literary studies

INTRODUCTION initially relied on foreign professors to teach Sanskrit, with German academics One of the pioneers of the study of the being the first to teach the ancient Indian ancient Indian language language in the country. wasGerasimLebedev. Tsar Alexander I was so fascinated with Lebedev’s writing PAVEL YAKOVLEVICH PETROV - about India that he requested the scholar Robert H. Stacy’s classic work ‘India in and musician a Sanskrit printing press in Russian Literature’ mentions the Russian Imperial capital. Lebedev PavelYakovlevichPetrov, a Sanskrit published a whole series of books, scholar who had a meticulousaffection including translation of the poetry of for Kashmir and translated the Hindu Bengali poet Bharatchandra Roy, a epic Ramayana into Russian language. Russo-Hindustani dictionary and a book Petrov learned Sanskrit in St on the grammar of Eastern dialects, but Petersburg and taught the language in the famed Russian traveler was no the mid-19th century in the provinces of Sanskrit scholar.( Williams, Monier Kazan and later in the city of Moscow. (2004)- A Sanskrit-English dictionary). He also translated Kalhana’sRajatrangini, a chronicle of EXPANSION OF SANSKRIT the rulers of north-western India into SCHOLARSHIP IN RUSSIA Russian language. Due to all these COUNT SERGEY UVAROV, Sanskrit efforts St Petersburg became one of the scholarship in Russia began under the major research centers for Sanskrit aegis of Count Sergey Uvarov, an during second part of the 19th century influential statesman and educational and attracted Indologists from all across curator. In 1818, Uvarov inaugurated the Europe to Russia . Asiatic Academy of St Petersburg, where RUDOLF VON ROTH AND OTTO VON Sanskrit was taught for the first time BOHTLINGK- Rudolf von Roth and Otto with Russian languagebeing the von Bohtlingk weretwo German language of instruction. Tsarist Russia scholars who lived in the city of Russia

www.ijar.org.in 84 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

and compiled a seven-volume Sanskrit- translated Indian fairy tales of Kumauni German dictionary called Sanskrit region . Minayev’s trips to India resulted Worterbuch that was in wide usage in also in interesting ethnographic academic circles in Germany& Russia. collections, preserved in the N.N. Von Bohtlingk learnt Sanskrit at the St Miklukho-Maklay Museum of Petersburg State University & was very Anthropology and Ethnography.( Russia much fond of Classical works of Sanskrit India report( 2014 ). He is also well-known for translating an FYODOR STCHERBATSKOY -Another edition of the Sanskrit grammar of St Petersburg-based Indologist who Panini, who formulated formulation of made a great contribution to Sanskrit the 3,959 rules of Sanskrit morphology, and Indian studies before the Bolshevik syntax and semantics in the Classic Revolution was Fyodor Stcherbatskoy, grammar work known as Ashtadhyayi.( best known as an authority on Buddhist Russia India report( 2014 ). texts. He was a student of IVAN MINAYEV-The famous Sanskrit scholarMinayev and worked on a theory professor from Russia in the 19thcentury of Indian poetry and published the was Ivan Minayev, who also taught Theory of Knowledge and Logic in the comparative grammar of Indo-European Doctrines of Later Buddhism in Russian languages.He travelled to India and in two editions. He later taught Sanskrit Ceylon in 1874-75 and wrote extensively till his death in 1942. His scholarship of about the countries Hindu philosophy and Buddhism even neighboruingSrilanka.His excellent won him the admiration of great Indian command over Palilanguage and leaders like pandit Jawaharlal Nehru Sanskrit language , as well as the and poet Rabindranath Tagore. knowledge of countless contemporary POST-SECOND WORLD WAR Indian languages and some Pahari dialects, allowed him to communicate Post-Second World War, a new freely with people in India living in the generation of scholars began to pursue regions and territories which he Indology and India’s warm relations with travelled across. He collected and the USSR gave these scholars access to accumulated unique historical data & many places and older texts. ( Banerji, notes of his journeys to India, Nepal and Suresh (1989). A companion to Sanskrit Ceylon in 1874-75, to India in 1880 and literature). The newer generation of to India and Burma in 1885-86.The Indologists however followed a path that State Library of the St Petersburg has was laid out by the great scholars of the preserved the Sanskrit and Pali 18thand 19th centuries from St manuscripts that Minayev collected in Petersburg. (Russia & India report 2014 India, while his art collection can be ) seen in the museum of the Russian CONCLUSION- Thus Russian love for Academy of Sciences in St Sanskrit language assisted in producing Petersburg.The keen interest of I.P. great translations& good authorship. Minayev towards the culture and There was royal support to these everyday life of the peoples of India compositions. The relative connectivity found expression in the study of folklore with the Slav language was also helpful and ethnography, as important as in Russians taking up Sanskrit reading. everything else that this scientist- The narratives in Sanskrit grammar achiever did,” said Madhu Malik, who

www.ijar.org.in 85 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 attracted the Russian readership into Williams, Monier (2004). A Sanskrit- taking the Sanskrit language seriously. English dictionary : etymologically and philologically arranged with special REFERENCES- reference to cognate Indo-European Banerji, Suresh (1989). A companion to languages. New Delhi: Sanskrit literature : spanning a period BharatiyaGranthNiketan. of over three thousand years, containing Burrow, T (2001). The Sanskrit brief accounts of authors, works, language (in Norwegian). Delhi: characters, technical terms, MotilalBanarsidass. geographical names, myths, legends, and several appendices. Delhi: MotilalBanarsidass

Dr. VEENA.H.N. Associate Professor &HOD , Department of Sanskrit, Government Arts College, HASSAN ,Karnataka

www.ijar.org.in 86 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

SELF – HELP GROUPS AND ECONOMIC EMPOWERMENT OF WOMEN IN INDIA Smt. Rathna Y. D, Assistant Professor in Economics, Government Arts College, Hassan ABSTRACT This paper majorly focuses on how self- help groups are instantly support to empower the women in various fields. Self-help groups have been instrumental in empowerment by enabling women to work together in collective agency. Women’s networks do not usually obtain business or political favours has the command few economic resources are frequently rely on time and non- monetized labour exchange. However, self-help groups, then combined with savings and credit, have enabled women to benefit economically by monetizing their contributions and in the process have empowered them to become agents of change. Key words: Community, Self-help groups, Micro finance Introduction:- this issue we have tried to examine the direction and importance of rural finance The biggest challenge to any in terms of self-help groups which offer civilized society is the economic the easiest method of empowering the deprivation of its bucolic part. The most rural poor. potent tool against human deprivation is building human capital among the Objectives of the Study:- deprived, through sustainable The paper presentation is mainly development initiative, which is taken by based on the following objectives. the deprived themselves, “Self – realization and self-initiative are the two 1. To analyze the concept of self –help most powerful weapons to wash poverty groups and empowerment. out from the world map” this dynamic 2. To analyze the relationship between quotation of world’s greatest economist self- help groups and economic CHANUKYA is been translated to one empowerment of women at national word that is SHG. Micro finance through and state level. SHG has become a ladder for the poor to bring them up not only economically but 3. To examine the economic impact of also socially, mentally and attitudinally. self-help groups with reference to Starting from the Bancosol of Bolivia to increase in saving, increase in India’s NABARD all are the witness of employment generation, the triumphant saga of micro finance. improvement in asset holding, effective utilization of credit, and India’s economy is increasingly impact on poverty levels. becoming a market driven economy. The state of affairs is such that unless micro Methodology:- entrepreneurial activities are not The methodology of the present initiated a rural areas and finance is not study can be broadly outlined with the properly channelized toward the help of the secondary source of data and activities, the rural poor will not be able information of national and state level. to break the grinding cycle of poverty. In

www.ijar.org.in 87 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Progress and performance of self-help  Loans are given mainly on trust with groups have been analyzed; the growth minimum paper with and without rate of self-help groups has also been any security. estimated on the basis of available  The loan amounts are small, annual data. Secondary such as frequent for short duration and are Government publications, reports of mainly for conventional purposes. women and child development departments, various state level and  The rates of interest vary from group national level journals and NGO’s. to group and the purpose of loan. It is higher than that of banks but The concept of SHG:- lower than that of money lenders. It is a voluntarily formed group the  At periodic meetings, besides member size is 10-20. The group is collecting money social and economic basically homogenous in nature. They issues are also discussed. came together for addressing their common problem. They are encouraged  Defaults are rare due to group to save in a regular basis. The amount of pressure and intimate knowledge of saving is within the range of Rs. 20 – Rs, the end use of credit. 100. They rotate this common pooled Differentiating between consumer’s resource within the members with a very - credit and production credit. small rate of interest. Each group has a leader who is called as the president and - Analyzing in the economies, culture secretary. They usually maintain records and social position of the target of translation in daily basis in written group. format and that has been kept with the Providing easy access to credit and president or the secretary. Not only from - facilitating group organization for the internal resources the members also effective control. get loan in bulk amount from mainstream bank, different - Ensuring repayment and continuity governmental and non-governmental through group dynamics. organizations, donor agencies through Setting viable for interest rates, MFI’s. - repayment schedules, gestation SHG Functions:- period, extension, writing off bad debts and The important functions of SHGs are as follows:- - Assisting group members in getting access to the formal credit  Group members usually create a institution. common fund by contributing their small savings on a regular basis.  Groups evolve flexible systems of Concept of Empowerment:- working and manage pooled The concept of empowerment has resources in a democratic way. been the subject of much intellectual  Groups consider loan requests in discourse and analysis. Empowerment is periodic meetings and competing defined as the processes by which claims on limited resources are woman take control and ownership of settled by consensus. their lives through expansion of their

www.ijar.org.in 88 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 choices. Thus, it is the process of fail to play a part in economic, social and acquiring the ability to make strategic political decision-making and life choices in a context where this development. ability has previously been denied. The Components of Empowerment of core elements of empowerment have Women:- been defined as agency, awareness of gendered power structures, self-extern Empowerment in this context and self-confidence. Empowerment can can be observed in the following six take place at a hierarchy of different components viz. levels individual, household, community 1. Access to economic resources and and societal and is facilitated by influence over their uses. providing encouraging factors e.g. exposure to new activities, which can 2. Participation in economic decision- build capacities and removing making. inhabitating factors e.g., lack of 3. Opportunities for self-development. resources and skills. 4. Participation in socio-political Two vital processes have been decision – making and influence over identified as important for local opinion making. empowerment. The first is social mobilization and collective agency, as 5. Scope for skill development. poor women often lack the basic 6. Impact on general welfare of the capabilities and self-confidence to family and community. counter and challenge existing disparities and barriers against them. Self-Help Groups and Economic Often, change agents are needed to empowerment:- catalyze social mobilization consciously. Self-Help Groups intermediated Second, the process of social by micro credit have been shown to have mobilization needs to be accompanied positive effects on women, with some of and completed by economic security. As these impacts being ripple effects. They long as the disadvantaged suffer from have played valuable roles in reducing economic deprivation and livelihood the vulnerability of the poor, through insecurity, they will not be in a position asset creation, income and consumption to mobilize. smoothing, provision of emergency assistance, and empowering and Awareness and recognition emboldening women by giving then women’s economic contribution within control over assets and increased self- and outside the household. “Poverty has esteem and knowledge. women’s face of 1.3 billion people in poverty, 70% are women”. Illiteracy on a Studies in several countries and large scale is a major obstacle to point out that loans are sometimes used development and commenced the battle for consumption smoothing, not against equality and empowerment of production. It has been pointed out that women. Human development is process the poor often have short-term liquidity of enlarging choices for all people in the needs, which would normally be met by society. In this process most of the usurious money lenders if other financial women are excluded from its benefit. If sources such as micro credit were not women are continually excluded, they available. During the Asian economic

www.ijar.org.in 89 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 crisis, self-help micro credit groups enhanced. One measure which has been served as important cushions and safety taken with some success is to assign nets. A high proportion of the funds specific responsibility to women’s groups made available for self-help micro credit in the community. There have been schemes were utilized by women, reports of women’s self-help groups enabling them to meet the subsistence serving a social audit function and, in needs of their families during those one instance, exposing corruption in the difficult economic times. Many self-help supply pipes and ordering replacements. programmes have also incorporated Path ways to Empowerment:- elements of savings, which can be used for purposes such as health insurance Self-help groups have been and emergency loans, thereby serving as instrumental in empowerment by private safety nets. enabling women to work together in collective agency. Women’s networks do One important indicator of not usually obtain business or political empowerment is the ability to make favours’ as they command few economic decisions within the household. Where resources and frequently rely on time mobility outside the home is often and non – monetized labour exchanged. restricted, women have reported Self-help groups, when combined with increased mobility, simply having to savings and credit, have enabled women inform male heads of household instead to benefit economically by monetizing of soliciting their permission. Increased their contributions and in the process self-confidence was especially have empowered them to become agents pronounced when women had been of change. exposed to training on women’s rights and social political issues. Instead, this process of social mobilization should be conceptualized Exclusion of poor women from more broadly so that the groups can land rights has been highlighted as perform more encompassing roles. A contributory to their marginalization. promising example is the federating of Some self-help groups have reportedly self-help groups, where all such group in been able to purchase or lease land or one village form an apex body consisting user rights to community forests and of selected representatives of each group. fishing ponds collectively, thereby laying Women leaders in federated bodies have the foundation for enhanced food gained prestige and recognition, which security and agricultural productivity. has paved their path to elected office in As most Grameen members are women, local government. It is at the level of one of the results is that women have political decision-making that women had title deeds transferred to them, often can hope to have a voice in transforming from their husbands, to obtain these society. In this regard, affirmative loans. This has also reduced the action, whereby women are allocated incidence of divorce since women as quotas in various decision-making owners of their own homes cannot be bodies, can be an effective strategy. easily evicted. Role of self –help Groups in the As women are an important part Empowerment of women:- of the community, building their capabilities to manage community and 1. Access to economic resources and community’s projects should be influence over this uses. The

www.ijar.org.in 90 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 unjustifiable concentration of economic and as participants in the process of powers is one of the key factors for the development due to several socio- low prestige and weak bargaining economic cultural political impediments. position of women in the society. The strengthening of women’s economic empowerment requires actions in the 2. Participation in economic decision – area of recognizing women’s right to making. Economic roles are more sustainable livelihood and employment, influential in the present day living. In all policies for self-reliance, encourage this direction, women’s abilities are economic empowerment of women, required to understand, to access women protect migrant workers in order to empowerment. protect their dignity and develop 3. Opportunities for self-Development. mechanisms to promote dialogue on This latter is especially important since policies and programmes of government rural women, right from the time when organizations and non- government they are young girls, are denied the organization. opportunities to go to school. References 4. Participation in socio- political SaurabhSinha, Micro credit: Impact, decision making and influence over local Training and sustainability, Institute of opinion making. Development studies, The University of 5. Scope for skill-development. Skill, Sussex, U.K. 1998. whether technical or managerial of a Sushmasahay, women and women, are specific ability to do Empowerment-approaches and something well. strategies, discovering publishing 6. Impact on general welfare of the house, New Delhi, 1998. family and community. Usually, a Hall, C.M. Women and Empowerment: woman acquires the influential role Hemisphere publishing corporation, primarily through her credibility and London, 1992. respect in the society. LalithaIyer, women Entrepreneurs Conclusion:- challenges and strategies, Fredrich, Indian development planning Ebert stiftung, New Delhi, 1991. has aimed at removing inequalities in Government of Karnataka, High power the process of development to ensure committee for research of regional that the fruits of development are an Imbalances, 2002. equal. Privilege of all sections of society, in recent years it has become Government of India, census Report, increasingly evident that women are 1991, and 2001, provisional tables New lagging behind a great deal both in Delhi. availing of the benefits of development

www.ijar.org.in 91 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

STRESS MANAGEMENT IN ADOLESCENT STUDENTS

Dr. J. V. Rama Chandra Rao, Lecturer in Psychology, Vikas College of Education, Vissanna Peta, Krishna Dist ABSTRACT The reasons for Stress during adolescence as per the review of literature are because of disturbed family dynamics , peer pressure, inability to cope with studies, drug abuse, lack of competence. One of the important trends which are being observed is getting instant gratification from the electronic media and gadgets. The involvement of adolescents in getting instant gratification of needs has led to lot of stress in them and in their relationships with family and peers. Stress leads to maladaptive behaviour. In this study with the extensive review of literature, Researcher tried to present the causes and symptoms of adolescent students stress and coping mechanism for adolescent students stress. Keywords: - Stress Management and Adolescents students

1. INTRODUCTION discover the world like they should. Adolescents in the previous days were Adolescence can be a stressful trained for things that were suitable time for children, parents and also all with their age so that they can use it to others who work with them. School manage their lives. But now, adolescents students in India have a high stress level have to follow their parents’ desires and higher rate of deliberate self-harm. which are preparing them to compete in Many recent studies have found relation the social system where the society is between stress and suicidal ideas in scrambling towards modernization so school children. Stress also results in that they are not left behind. If it is not increased likelihood of substance abuse managed well, stress can ignite among adolescents. A social and public psychological disturbances among them health response in addition to mental when they are grown up. These health response is crucial to prevent disturbances will cause stress to the suicidal behaviour and creating adolescents in the future if they are not awareness about substance abuse among overcome now. adolescents. Stress also positively correlates with maladaptive strategies The problem arises when the adopted towards schools, teachers, and adolescents are unable to cope with parents, peers, opposite sex and also at a stressful situations and end-up broader societal level. Management of themselves in the distressed state of adolescent stress is therefore, need of the mind. In this distressed situation they hour. This review article focuses on indulge themselves in Anti-Social and determinants of adolescent stress and Self-Destructive Activities. Management. In this study with the extensive Adolescents experience stress review of literature I have tried to because they are sometimes trapped present the causes and symptoms of between making decisions which is to Stress and Coping Mechanism for Stress. follow rules and orders or to be free and

www.ijar.org.in 92 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

2. REVIEW OF LITERATURE contribute to stress in life. Students are starting to shift from a life that is Students in their teens are the dependent on others to a life that needs ones who are going through the them to release the dependency and transitional phase, which is an start carrying their own responsibilities. intermediate of childhood and adulthood. During the teen years, a lot of biological, Hains Anthony (1990) examined the physical, mental and emotional changes effectiveness of a cognitive intervention are happening, as well as the changes in to help adolescents cope with stress and responsibility and role. In order to other forms of negative emotional stabilize these changes, the students are arousal. The trained adolescents showed always confronted with problems and significant reductions in levels of anxiety conflicts. For some students who are not and anger, and also improvement in self- capable of dealing with it, the changes esteem. will create stress and tension to them. If Morris (1990) stated that high school it is not dealt with in the early stages, students always face Academic stress in the student may experience mental school and they compete each other to problems. get better grades. Levine, 1970 (in Stress is believed to be caused by Dobson, 1980),explained that stress has the various problems that exist such as a relationship with a specific situation problems at school, financial problems, like a learning environment in school family problems and problems in their and the inability to do work perfectly surroundings and the failure to achieve anything that is desired. The issues of students doing Adams (1983) stated that the biggest things like punching teachers, cursing, problem among schooling teenagers is slandering and hurting teachers, the matters associated with their prostitution and others calls for schooling. Other than that, problems researchers to see the mentioned that female students have to deal with phenomena is connected to the stress are communication and family problems. situation among high school students. For the male students, their side problems are problems with getting Mates and Alisson (1992) which finds involved in sports, recreation and also that among the academic factor that financial problems. The many contribute to the stress in high school responsibilities and pressure cause students is their achievement in stress to the high school students like academics. Therefore, when stress is the need to achieve good academic associated with academic achievements grades, character building and also good it is hoped that a suitable teaching and attitude besides trying to comprehend learning method is created so that stress with their personal needs. will not exist among students. Other than that, the education curriculum that Zulkifli (1988) found that the stresses on academic achievement by adolescents always face problems in focusing on the importance of adjusting. Teenagers especially those examinations should be re-evaluated. who are students always face learning This is because it may cause stress to the problems, career management and also students. The importance of this problems in solving personal and social research is to help avoid stress from the matters. These are the factors that beginning.

www.ijar.org.in 93 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Fariza (2005) who conducted a research 3. CAUSES OFADOLESCENTS on the stress among high school students STRESS found that this age group has todeal  The Biological Cause: with the academic world. Therefore there exists demand and hope for Stress occurs due to sexual and other themselves, their parents, teachers and physical maturation that occurs during the society to see them succeed. puberty and results in hormonal changes. To support the biological cause SuvarnaSen (2006) in her study found of stress a study conducted on that academics was found to be major adolescents by BJ Cassey , Rebecca M. stressor of adolescent students. She Jones et al (2010) indicate that the touched upon every aspect of the adolescence is the time of storm and adolescence phase. Through review of stress. research she has put forth the important aspects of adolescence. And they are: a)  Cognitive development the role confusion among adolescents b) This is one of the important causes of encouraging adolescents to explore stress because during cognitive opportunities c) Helping the adolescents development adolescents try to with Identity crisisd) Influence on experience the world on their own. adolescents of family e) the attitude of According to ‟ Jean Piaget stheory an parents towards and vice-versa. adolescent is capable of thinking like an James.D.A Parker (2008) examined the adult about the age of 16. He proposed relationship between emotional that the basic process we use to think do intelligence (EI) and several addiction not change much beyond this stage. The related behaviours like gambling, process what Piaget calls is Formal internet use and video games playing in Operations. It involves stages and they two community based sample of are Abstract Thinking, Hypothetical adolescent 13-15 years old (N 209) and Thinking, Inter Propositional Logic and 16-18 years old (N= 458) both were Reflective Thinking. Cognitive measured using respective scales. development in the form of: thinking, Emotional Intelligence was found to be reasoning, learning, reflecting takes moderate to strong predictor of addiction place during adolescence. related be havior in both the groups.  Decision making Raymond Monte mayor (1986)conducted Building on Piaget‟s work Lawrence study and elicits that parents and Kohlberg (1976) and his associates adolescents who have good (Colby et al 1983) studied the communication between them and when development of moral reasoning by parenting style is helping the asking people of various age to resolve adolescents to communicate their stress moral dilemmas. Kohlberg argued that have better relationship. And parents moral reasoning passes through three also facilitate the adolescents to combat levels as we grow. They are pre stress. conventional level, Conventional, and Post Conventional level. Most theorists agree that as a both males and females move from childhood into adolescence

www.ijar.org.in 94 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 they rely mostly entirely on abstract Peer relationships moral principles to make decisions. A peer group membership assumes more  Achieving identity of Adolescence importance during adolescence than at any other time of life.A peer group can According to Erikson Adolescent who provide a refuge and a source of support forms a sense of Identity gains twokey for youngsters in conflict with their benefits they are „A feeling of being at families.Adolescents spend great deal of home in one’s body‟and a sense of time with other Adolescents. One study psychological Well-being”. He also which used beepers to contact speaks about Psychosocial Moratorium adolescents at random times (Larson et that is an Adolescent may delay in al 1977), found that they spend more taking up responsibilities and showing time talking with peers than doing Rebellion Pattern where in the academic work or being alone. The Adolescents go against their parents and structure of peer groups seems to change well-wishers in spite of being told for over the course of adolescence. (Coleman, their own good. To seek out the 1980,Dunphy, 1963)Adolescents move confusion the Adolescents make use of from small unisex groups to large groups their Abstract Thinking. In confusion and later develop contact with opposite and Identity crisis an individual tries to sex. Dominance hierarchy it is the understand himself about his strength leadership quality that is developed and weakness. He seeks to establish his during adolescence (Hartup,1983, Savin- identity in the world around him. williams, 1980). Confusion sets in when he is not sure of his potentialities and skills. So, he has to The other important problems hone up his skills and set them a tune to that cause stress are Substance Abuse, his personality. He has to identify his Instant Gratification fromElectronic role in the society and strive towards Media and Gadgets, Lack of that goal. Once he is focused about his Competence, Risk Behaviours, role there ends its confusion, as, he has Emotional disturbance, bullying, goal to reach and thus works towards it. Cyberbullying.  Social development 4.SYMPTOMS STRESSFUL BEHAVIOURS OF ADOLESCENTS This is also one crucial Stressor because it is the phase where Adolescents prefer Adolescents may be experiencing to spend their timemore outside family irritability because of lack of proper and demand for freedom. A study sleep at night. Adolescents may be conducted by Rex Forehand et al unable to concentrate on academics and (1991)on Adolescents and their parent’s sports. Adolescents may be having stress. The Study indicated that the unexplained fears or increased anxiety. stress in the family like divorce, Adolescents isolate from family activities intrapersonal conflict and maternal or peer relationships. Adolescents may depression leads to stress in the be experimenting with drugs and adolescents which deteriorates alcohol. Adolescents may complain about functioning. Further a positive Parent- headaches or stomach aches. Adolescents Adolescent relationship as perceived by may have poor appetite and low the Adolescents was associated with less immunity. deterioration in all areas of functioning.

www.ijar.org.in 95 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

5. STRESS MANAGEMENT REFERENCES MECHANISMS 1. Angel J Dean et al (2010) A Adolescents must learn to solve Systematic Review of Interventions to problems. Should develop positive enhance medication adherence in relationships at home, school, with peers childhood and adolescents with chronic and adults. Adolescents should have illness. Arch Dis Child 2010:95 p-717- Clear Goals. Adolescents should have 723. Permission and ability to learn from 2. Clifford T. Morgon et al (2011) : mistakes. Adolescents should develop Introduction to Psychology, Tata competencies (academic, social, life McGraw-Hill Education Private skills). Adolescents being Consistent, Limited New Delhi . Positive and disciplined helps in combating stress. Adolescents should 3. Caplan, Merleneetal (1992) take good nutritional food and exercise Effects on social adjustment and alcohol regularly. Adolescents should take time use. Journal of consulting and clinical out to relax or to do recreational psy, vol 60(1) Feb 1992 52-63. activities. Adolescents should develop 4. FarizaMd Sham. (2005), hobbies. TekananEmosiRemajaIslam. 6. CONCLUSION Islamiyyat; 3- 24 People of all ages are affected by stress 5. Hainsetal (1990): A cognitive an. Adolescent students seem especially stress-reduction intervention program vulnerable to this reality. Adolescence is for adolescents. Journal of counseling a time of rapid biological change, psychology, vol 37(1), Jan 1990, 79-84. personal development, social 6. Martin H Teicher et al (2006): interactions, social expectations, and Neurobiological Consequence of Early peer influence. The locus of much of this Stress and Childhood Maltreatment: phenomenon is in the school Are results fromHuman and Animal environment. For many students, high Studies Comparable? Vol 1071, school may be stressful. Students feel Psychobiology of Post Traumatic Stress the effects of stress in harsh and also Disorders.A decade of progresspages negative ways. Some of these effects 313-323 July 2006 include a sudden drop in grades, depression, general fatigue, insomnia, 7. Morris,C.G. (1990). mood swings, temper tantrums and Contemporary Psychology and Effective aggression. Because of the biological, Behaviour (7thEdition), Glenview,IL: cognitive and social causes the Scott &Foresman. adolescents go through a harsh period in 8. Pamela Martyn-Nemeth et al theirlife. So the parents have to be alert (2009): The relationships among self- in managing the stress during esteem, stress, coping, eating behavior adolescence. In order to overcome and depressive mood in adolescents. deviant behaviours the parents play a Research in Nursing and Health. constructive role in channelizing energies of the adolescents. Proper care 9. Raymond Montemyor (1986) : should to be taken in helping to take the The Storm and Stress of Adolescence: right decisions which may affect their Family variation in Parent-Adolescents. future.

www.ijar.org.in 96 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Journal of Adolescent Research Spring Qualitative view from India. 1986 vol 1. no 115-31. International journal of Humanities, vol 7, issue 11, pp 87-110. 10. Sangeeta Chaudhary and Priya Mary Joseph (2010): Adolescents‟ perceptions about coping with stress: A Dr. J. V. RAMA CHANDRA RAO has been working as anAssistant Professor in Education and has 22 years of teaching experience. He presented and published more than 45 research papers on various aspects of education and psychology in seminars and journals of State, National and International level.He has extensively worked on psychological problems of students in terms of research and intervention programs.

www.ijar.org.in 97 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

USING MOTHER TONGUE IN TEACHING VOCABULARY IN THE CLASS ROOM TO ENHANCE COMMUNICATION SKILLS

SHINY K.P. Lecturer in the P.G. Department of English, JMJ College for Women, Tenali, A.P ABSTRACT The paper aims at highlighting the effectiveness of using Mother tongue in teaching vocabulary in the language classroom to enhance the communication skills of the students. Vocabulary plays an important role in learning a language specially acquiring competency in English. The paper may help the teachers to use mother tongue judiciously to teach vocabulary for enhancing communication skills of the learners. Keywords: Mother Tongue, Teaching, vocabulary, Communication Skills

Introduction  using L2 can be a source of embarrassment particularly for shy Extensive research has been carried out learners and those who feel they are in the area of mother tongue influence not very proficient in the L2 on L2 learning. Among a number of teachers in second language acquisition,  L1 can help to move the task along there seem to be an increasing conviction by establishing a joint that the mother tongue (L1) has a understanding of the text and to facilitating role in the second language manage the task acquisition (Schweer, C 1999). Atkinson  L1 allows learners to focus attention (1987) not only acknowledges the on vocabulary and grammatical positive role of the mother tongue in the items (e.g., searching for vocabulary classroom, but also identifies the items or providing information and following uses of it: eliciting language, explanation about grammatical rules checking comprehension, giving and conventions instructions, enhancing co-operation among learners, promoting discussions  L1 may facilitate classroom of classroom methodology, improving activities, particularly for low presentation and reinforcement of proficiency students and complex language, checking for sense, testing, tasks and development of useful learning  L1 can provide a foundation for strategies. The following are several learners on which to build L2 reasons why the L1 should be used as a structures, especially during tool in the language classroom: collective activities inthe classroom,  it is more natural to use the L1 with and others who have the same L1  L1 provides a sense of security and  it is easier and more validates the learners’ live communicatively effective to use the experiences, allowing them to L1 express themselves (Nation, 2003; Swain &Lapkin, 2000; Atkinson,

www.ijar.org.in 98 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

1987; Wells, 1999; and Schweers, experiences. C. Schweers (1999:7) 1999). conducted research into this issue and found that a high percentage (88.7%) of Mother tongue has potentially both the participants felt that mother tongue positive and negative consequences: it should be used in their English classes. may serve social and cognitive functions Moreover, if learners of a second (Carless, 2008:331). It is claimed that language are encouraged to ignore their students working in groups do not have native language, they might well feel to speak English all the time. Use of their identity threatened. mother tongue relates to learner identity. Negative impact of mother Important strategies in Teaching & tongue use is that too much reliance on Learning Vocabulary the L1 may undermine the interaction in Learning vocabulary is a complex English. However good the students are process. The students’ aim to be at comprehending authentic reading or reachedin learning vocabulary process is listening materials, the majority keeps primarily their ability to recall the word mentally translating from L2 into L1 atwill and to recognize it in its spoken and vice versa. This fact makes teachers and written form. Generally, knowing a of foreign languages aware of the word involves knowing its form and its importance of translation in language meaning at thebasic level. In deeper classrooms. aspects it means the abilities to know its According to J. Harmer (2001:131), a (Harmer 1993): principal cause of the L1 use is required 1) Meaning, i.e. relate the word to an by the activity, if students are appropriate object or context linguistically incapable of activating vocabulary for a chosen task. Another 2) Usage, i.e. knowledge of its reason is that translation is a natural collocations, metaphors and idioms, as thing to do in language learning, and well asstyle and register (the code-switching between languages is appropriate level of formality), to be regarded as naturally developmental. aware ofany connotations and The amount of L1 use by particular associations the word might have students may well have to do with 3) Word formation, i.e. ability to spell differing learner styles and abilities. and pronounce the word correctly, Evidence from research into the crucial toknow any derivations (acceptable issue of the L1 use in classrooms around prefixes and suffixes), the world was analyzed by G. Mattioli (2004). For instance, L1 use in the 4) Grammar, i.e. to use it in the Chinese classrooms offers evidence that appropriate grammatical form L1is a valuable tool for socio-cognitive processes in language learning. Another reason for L1 use in the classroom Techniques relates to the fostering of a positive Pictures and Drawings affective environment. C. W. Schweers (1999:6)encourages teachers to insert the Pictures of many types and colours can native language into lessons to influence be used successfully to show the the classroom dynamic, provide a sense meaning of words and sentence. of security and validate the learners’ Handmade pictures can also be used as

www.ijar.org.in 99 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 there is no need to be very artistic. to determine its meaning. While you Drawings can be used to explain the may not know what a specific word meaning of things, actions, qualities, and means, many times you can determine relations. A line drawing of a head, for its meaning based on what the rest of example, provides many useful nouns the sentence focuses on. Adults should and verbs. model this sort of incidental vocabulary learning for children to help them Realia develop their own skills. Real objects or models of real objects are Context Skills very effective and meaningful in showing meanings but in handling of real objects, Context skills are the strategies that a a teacher must be practical and should reader uses for incidental vocabulary not be superfluous. learning. Texts are full of “clues” about the meanings of words. Other words in a Reading the word sentence or paragraph, captions, Reading words aloud is also very illustrations and titles provide readers beneficial. It makes a learner familiar with information about the text that with the word and also improves they can use to determine the meanings pronunciations of the learners. of unfamiliar words. These features are often referred to as “context clues” Key word method: Make the students to because they are contained within the think of an image that connects an context of the piece of writing rather unfamiliar word with a familiar key than outside it. Young readers should be word that sounds similar or is contained taught to find and use context clues for within the target word. For example, to learning new vocabulary words. Adult remember the word truculent, students modelling and practice are key for might think of the key word truck and helping children develop this important then draw or visualize a picture of a reading skill. fierce-looking person driving a truck to represent the meaning of the word. Write a Story Brainstorm: One method of associating A larger vocabulary enhances students’ vocabulary words with familiar words is writing and reading abilities, so what to brainstorm with students. Once better way for students to retain words students have heard a word and its than to use them in stories? Teachers definition, teachers can write the word can assign stories on an individual basis, on the board and ask students to say or make it a class project. By having words that go along with the new students incorporate all their vocabulary vocabulary word. If the word is “mare,” words correctly into the text, students for instance, students might say “horse,” get the opportunity to learn proper “barn” and “hay.” By writing the words spelling and definitions, and also how to down together, it creates a visual use the words in context. reference for students. Conclusion Incidental Learning This paper shows the effectiveness of Incidental vocabulary learning occurs all using L1 in teaching and learning of the time when we read. Based on the vocabulary. Teachers have to take into way a word is used in a text we are able consideration the teaching environment

www.ijar.org.in 100 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 and the target population they Harmer, J. (1993).The Practise of teach.Teachers have to provide adequate English Language teaching. England: exposure to learners of English. They Longman. have to fix the syllabi according to the Mattioli, G. (2004). On Native students-teachers comfort which enable Language Intrusions and Making Do the learners to respond easily. They have with Words: Linguistically to use English as much as possible in her Homogeneous Classrooms and Native /his teaching. So the learners are Language Use. English Teaching exposed to develop their communication Forum 42 (4), 20-25. skills in English. Learners realize that Nation, I. S. P. (2003, June).The role of fluency in L1 is a stepping stone towards the first language in foreign language achieving fluency in L2. The mother learning. Asian EFL Journal 5(2), tongue represents a powerful resource Article1. [Online] Available: that can be used in a number of ways to http://www.asian-efl- enhance learning but that it must journal.com/june_2003_PN.php (May always be used in a principled way. If 25, 2009). teachers can creatively and consciously Swain, M., &Lapkin, S. (2000). Task- deploy the first language as a resource based second language learning: The and treat it as a starting point for uses of the first language. Language learning vocabulary, it would make the Teaching Research, 4(3), 251-270. learning process more meaningful and Schweers, C.W., Jr. (1999). Using L1 in less stressful. the L2 Classroom.English Teaching Forum 37 (2), 6-9. Survey “The Use of References Mother Tongue”. Atkinson, D. (1987). The mother tongue Wells, G. (1999). Using the L1 to master in the classroom: A neglected resource? L2: A response to Antón and ELT Journal, 41(4), 241-47. DiCamilla’s ‘Socio-cognitive functions of Carless, D. (2008).Student Use of the L1 collaboration interaction in the L2 Mother Tongue in the Task-Based classroom’.Modern Language Journal, Classroom. ELT Journal 62 (4), 331- 83(2), 248-54. 338. Harmer, J. (2001).The Practice of English Language Teaching. England: Pearson Education Limited.

Shiny K.P. is working as a lecturer in the P.G. Department of English at JMJ (Autonomous) College for Women, Tenali, affiliated to AcharyaNagarjuna University. Shehas 10 years of teaching experience. She has published 15 articles and presented 28 papers at various National and International Conferences and Seminars.She has received ‘Best Service Award’ on 3rd Jan, 2011 by S.C., S.T. andMinority Employees Federation, Tenali and Best Paper Presentation prize in 2011.She is acting as a Principal of the college.

www.ijar.org.in 101 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

AN ANALYSIS ON POPULATION GROWTH OF YANAM REGION Dr.K.PRASAD, Asst. Professor, P. G. Department of Economics, Dr.S.R.K.Govt. Arts. College, Yanam ABSTRACT: Population is one of the important factors in determining the level of income, savings and investment. The rate of growth of population in Yanam region is higher than the rate at which population growing in U.T. of Pondicherry. Due to some relaxations in the tax and other exemptions, lots of business activities are also taking place in Yanam. People of neighboring villages and towns of A.P. are coming to Yanam for employment and educational purpose. Free housing loans, free rice for B.P.L.people, very good water and continues power supply, peaceful atmosphere all these attracted by the neighboring Andhra people to prefer Yanam region to settle. KEYWORDS: Birth rate, Density, Growth rate, Migration, population

Introduction responsible to change in the Demographic aspects of Yanam region. Population is one of the important factors in determining the level of DATABASE AND METHODOLOGY: income, savings and investment. Thus it The study is purely based on secondary is important to explain the population data the sample observations are 50 profile of the study region. The total years. The reference period of the study population of Yanam region in 1961 is is from 1961 to 2011.The required 7,032. But in subsequent years we can information was obtained from records of observe a considerable increase in statistical Hand Books and Population growth of population. According to 2001 Census reports of Directorate of census, the total population of yanam Economics and Statistics, Government of region is 31,362 of which male Pondicherry. In order to know the trend population is 5,876 and female and pattern of the rate of growth of population is 15,486. The percentage of population, growth rates and male and female population in total percentages were calculated. population is 50.62 and 49.38 respectively. And there was a FINDINGS: remarkable increase in the population of The percentage increase in growth rate Yanam region and the rate of growth of of population in Yanam region during population was much higher at 77.2 1971 – 2011 is much higher when it during 2001-2011 compared to other regions of OBJECTIVES: Change in population Pondicherry. And the rate of growth of comes with both positive and negative population had come down from 74.51 to consequences The main objective of this 45.25 during 1991 – 2001 censuses; this research is to highlight the rate of may be due to reduction in birth rate, growth of population in Yanam region, and due to strict implementation of and to know what factors that are family planning programmes. And again leading to increase in population.. Is the rate of growth of population has gone population growing naturally? If not, to up to 77.4 during 2011census; this is what extent the other factors are completely because of migration

www.ijar.org.in 102 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

from neighboring Andhra Pradesh areas 4.free supply of Text Books and Note to Yanam region. This also has been Books and other incentives to observed that migration taking place to meritorious students very good water Yanam region legally and illegally too. and continues power supply, peaceful Governmental schemes like, 1. Free atmosphere all these attracted by the supply of rice for people living below neighboring Andhra people to prefer Poverty Line, 2.Provision of free house Yanam region to settle. sites, 3. Providing free housing loans, Data relating to growth of population in this region during 1961 to 2011 are presented in the following Table 1. Table – 1: Growth of Population in Yanam Region Region 1961 1971 1981 1991 2001 2011 Total 7032 8291 11631 20297 31362 55626 10307 15876 27301 Male 5893 Yanam (50.78) (50.62) 9990 15486 28325 Female 5738 (49.22) (49.38) Total 369079 471707 604471 807785 973829 1247953 408081 480765 612511 Male U.T (50.52) (49.98) 399704 487124 635442 Female (49.48) (50.02) Source: Directorate of Economics and Statistics- Government of Pondicherry Table-2: Percentage in the growth of Population in Yanam Region 1961 1971 1981 1991 2001 2011 Yanam 17.90 40.28 74.51 54.95 77.2 U.T. of 28.1 27.81 28.15 33.64 20.56 Pondicherry Source: Directorate of Economics and Statistics- Government of Pondicherry From the above table 2 it can be seen Another important aspect is that that the total population of Yanam except in 1971 census, the rate of growth region has increased from 7032 in 1961 of population in Yanam region is higher to 31,362 in 2001. The increase in than the rate at which population population has registered a growth rate growing in Union Territory of of 17.90 during 1971 census over 1961 Pondicherry. Where in 1971 the rate of and it further rose to 40.28 and 74.51 growth of population is registered at during 1981 and 1991 census 27.81 at state level and in Yanam region respectively. And the rate of growth of it is only 17.90 over 1961 census. During population had come down from 74.51 to 2001-2011 the rate of grow of population 45.25 during 1991 – 2001 censuses; this was much higher of 77.2% and in entire may be due to reduction in birth rate, union territory it was only 28.21%. and due to strict implementation of family planning programmes.

www.ijar.org.in 103 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Table – 3: Growth of population in Pondicherry - Region Wise Year Area 1961 1971 1981 1991 2001 2011 8291 11631 20297 31362 55626 Yanam 7032 (17.90) (40.28) (74.51) (54.52) (77.2) 23134 28413 33447 36823 41816 Mahe 19485 (18.73) (22.81) (17.72) (10.09) (13.5) 100042 120010 145703 170640 200222 Karaikal 84001 (19.10) (19.96) (21.41) (17.11) (17.2) 340240 444417 608338 735004 950289 Pondicherry 258561 (31.59) (30.62) (36.88) (20.82) (29.2) 471707 604471 807785 973829 1247953 U.T. 369079 (27.81) (28.15) (33.64) (20.56) (28.1) Source: Directorate of Economics and Statistics- Government of Pondicherry The table 3 shows that the percentage the Union Territory of Pondicherry. increase in growth rate of population in During 2001-2011 the percentage rate of Yanam region during 1971 – 2011 is growth of population in Yanam region is much higher when it compared to other much higher of 77.02 percent when it regions of Pondicherry. The percentage compared with other regions of increase in growth rate of population Pondicherry. between 1971 and 2001 census in Yanam DENSITY OF POPULATION: region are 54.52 and it was 20.82, 17.11, The concept of density of and 10.09 in Pondicherry, Karaikal and population can be defined as the total Mahe regions respectively during the number of population living in one sq. said period. Whereas at U nionTerritory km area of land. The position of Mahe level, it was 20.56% between 1971 and region was at first place followed by 2001.The percentage of rate of growth of Pondicherry, Yanam, and Karaikal population in 1991 and 2001 census has regions throughout the period. It has registered a decline in all the regions of shown in the following table 4: Table –4: Density of population in Pondicherry - Region Wise

Region/ Area Density of population State (sq.km) 1941 1948 1961 1971 1981 1991 2001 2011 Yanam 30 408 418 352 415 338 677 1568 1854 Pondicherry 290 703 765 892 1173 1517 2076 2534 3232 Karaikal 161 381 444 572 621 750 911 1060 1275 Mahe 9 1566 2033 2165 2570 3157 3716 4091 4846 UT 480 603 671 769 983 1229 1642 2029 2547 Source: Directorate of Economics and Statistics- Government of Pondicherry

www.ijar.org.in 104 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

limitation, climate and meteorological disasters, decrease in mortality rates POPULATION MIGRATION: We also and the influence of extended family are can observe a bye flow of migrant some of the factors responsible for population from neighboring A.P. migration. All these factors are also because of better quality of life and applicable to Yanam, except physical better opportunities for livelihood. And factors because Yanam is a small region due to some relaxation in the tax and and any change in climate affects the other exemptions, lots of business whole region. Economic stability is a activities are also taking place in determining factor as living in the city / Yanam. Because of the unit cost of town does have save advantages like power is very lower, and due to other better job opportunities, medical concessions many industrialists of other facilities and other benefits. Moreover states are coming forward to establish living in the city or town is also industries in Yanam region. As this considered as a symbol of prestige. region having some industries, people of neighboring villages and towns of A.P. URBANISATION: are coming to Yanam for employment The entire Yanam region declared as an and educational purpose is also been urban area. However we can find some observed. More over the governmental rural characters in this region. All the benefits like, provision of house sites, developmental activities like laying of free housing loans, free rice for roads, provision of sanitation etc in this B.P.L.people, very good water and region are being performed through continues power supply peaceful Public Works Department (P.W.D.) and atmosphere all these attracting the municipality. The reason for growing neighboring Andhra people to prefer urbanization as listed by Dr. Noronha Yanam region to settle. And as a result are educational, opportunities, medical the population of Yanam region has been facilities, availability of entertainment increasing at a faster rate. and better employment opportunities Berg opines that there is which exists in cities, are available in migration of people from rural to urban Yanam also. More over the governmental areas due to the following factors. benefits like, provision of house sites, free housing loans, free rice for 1. Intensity of preference of money B.P.L.people, very good water and income against leisure in the village. continues power supply peaceful 2. The level of his / her income from atmosphere all these attracting the village production. neighboring Andhra people to prefer Yanam region to settle. And as a result 3. The effort price of income earnable in the population of Yanam region has been the village and increasing at a faster rate. 4. The effort price of earnings outside CONCLUTION: the village. Growth of population in Yanam region Social, physical, demographic, has both positive and negative cultural and communication factors have consequences. It has been observed that been listed by Todaro for migration from people coming from the neighboring rural to urban areas. The desire of Andhra Pradesh and other regions are people to be away from traditional social

www.ijar.org.in 105 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 enjoying all the governmental benefits a faster rate, which is not ideal. Hence, more than the local people. The authorities should take all the necessary population growth in Yanam region is steps to check the rate of growth of not natural, and only one or two population in Yanam region. community’s population is increasing at REFERENCES Various Census reports of Yanam territory of India

Dr. K. Prasad has been working as an Assistant Professor in Economics, P.G. Department of Economics, Dr. S. R. K. Govt. Arts College-Yanam, and Pondicherry. He has more than 10 years of teaching experience. So far he published research papers in International and national level journals. He attended for national and international conferences/ seminars and Workshops and presented several papers

www.ijar.org.in 106 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

DYNAMICS OF PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT: AN ANALYSIS Dr. G.S. Rama Krishna, Associate Professor, Department of Management Studies, Dr.C.S. Rao P.G. Centre, Sri Y.N. College, Narsapur, West Godavari District. Andhra Pradesh. G. Samuel Mores, Asst Professor Department of Management Studies Dr.C.S.Rao P.G. Centre, Sri Y.N. College, Narsapur, West Godavari District. Andhra Pradesh

Abstract Performance management is concerned with outputs the achievement of results and with outcomes and the impact made on performance. The basic criteria for performance management are accountability, transparency, completeness, and equity. Different approaches to HR transformation drive different performance levels. HR leaders believe they are performing only adequately in implementing initiatives to support change. Transformation of performance practices can be done by clarifying strategy and priorities, set standards, design rewards and follow-up. Performance practices brings designed outcome into measurable goals and incentives that motivate people to reach the goals. Performance management is only the reliable tool available to the managers for effectively translating business strategies into firm performance, people being the key strategic resource. Key words: performance management, business strategies, accountability, transparency, completeness

Introduction and to creating business value through HR services that address a company’s Organizations must manage the most pressing strategic challenges. That flow of work from product or service means anticipating critical workforce demand through order fulfillment to trends, shaping, and executing business make sure their obligations are met. To strategy, identifying and addressing do so, they distribute goals to individuals people related risks and regulations, & groups and set up job & organizational enhancing workforce performance and structures to integrate the varied output productivity and offering new HR into cooperative whole. They design services to help a company improve and processes for the work itself and setup a grow. physical environment that promotes effective and efficient work. Human Performance has two concepts, Resource professionals are ideally suited such as performance as behavior and to assist in all aspects of this process as performance as outcomes. Performance well. means record of outcomes on specific job functions during a specific time period. HR transformation initially Performance management may be focused on making HR operations more defined as a systematic approach for efficient and effective through process improving individual and team standardization and technology. The performance in order to achieve next generation of HR transformation is organizational goals. Performance more tightly linked to corporate strategy

www.ijar.org.in 107 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 management is concerned with outputs – financial rewards means making the achievement of results; and with choices about these three types of outcomes – the impact made on income: short-term cash, incentive- performance. based cash, and long-term equity. Non-financial rewards are also an The basic criteria for performance important part of transforming management are accountability, performance management practices. transparency, completeness and equity. Accountability means that performance  The fourth step, follow-up both management practices should tie feedback on prior activities and individual & team behaviour and what Marshall Goldsmith admirably outcomes to clear goals. Transparency calls “feed forward” on what‘s means that financial and non-financial needed – is critical to performance. rewards are understood to public. Here are some of the choices in Completeness means that performance providing follow-up: chat informally, management practices cover the full supply data, let people draw their range of behaviours and goals required own conclusions, explain the why; for overall business success. Equity not what do it. means that those who produce more In transforming performance practices, receive more. When performance each of these four steps can be followed management practices are transformed and upgrade performance management. according to these criteria, they help With that line of sight, performance create value. management can make sure that people Transformation of performance understand what they need to do, how management practices can be done in they need to do it, and why they need to four steps. do it.  A first step in performance HR have the resources available management is to be clear about an to intervene in organizations that are organization’s strategy, performance struggling to meet performance priorities and what it is trying to expectations to help them develop skills accomplish. or redesign structures or processes so that they will be able to meet those  The second step, once strategy has expectations. HR professionals manage been clarified, standards and the time and energy of the people in the measures can be created that match organization in as focused a manner as the strategy. A simple test of the any other valuable and scarce resource. right performance management It does this by integrating all the standards is to set them with practices that influence how people customers or investors or both. allocate their time and energy at work.  The third step, when someone meets In influencing the contribution of the standards, both financial and non- organization’s assets, HR practices financial rewards should follow. As results are based on synergy: the whole Bruce Ellig points out, financial must be more than the parts. rewards have economic, psychic & Transforming HR practices is about social implications and the more than simply making incremental importance of each is different for improvements to each one. HR practices every employee. Transforming

www.ijar.org.in 108 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 had a measurable positive impact on process internal organizational process business performance because the consultancy. business leaders and employees were HR transformation continues to thrilled to have HR support after living focus on rules-based processes, and that with no HR for so long. Transformation may be unlikely to change soon. of HR should not occur in isolation. Different approaches to HR Outsourcing of HR transformation drive different performance levels. The disparity in The organizations that correlating expected with actual cost predominantly outsource report realizing savings is a concern for organizations the highest cost savings as a result of undertaking transformation. While there their transformation. However, most is widespread belief that transformation organizations - regardless of impacts HR’s ability to focus on strategic transformation strategy - report a goals. Transformation is not driving real disparity in expected versus actual cost change retained HR staff function, savings, which is worrisome given the Which is surprising since it could be amount of due diligence applied to considered a core competency of HR. HR establishing a transformation program, leaders believe they are performing only as well as the implementation of service- adequately in implementing initiatives level contracts; one would expect these to support change. efforts to drive greater correlation between expectation and outcome. Performance culture Outsourcing transactional HR work Performance culture is about creating a enables HR professionals to focus on culture that measures rewards more strategic work. Thus, outsourcing performance and results. In the increases the likelihood that HR marketing arena, product managers professionals will become more strategic know that 80 percent of their profit in thought and action. HR is facing new comes from the top 20 percent of their challenges because on the one hand products. The same principle and ratio several HR practices are being can be argued when considering people outsourced, and on the other hand, all management issues. HR must prioritize line managers are being oriented to HR, its time, services and focus on the tasks so that they take over most of the HR and initiatives with the highest impact, work. while limiting the time it spends on low HRM is at fork of the road-either to performers. Instead of rewarding effort continue as a peripheral service function, past loyalty and seniority, HR must or to become a strategic business partner ensure that all people initiative and and organizational process consultant- activities focus on measuring and facilitator. To play the latter role, HRM rewarding business results. needs to do the following: Reposition If organizations are truly serious HRM functions to make them more about this, then HR must push to ensure human develop HR systems help in that the staff is trained in performance decision about in-sourcing, out-sourcing management techniques. This means and open-sourcing of HR functions imparting a thorough knowledge of the facilitate implementation of the HR processes involved and providing them systems provide internal organizational with the capabilities to coach and mentor

www.ijar.org.in 109 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 better performance from employees. Line  Among the most important issues managers need to take complete ranked were leadership development responsibility for this critical process, as and succession planning, HR HR exists to provide guidance. HRM can technology, workforce planning, transform the organization into a human executive compensation and system by developing their commitment, diversity, respectively. integrating the individual employees  Climate of trust, equity and with the organizational culture and involvement change management, through processes achieving including mergers and acquisitions performance. leadership. Transformation of the HR function  Ethics and social responsibility. The field of HRM has been  Reward system. undergoing a dramatic change. Driving its transformation as such factors as  Work organizations must place HR at competition, globalization, technological very high level, including their innovations and market evolution. The boards, and make demands on HR as present scenario unprecedented changes the strategic function. in the HR functions. This radical These developments produce a transformation of HR function has been transformation in the management of instigated by a complex nexus of forces: human resources, in which MNCs play pressures to reduce costs, higher the catalyst role. expectations of customers, the constant drive to meet global competitive Transformation Strategy and HRM challenges and opportunities offered by At the level of the firms, privatized advancements in information technology. enterprise must be transformed into The mix of these forces accelerates the “high performance organizations”. They transformation of the HR function in involve a difficult, long-run cultural ways not envisioned a decade ago. change within the firm, a change in the Changing resource functions as direct whole approach to management, its internet-based shifting increases and development to a new level. The line managers develop their recruiting government, employer’s organizations skills. If HR professionals are to survive and trade unions can significantly and prosper under the new agenda, contribute to this transformation. individual behavioural and attitudinal Companies began to look at ways to change must start now. HRM itself has revamp their HR departments. The role changed over a period of time though of business partners has been subject to “Peace, Stability and Growth” remained a wide range of interpretations. Some the focal points and in their importance. companies have chosen to appoint The transformational functions of HR hundreds of them; others have appointed will include the following: HR people just a few. One large organisati8on with must pursue these. 60,000 employees has 350; another, with some 50,000 employees, has just two. A  Talent management; searching, 2004 study of 20 American companies by nurturing, mentoring. price water house Cooper’s Saratoga institute found a median ratio of one Hr

www.ijar.org.in 110 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 business partner for every 1,000 Dinesh K Srivastava, 2005 Strategies for employees. Performance Management, Excel books, New Delhi. Conclusion Frances Neale, 2005, Handbook of The first step in performance Performance Management, Jaico management is to be clear about an Publishing House, Mumbai. organizational strategy, performance priorities to accomplish. Transformation G.K.Suri, C.S.Venkata Ratnam, of performance practices can be done by N.K.Gupta, 2004, Performance clarifying strategy and priorities, set Measurement and Management, Excel standards, design rewards and follow-up. books, New Delhi. Performance practices brings designed Kurt Verweire and Lutgart Van den outcome into measurable goals and Berghe,2005, Integrated Performance incentives that motivate people to reach Management, Sage Publications, New the goals. Delhi. Performance management is an Losey M, Ulrich, D and Meisinger, S., approach to managing human resources 2005, “The Future of Human Resource which is designed to tie HR polices Management: 64 Thought Leaders securely into a framework of achieving Explore the Critical HR Issues of Today the strategic goals of the business. and Tomorrow” , John Wiley & Sons. Performance management is only the reliable tool available to the managers Robert L.Cardy, 2004, Performance for effectively translating business Management, Prientice-Hall of India strategies into firm performance, people Pvt,Ltd., New Delhi. being the key strategic resource. R.K.Sahu, 2007, Performance HR transformation comes from the Management, Excel Books, New Delhi. context of business and from the T.V.Rao,2010, “Transforming Human expectations of stakeholders. Where they Resource Management”, Presentation for identify which capabilities are most GITAM University International critical to their organizations future Conference, Visakhapatnam. success. Re-designing HR means understanding what work is strategic Ulrich, D.,1997, “Human Resource and what work is transitional. In Champions: The Next Agenda for Adding transforming HR professionals, the first Value and Delivering Results”, Harvard step is to be clear about what is expected Business School Press. for success in the field, by considering William J.Rothwell, Robert K.Prescott HR roles and HR activities. and Maria W.Taylor., 2008, Human Reference Resource Transformation, Davies- Black Publishing, California. A.M.Sarma, 2009, Performance Management System, Himalaya www.TransformHR.com Publishing House, Mumbai.

www.ijar.org.in 111 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

ENHANCING STUDENTS’ GRAMMAR BY USING GAMES: A PRACTICAL CLASSROOM EXPERIENCE

Dr. B. V. Srinivas Rao, Faculty Member of English, Jawahar Navodaya Vidyalaya, Peddapuram E.G.Dt Abstract Why teach students English grammar with games? Research is showing that this is an excellent way to do it. What kind of games work best? This article answers those questions and is written/or those teaching English as a second language to students. Key words: English games, classroom, language keep the students interested in class (i.e. through fun English games), they will There are many ways to teach also find that they are interested in the ESL/ TEFL to the students but one of topic - and will often absorb and retain the exciting and rewarding ways to do it more knowledge than if they are simply is by using language (English) games. studying to pass a test or complete an (Language) Games not only engage the assignment. students, but also teach through play and most of the time the students don't Games make teaching lively and even know they are learning until the vigour. While having language practice time comes to show their knowledge! It to a great extent, the students have fun truly is possible (and almost necessary) and joy out of the language games. Thus, to create a classroom where the students language teaching has been made more not only learn but also truly enjoy their of a pleasure, than boredom. These time there. games are for a class, a group, and even for an individual. These can be used in Incorporating English games vocabulary, spelling, sentence structures into the classroom can build interest in and pronunciation. the class, put language in an interesting and meaningful context, give students a Games in the language break from the pressures of learning a classroom help to involve learners new language while giving the break a actively in the learning process. They purpose, teach real word skills and, most provide a challenge, which encourages importantly, build the student/ teacher learners to stretch themselves (in order bond. to win). Most games in involve learners in practicing the language they have While many of us might not like studied and in trying to use it to admit it, many students don't meaningfully. It also helps learners to necessarily like the idea of being in our forget they are studying. They lose classes to learn a new language. Even themselves in the fun of the game and more, as teachers we all know that even the activity motivates them. Language the most attentive students can get games encourage collaborative learning. bored and lose focus on occasion. Team games require pooling of Incorporating English games is a great knowledge; pair games require co- way to get out of the rut of language operation and turn taking. Students can drills, worksheets, boring repetition and learn from one another. A good reader individual study. If you can find ways to with a proficient speaker can combine

www.ijar.org.in 112 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 skills to make a winning team. Besides Stick to basic card games, keep to one this, it provides variety of pace. Games topic for a game or try and adapt local can be short, long and can involve games to which everyone knows the writing, speaking, listening or reading. rules. They are excellent for motivating Don't explain the game -demonstrate it. students whose attention is wandering. Always have a trial run before starting Lastly, language games give extra the game proper and you play a team practice without inducing boredom. member in the rehearsal. Many games involve repetition of the same language over and over again. In Don't let games drag on too long. normal circumstances this would look Set time limits for answering questions artificial and be demonstrating. (e. g. buzzer, a bell, a whistle or a slow Repetition is necessary for count down from five when time is up - fluency, yet there is nothing more these theatrical bits also make the game meaningless than repetition in a void. If fun for all learners). you ask your class to keep repeating * Try to use games where there is more words back at you they'll start feeling than one winner. like parrots. Also, if you want the students to practice conversation you Everyone then feels they stand a chance have a few options. The problem with of winning and is more willing to try. most options is that the class is either Games must seem achievable in order to practicing this real life usage in small appeal to learners. groups that don't have you there to *Assess the learning value of a game. observe and offer assistance or much of Some games might be fun to play but are the class is left to work on their own all the students involved? Are they all while you have a conversation with one using language or hearing language or two pupils at a time. English games again? solve this because they allow you to engage the entire class in activities that *Consider very carefully the language require practical use. When students needed to play the game. What will the learning ESL get this meaningful and students have to say to each other to contextual practice, the language guess a person's card? Try the game with becomes more vivid in their minds and a friend or play it through in your head. they are better able to remember what Does it activate the language you want they've learned and used. to practice? Have students got the necessary vocabulary to play it successfully? Before starting the language *Balance the types of games you use. games we need to know how to manage Vary whole class games with card games the games in the classroom. Some tips of in pairs, noisy team games, and game management are given below: concentration games for calming down Management of Games: an over-excited class. ♦ The rules have to be as clear as *Don't overuse games. Games are a possible. Complicated scoring and long motivator but lose their challenge and lists of rules can draw the focus of the interest if they become an everyday lesson away from using language games.

www.ijar.org.in 113 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 routine. They need to be seen as a This being language class pupils special moment. learn the language through games. They can also learn language by singing, Keeping in mind the dancing, painting, reading, making toys, management of games following cutting paper, hanging pictures, language games can be implemented arranging displays, cleaning and in the language classrooms: dusting, sending and receiving things/ Listen and Act: Some physical activity is objects/messages, drawing as best as given here. Assume these postures or they can. They may also be called the movements. situational use of language. *Stand up, sit down, run, stop, skip, hop, Dialogues, songs, rhymes and jump, walk, listen, fall in line, stand face slogans can also be used in language to face, hands up, bend forward, now learning-cum-games. backward, sideways, rest. Guessing Games: *Teacher: Come here, stop, sit down, ♦ Guess the Picture: The teacher stand up, run, jump, hop, walk, skip, possesses a set of Flash Cards with make a line, turn to your left, to right, pictures of clothes, food, activities and rest. places. He/she selects one card, and *The teacher must demonstrate these without showing it to the students, asks movements himself/ herself. If possible them to guess what it is. The pupils some musical rhymes will very much guess one by one. help the movements. Young students Teacher: Guess how I went to market? will enjoy moving to music. When some pupils get used to these commands, later Pupil -1: Did you go by car? on having a practice, and finally acting Pupil -2: Did you go by bus? as models, may take the place of the teacher. Pupil -3: Did you walk? *Teacher: Sunil, jump please; Avtar, Like this pupils go on asking about walk please; Rajiv, run please; Gauri various possibilities, till at last they are skip please. able to guess the right object. *Let more confident students now give ♦Guess the sentence: Here the teacher simple commands to the class, or to a has to write down a sentence on a sheet small group. of paper. He/ she writes the structure or pattern of the same on the blackboard, e. *The class can be divided into two or g. J went (where) to (do something). Now three groups. They can be made to sit in guess it. Pupils must guess the extra two-three columns. They can now be sentence by asking questions, e. g. made to play 'relay games in turns. The teacher gives the commands like 'run', Pupil-1 : Did you go to the fair? 'hop', 'jump', 'skip'. One student performs Teacher : No. and gives the end of his line and takes a seat there. The pupil before him now Pupil-2 : Did you go to the playground? takes his turn, and so on….. These Teacher : No. relay games are of many more types. Pupil-3 : Did you go to the library?

www.ijar.org.in 114 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Teacher : Yes. Teacher: Birds. Pupil : (Guessing correctly) “I went to Team-A: Are these birds flying to their the library to return the book.” nests? Riddle: The teacher gives a few hints Team-B: No. They are flying towards about an article or an individual and fields, where grain is being harvested. then asks the students to make a guess. Team-A: How can you say that? For example, he says, “I am a source of all knowledge. I am having some other Team-B: The sun is rising in the sky, brothers also. I remain locked-up. I am behind the fields ....etc. very costly. But I am useful. What is my ♦ Picture Memory: The teacher brings name?” The answer is an encyclopedia. some pictures, which the pupils have not Students can be encouraged to make seen earlier. He/ she show the pictures their own riddles in this game. only for a short while, one by one. Then Oral Composition Games: he/ she asks questions on them. He/ she make two teams, and they answer by □ Story Telling: The teacher starts the turns. The team answering more story by giving the first sentence. He questions wins. explains that each one of them has to take a turn, and add a new sentence. ♦ More Questions More Marks: The story begins like this: The class is divided into two groups of Teacher: One day an old woman, while six pupils each. The teacher writes down coming back from the field, after an imaginative sentence on the class working there, felt very tired. board, “It was a good journey”, and asks the groups, to think of any number of Student-1: She felt very thirsty, but questions, and dictate them to the class there was no water, to be found. secretary say within a time limit of 15 Student-2: A boy saw the old woman and minutes. The group with a bigger asked if she wanted water... etc. number of correct questions is the winner. A student acts as secretary, and records all that is said. When the last sentence is Card games: also said and recorded, the student ♦ Alphabet Cards: students may be secretary reads the story before the asked to prepare alphabet cards. After whole class. these are ready, these may be mixed up. ♦ Question and Answer: The teacher Then the students can be asked to make shows a picture from his conversational their own wall pictures, and makes two teams names, out of these cards. After the (Team-A & Team-B) of students. One names, the teacher may ask them to will be asking questions, the other will arrange the cards forming a few words: give answers. He/she tells them that he places, fruits, bird's food, persons, etc. would ask them to talk about some call • Address Card: Every learner should words. One team will ask questions, the make his/her address card. Address other will give answers, on these call cards of the school, railway station, words. He/she starts, by mentioning call market, temple, post office, etc. can also words from the pictures shown. be made. Then they are asked to mix

www.ijar.org.in 115 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 them up. After mixing, find out your painful, however. You can teach English address card, etc... grammar using fun learning games and before you know it your students will be ♦ Name Cards: (i) Let every child make a more than willing. How it works, you name card. Collect all of them. Now ask ask. Well, there has been a movement them to pick out the names of their away from the traditional methods of friends from the bunch. This activity will teaching English grammar through encourage reading and fixation of writing, rewriting and worksheets to alphabets in their minds. This is 'Read using a more active approach through the Name Game'. The same game may games. also be played a bit separately like, (ii) one child is asked to pick up 4-5 cards References: and place each one in front of the 1. http://www.buzzle.com/articles/how particular pupil, whose name is in it. -teaching-with-english-games- The game is 'Who is who'? helps- students -learn/ / In the same way activities like, 2. Doff, Adrian: (2002). Teach English: Labeling, Map-Making, Flash-cards, A training course for Pictures and Labels (Matching), teaching,Cambridge University Preparing Folders, Albums, Charts, Press. Maps, etc. can also be tried in the class, as well as in Projects or Assignments, to 3. Lavery, Clare: (2001), Language be taken up by either the individual Assistant, The British Council. learners or their groups. These are some 4. Kohli, A.L.: Sharma. L.M.; (2000). language games or activities. Techniques of Teaching English in the new Millennium, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company. Teaching English grammar can be hard going - for teachers and the students. It doesn't have to be difficult or

Dr. B. V. Srinivas Rao has been working as a Faculty Member of English. He has more than 20 yrs of Teaching experience. He got PhD in English in 2003 from Rani Durgavathi University, Jabalpur, Madya Pradesh. He got appreciation letter for Best performance in CBSE in 2013 by Ministry of HRD. He attended for six content enrichment programmes conducted by Navodaya Vidyalaya Samiti, Ministry of HRD, New Delhi.

www.ijar.org.in 116 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

THE GLASS PALACE – A MULTIGENERATIONAL SAGA

Dr.M. Nageswara Rao, Lecturer in English, Sri Y.N. College (A), NARSAPUR, W.G.Dt., A.P., India. Abstract: Amitav Ghosh is one of the well-known Indian novelists who has attempted to write a history of their times through the imaginative form of fiction. His novel The Glass Palace has a range and sweep not easily matched in Indian English fiction. It is a story of three generations. The Glass Palace educates its reader to interpret its narrative as a historical narrative. Before entering the story world proper, history is fore grounded. Key words: Glass Palace, Character, Quit India movement

Introduction The Glass Palace is a narrative that gravitates around the Amitav Ghosh is one of the well- experiences of a variety of known Indian novelists who has multigenerational, diasporic attempted to write a history of their Indian/Burmese characters during a times through the imaginative form of historical period (the late 19th century fiction. His novel The Glass Palace to the end of the 20th) filled with has a range and sweep not easily battles won and lost over Burma's matched in Indian English fiction. It is territories; it is a novel that reflects a story of three generations. It is obliquely the great tectonic shifts that structured around the intermeshing took place in changes of rule and relationships among four families: the national policy that effect the Burmese King Thebaw and Queen everyday of its character's lives. As Supayalat who were deposed by the such, The Glass Palace's characters, British in 1885 and were exiled to plot, and events can open its reader's Ratnagiri in India and their eyes to acts of forced displacement and entourage; Rajkumar Raha, a Bengali even genocides of peoples that took orphan emigrant to Burma, and his place historically; it can re-visit grand descendants; Saya John, a foundling historical events from different brought up by Catholic priests, and perspectives, such as that of Ghandi's his son Matthew and his family; and attempt at a social revolution seen Uma, the wife of the Collector of from the angle of vision of the female Ratnagiri. Their fortunes are set character, Uma. It can act as a against a backdrop of stirring creative response to and a reflection of historical events—the British experience in this world by a process conquest of Burma, the consolidation of empathy with the characters and of the Empire in India and Malaya, their circumstances and changing the First and Second World Wars— fortunes. But, of course, The Glass conceived and executed on an epic Palace is not a symbolic scale, in a time frame ranging from representation of nation nor is it an 1885 to 1996. expression of the "real" experiences of The Glass Palace: narrative real people (rich and poor) during such a tempestuous historical period in Burma.

www.ijar.org.in 117 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

The Glass Palace is chock full They are, as Dorit Cohn of hyphenated (Burmese-Indian, remarks, "equally inhabitants of the Anglo-Indian, for example) characters same conflicted fictional world". And who seek a sense of place and those disciplinary spaces--colonialism, belonging--a home--within homelands capitalism and otherwise--in The torn apart by colonialist and Glass Palace are only representations imperialist invasions and civil wars. and not the real disciplinary spaces It is a novel whose story stretches out where the powerful rule over the from and around the experiences of powerless in the real world. Finally, South Asian hybrid characters as language–the very substance of The grand historical events of nation Glass Palace-- has, as Lubomîr Dolezel unfold. In a review of The Glass aptly reminds, "weak per formative Palace Chris Higashi calls the novel "a power". Namely, while it can help multigenerational saga" that "is a solidify a group and communicate its wonderful, satisfying blend of history needs to bring about changes in and storytelling". everyday social relations and affairs, as Dolezel continues, "it cannot create Glass Palace: historically verifiable the actual world that exists and goes details on independently of language and any The Glass Palace packed with other representation. The only kind of historically verifiable details, such as worlds that human language is colonial India's invasion of Burma, capable of creating or producing is and announces dates in chapter possible worlds". That is, The Glass headings to remind of the plot's Palace is the stuff of fiction that can imbrication with historical open eyes to the brutalities of (neo) chronology. However, its thematic colonialism--and more--and not a text material is carefully organized that can resist, intervene, and/or according to the principles that govern fundamentally transform anything, the crafting of fiction: language, much less the everyday reality of narrative technique, and genre. millions of people living within a Contrary to what many national space shaped by history and poststructuralist post colonialists governed by laws. venture to say, even at the most basic The fictional Rajkumar can understanding, the biographically fall in love with the invented verifiable author Amitav Ghosh does handmaiden pointing to the real not correspond one-to-one with the historical figure Queen Supayalat. fictional characters he invents nor the And, as the narrative unfolds, the narrator he employs to shape the reader witnesses such a "real" figure narrative. Nor, for that matter, do his as the Queen increasingly migrate characters represent real people. over into, as Dolezel identifies, the Characters are not, as Dorit Cohn "semantic and pragmatic conditions of comments, "free subjects who can the fictional environment". The force potentially escape their graphic prison of fictional narrative is such that it and make fictional subjects of--or even pulls the factual characters into its talk back to--their author or world without asking its readers to narrator". question such a move; without asking its readers to look beyond its pages for

www.ijar.org.in 118 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 a one-to-one verification between conventions found in historical textual representation and an narratives, here the third-person ontologically independent and announces its omniscience-- temporally prior set of events-- commenting on a character's knowing archived data--that existed prior to what the sound was that rolled across the act of writing. the plain and also having a knowledge of this character's unreliability--and The Glass Palace educates its quickly shows its deft control over reader to interpret its narrative as a media, flow of information. historical narrative. Before entering the storyworld proper, history is foregrounded. The following titles appear as paratextual preface material: W.S. Desai's Deposed King Ghosh and the character, Rajkumar Thebaw of Burma in India, 1885-1916, To solidify the privileging of Patricia Herbert's The Hsaya San fiction over fact in the reader's mind, rebellion Reappraised, and Majjhima Ghosh's narrator spends the first Nikaya and Amyutta Nikaya three pages of the novel breathing life collection, The Buddhist Tradition in into the invented character, India, China and Japan. Verifiable Rajkumar. The narrator does not historical figures and events as well as introduce the "real" historical figures dates and cultural document begin to King Thebaw and Queen Supayalat condition the reader's approach to the until after he has introduced text--a text situated within the Rajkumar. Once this is done, the historically and culturally verifiable. story of the historical figures (whom, The list of texts identifiable as after the British invasion of Burma, historical and cultural document is far experience life as dispossessed exiles from exhaustive, however. And given in India) becomes increasingly the discrepancy between the length of fictionalised as it becomes interwoven The Glass Palace and this short list of into the lives of the fictional archival material, the reader quickly characters and their stories. Fiction grasps that narrative fiction is central overwhelms fact as the reader and that the narrative which has a submerges into the story of one-to-one correspondence with Rajkumar's Horatio Alger rise to historical record is subordinate to the monetary glory, his romancing of the purposes of the fictional story-telling. queen's handmaiden, Dolly, and the This paratextual frame helps pave the subsequent adventures and romances way for a reader's first encounter with of their sons: the naive photographer the text itself. The narrative begins: Dinu and the pragmatic materialist "There was only one person in the Neele. Within this world the reader food-stall who knew exactly what that also meets the character Arjun, an sound was that was rolling across the Indian soldier fighting for the British plain, along the silver curve of the army, but who realises that his use of Irrawaddy, to the western wall of British-isms like "yaar" and "spiffing" Mandalay's fort. His name was simply mask his own complicity in the Rajkumar and he was an Indian, a boy oppression of South Asian people. And of eleven--not an authority to be relied the reader encounters the politically upon" (3). Unlike the narrative

www.ijar.org.in 119 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 active character, Uma, whose character's interiority. For example, it adventures in India opens the reader's is not until the Japanese Inspired eyes to India's early 20th-century Fifth Columnists (JIF) defeat the campaigns for independence. British army in Burma (historically verifiable) that the character Arjun has his epiphany, realising his own The verifiable historical event complicity with colonialism. And, on that percolates through the fictional other occasions, historical event clears narrative functions not just to open the space for a character to speak reader's eyes to, say, Ghandi's 1942 critically about the world. For Quit India movement, but as part of example, when the character Uma Ghosh's tool box for creating a talks to Dinu about Hitler and dramatic narrative that engages the Mussolini, the reader learns that such reader. For example, when the fascist dictatorships have already been Japanese invade Burma, it cuts short a lived reality for Indians since the the deeply moving romance between British conquest: "How many tens of sympathetic characters Dinu and millions of people have perished in the Alice, causing the reader's emotions to process of the Empire's conquest of the surge. Historical event also acts as a world--in its appropriation of entire springboard for a creative continents?" (294). Finally, the reinterpretation of history. While the presence of History as discipline gives real British invasion of Burma was shape to a third-generation character, the violent act of imposing a brutally Jaya, who studies history and "the oppressive colonial regime through huge collection of the documents and much shedding of innocent blood, in papers that Uma had left her, in her the world of the novel it can be this will" (494) to make her life and the and also the seed-event that later world better. leads to the love story that follows the Conclusion Burmese princesses and their love affairs with those of a lower caste: The Thus Amitav Ghosh weaves First Princess falls in love with the the story The Glass Palace with Royal family's former coachman, multigenerational characters of three Sawant, and the Second Princesses interlinked parts of the British elopes with " a Burmese commoner" Empire – Burma, Malaya and India. (204) so that the historically verifiable REFERENCES: events such as the mention of the British imperial fleet crossing the Ghosh, Amitav. The Glass Palace. Indian/Burma border "on 14 New Delhi: Ravi Dayal, 2000. November, 1885" (25) or the mention Loomba, Ania. “Colonialism/Post of the 1942 Japanese bombing of Colonialism”. London: Routledge, Rangoon become kernel-events that 1998. seed new plots or turn stories into different directions. Mahadevan, Kanchan. “Colonial Modernity: A Critique”. Indian Literature 194. Historical event can give cause for deep psychological probing of a

www.ijar.org.in 120 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Naik, M.K. “A History of Indian Delhi: The Indian Association for English Literature”. New Delhi: English Studies Pub., 1991. Sahitya Academi, 1980, p.274. Said, Edward. “Culture and Panikar, Ayyappa K. Indian English Imperialism”. London: Vintage, 1994. Literature Since Independence. New

Dr.M. Nageswara Rao has been working as Lecturer in English, Sri Y.N.College (A), Narsapur. He has more than 2 years of teaching experience in English. He presented several papers in State and National level Seminars. He attended workshops also. He wrote several articles that were published in famous National and International Journals.

www.ijar.org.in 121 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

TERMITES DESTROYING STRUCTURAL WOOD ON COST BASIS IN HYDERABAD URBAN SYSTEM

DR.S.VENKATA RAMA RAJU, H.No. 15-142/1/G7,Sahithi Nest Apartment, P&T Colony, Dilsukhnagar, Hyderabad-500060

ABSTRACT Survey was conducted on the Termites destroying structural wood during the year 2009-2011 in Hyderabad (Urban) of Andhra Pradesh. The results indicated that the cost of treatment of damage to structural wood in terms of repair in the Urban systems caused by different species of termite were recorded. The cost of treatment of damage exceed (5) five lakhs. Among the O. colonics caused the maximum loss in the urban system which was nearly one lakh in RCC which is maximum, while minimum loss was caused by M.obesi in both RCC and T.R.Houses. KEY WORDS: Termite, Urban System, Treatment cost

INTRODUCTION: expenditure associated with termite damage and control in the United States Urban areas represent was estimated at $ 100 million to 4.4 increasingly large and interconnected billion annually according to the earlier spaces in regional landscapes and are reports Lund (1967), Ebeling (1968), important for the spread of exotic based on prevention, control and repairs species. Urban centers are the origin of costs, Williams and Smith (1978) commercial transport for a wide variety estimated that $ 169 million was being of material including forest and spent by consumers in USA in 1976. In agricultural products. Urban areas are California subterraneous and dry wood characterized by a wide spread termites are responsible for 95% of all destruction of a great deal of native costs resulting from wood destroying vegetation thus affecting biotic insects. In addition to this structural components of the environment, which wood is forcing more and more termites has led to the formation of many to search for wood buildings. habitats through modifying the existing ones particularly with regard to insects. With the increasing demand in developed as well as developing Economically the damage countries the cost of timber for termites cause to structures and construction has also increased largely buildings accounts for more than US 20 because of difficulty in getting timber billion annually worldwide (S4-02) from the inaccessible remote areas. The .Termites cause substantial damage to economics of situation must be residential and commercial buildings in considered carefully. People living in the United States. It has been estimated termite infested areas must now decide that the cost for controlling termites and whether to bear the cost of expensive fixing the damage caused by them in the wood or total replacement of wood after United States alone exceeds 2 - 3 billion the termite infestation or to bear the cost dollars annually. The monetary

www.ijar.org.in 122 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 of chemical treatment to protect the concerned were requested for their co- ‘structural – wood’ from termites. They operation and required to provide may also have to consider whether they information regarding the termite will be able to obtain sufficient timber damage in their houses/offices. The for building a new house, if they allow indoor wood-works such as doors, termites to ruin their present frames, window panels, sashes, joists, establishments. Thus, in-depth research rafters and well supporting, door and about diversity of termites destroying window supporting frames of Tile- structural wood works in urban areas is Roofed houses were inspected for very much needed. damage. Other cellulose materials such as books in libraries, wooden almirhas in At the outset a brief description government offices and banks including of the study areas of Hyderabad Urban clothes used for wrapping the files in the system and their environmental offices and schools in all the two types of conditions are studied. The diversity of houses were also inspected for the signs termite fauna attacking different of termite activity. The earthen-sheet structural - wood in different types of covering, runways (shelter tubes) and houses such as those made of Reinforced small channeled holes on the wood works Cement Concrete (RCC) and those made made by the termite’s activity and of Tile-Roofed (TR), in different damage were examined rending and management of houses such as school exposing the interior portion using a buildings, banks, Government office sharp chisel. The presence of small buildings and Libraries in the Urban mounds on the inner and outer walls and Systems, and the types of damage on the roof particularly on the top of the incurred to the indoor - wood works and walls of these houses was also noted. to termites on structural wood in relation to various climatic factors such As the subterranean termites usually rainfall, temperature and relative enter the houses through the cracks in humidity are also described. foundations, floors and walls they spread runways up to the structural wood MATERIAL AND METHODS: (Johnson, 1981), such types of cracks Extensive surveys were either in foundation or floor or walls of conducted periodically during January houses were also inspected. The termites 2009 to April 2011, which includes particularly the soldiers and workers regular monthly surveys followed by the damaging the articles were collected in keen observation of termite damage to 80% ethanol for species identification. different types of structural wood in The intensities of the damage and Reinforced Cement Concrete (RCC) deterioration were assessed by eye houses and Tile-Roofed (TR) houses quantified on the basis of five damage present in various localities of classes (Williams, 1973) and recorded. It Hyderabad (urban system). A total of has been the usual evaluation method 120 houses such a Government School for field tests of wood samples. The five Buildings, Libraries, Banks and damage classes of structural wood were Government office Buildings were given numerical symbols as follows. inspected on a monthly basis in the entire urban system, selecting few (i) ‘O’ no attack standard houses of each type in a given locality. The house owners/persons

www.ijar.org.in 123 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

(ii) + a very less attack exploratory (Hagen), Microtermes obesi (Holmgren) nibbles (10% damage) were recorded. Of all these termites Odontotermes ceylonicues, and (iii) + + Slight attack with the wood Odontotermes redemanni were recorded remaining serviceable (10% to 25% causing maximum damage and damage) Odontotermes wallonensis,Odontotermes (iv) + + + moderate attack with brunneus and Microtermes obesi wood rendered unserviceable (25% to causing minor damage to the structural 50% damage) wood of different types of houses. (v) + + ++ heavy attack with the wood rendered useless for any structural Approximate cost of damage to purposes (50 to 75% damage) structural wood in terms of damaged RESULTS AND DISCUSSION: wood repair cost in the urban system by different species of termite presented in Various species of termites recorded Table (1) revealed that the total cost of within the limits of Hyderabad Urban the damage exceeded (5) five lacs, among system they belonged to one family the termites Odontotermes ceylonicues Termitidae. caused the maximum loss in the urban In Termitidae, Odontotermes ceylonicues system which was nearly two lacs in (Holmgren) Odontotermes redemanni Tile-Roofed houses maximum, while (Wasmann),Odontotermes wallonensis minimum loss was caused by (Wasmann) Odontotermes brunneus Microtermes obesi in Tile-Roofed houses.

Table-1: Approximate cost of damage caused by termites (Wood damage and repair cost) in Hyderabad Urban System. RCC houses TR Total Species houses Rupees Odontotermes ceylonicus 1,06,500 1,82,500 2,89,000 Odontotermes 58,650 98,450 1,57,100 redemanni Odontotermes 38,500 48,500 87,000 wallonensis Odontotermes brunneus 10,500 -- 10,500 Microtermes obesi -- 8,500 8,500 Total 2,14,150 3,37,950 5,52,100

www.ijar.org.in 124 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Cost of termite damaged in rupees References: EBELING, W., (1968) Termites: LUND, A.E., (1967) The study of Identification, biology, and control of subterranean termites a laboratory and termites attacking buildings. University file Approach 17th Annual Convocation California Agricultural Exp. Serv. of British Wood Preservation Man., PP- 38:74. Association 1967: 119 - 127. FRANK, G.W. EHLER, LE., (1978) STEARNS, F.W. MANTAG ., (1974) The Ecology of insects in urban environment Urban ecosystems. Stroudsburg.PP-36. Annual Revision, WILLIAMS, L.H. AND SMITH., (1978) Entomology 23, 367-387. Estimated losses by wood products GEORGE, C.J. AND MCKING D., (1974) insects during 1970 for single - family Urban Ecology. Ir: Search of an Asphalt dwellings in 11 south eastern states research. New york, Mc Graw Hill 181 U.S.Dept.Agric. Fer. Serv. Res. Pap. 50- pp. 145, pp.

Dr.S.Venkata Rama Raju has been working as a faculty member in Biology and having more than 25 years of teaching experience. He attended for several conferences/seminars and submitted papers. He got National and state level Best Teacher Awards and Paryavarnamitra Award. He wrote text book for students in Biology and published articles in International and national Journals. He also attended several training programmes of his concerned.

www.ijar.org.in 125 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

AN OVERVIEW ON THE CHILD LABOUR

K. Suresh Kumar, Senior Lecturer, CR College, Chilakaluripet, Guntur dist. Abstract: An attempt is made in this chapter to understand various aspects of child labour. It gives an overview on the definition, magnitude, causes and various prospects of child labour have also covered. Key words: child labour, slavery, freedom, human rights, ILO

The concept of child labour of child labour as they are especially harmful, morally reprehensible, and Child labour is defined in ILO they violate the child’s freedom and Conventions. It is work that children human rights. Child labour tends to be should not be doing because they are too concentrated in the informal sector of young to work, or – if they are old the economy. For some work, children enough to work – because it is dangerous receive no payment, only food and a or otherwise unsuitable for them. Not all place to sleep. Children in informal work done by children should be sector work receive no payment if they classified as child labour that is to be are injured or become ill, and can seek targeted for elimination. Children’s or no protection if they suffer violence or adolescents’ participation in work that are maltreated by their employer. does not affect their health and personal development or interfere with their What Causes Child Labour Today education is generally regarded as being Poverty is widely considered the top something positive. Whether or not reason that children work at jobs that particular forms of “work” can be called are exploitative and inappropriate for “child labour” depends on the child’s age, their ages. But there are other reasons the type and hours of work performed as well -- not necessarily in this order: and the conditions under which it is performed, as set out in the ILO  family expectations and traditions Conventions.  abuse of the child There are many forms of child labour  lack of good schools and day care worldwide. Children are engaged in agricultural labour, in mining, in  lack of other services, such manufacturing, in domestic service, as health care types of construction, scavenging and  public opinion that downplays the begging on the streets. Others are risk of early work for children trapped in forms of slavery in armed conflicts, forced labour and debt bondage  uncaring attitudes of employers (to pay off debts incurred by parents and  limited choices for women grandparents) as well as in commercial sexual exploitation and illicit activities, "The parents of child labourers are often such as drug trafficking and organized unemployed or underemployed, begging and in many other forms of desperate for secure employment and labour. Many of these are “worst forms” income. Yet it is their children - more

www.ijar.org.in 126 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 powerless and paid less - who are offered that smallholder plots of land are labour- the jobs." In other words, says UNICEF intensively farmed since small plots in their 1997 "Roots of child labour" cannot productively afford expensive report, children are employed because farming equipment. In these cases, a they are easier to exploit. means to increase output from the small plot has been to apply more labour, Other factors that contribute to including child labour instances of child labour include: limited access to compulsory, free education; Srivastava describes bonded child labour irregular monitoring and weak as a system of forced, or partly forced, enforcement of relevant laws; local laws labour under which the child, or usually that include a lot of exemptions; child's parent enter into an agreement, globalisation and an emphasis on low oral or written, with a creditor. The child labour costs; and inability to uphold performs work as in-kind repayment of workers' and child rights. credit. In this 2005 ILO report, Srivastava claims debt-bondage in India Between boys and girls, UNICEF finds emerged during the colonial period, as a girls are two times more likely to be out means to obtain reliable cheap labour, of school and working in a domestic role. with loan and land-lease relationships Parents with limited resources, claims implemented during that era of Indian UNICEF, have to choose whose school history. These were regionally costs and fees they can afford when a called Hali, or Halwaha, school is available. Educating girls tends orJeura systems; and by colonial to be a lower priority across the world, administration including India. Girls are also harassed the indentured labour system. These or bullied at schools, systems included bonded child labour. Biggeri and Mehrotra have studied the Over time, claims the ILO report, this macroeconomic factors that encourage traditional form of long-duration child labour. They focus their study on relationships have declined. five Asian nations including India, India has passed a number of Pakistan, Indonesia, Thailand and constitutional protections and laws on Philippines. They suggestthat child child labour. The Constitution of India in labour is a serious problem in all five, the Fundamental Rights and the but it is not a new problem. Directive of State Policy prohibits child Macroeconomic causes encouraged labour below the age of 14 years in any widespread child labour across the factory or mine or castle or engaged in world, over most of human history. They any other hazardous employment suggest that the causes for child labour (Article 24). The constitution also include both the demand and the supply envisioned that India shall, by 1960, side. provide infrastructure and resources for Cigno et al. suggest the government free and compulsory education to all planned and implemented land children of the age six to 14 years. redistribution programs in India, where (Article 21-A and Article 45). poor families were given small plots of India has a federal form of government, land with the idea of enabling economic and child labour is a matter on which independence, have had the unintended both the central government and country effect of increased child labour. They find governments can legislate, and have.

www.ijar.org.in 127 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

The major national legislative Project (NCLP) initiative. This legal and developments include the following. development initiative continues, with a current central government funding of The Factories Act of 1948: The Act 6 billion, targeted solely to eliminate prohibits the employment of children child labour in India. Despite these below the age of 14 years in any factory. efforts, child labour remains a major The law also placed rules on whom, challenge for India. when and how long can pre-adults aged 15–18 years be employed in any factory. Children working in different works The Mines Act of 1952: The Act prohibits According to the International Labour the employment of children below 18 Organisation (ILO), there are years of age in a mine. tremendous economic benefits for developing nations by sending children The Child Labour (Prohibition and to school instead of work. Without Regulation) Act of 1986: The Act education, children do not gain the prohibits the employment of children necessary skills such as English literacy below the age of 14 years in hazardous and technical aptitude that will increase occupations identified in a list by the their productivity to enable them to law. The list was expanded in 2006, and secure higher-skilled jobs in future with again in 2008. higher wages that will The Juvenile Justice (Care and Lift them out of poverty. Protection) of Children Act of 2000: This law made it a crime, punishable with a Fireworks manufacture prison term, for anyone to procure or The town of Sivakasi in South India has employ a child in any hazardous been reported to employ child labour in employment or in bondage. the production of fireworks. In 2011, The Right of Children to Free and Sivakasi, Tamil Nadu was home to over Compulsory Education Act of 2009: The 9,500 firecracker factories and produced law mandates free and compulsory almost 100 percent of total fireworks education to all children aged 6 to 14 output in India. The fireworks industry years. This legislation also mandated employed about 150,000 people at an that 25 percent of seats in every private average of 15 employees per factory. school must be allocated for children Most of these were in unorganised from disadvantaged groups and sector, with a few registered and physically challenged children. organised companies. India formulated a National Policy on A more recent 2002 report by Child Labour in 1987. This Policy seeks International Labour Organisation to adopt a gradual & sequential claims that child labour is significant in approach with a focus on rehabilitation Tamil Nadu's fireworks, matches or of children working in hazardous incense sticks industries. However, these occupations. It envisioned strict children do not work in the formal enforcement of Indian laws on child economy and corporate establishments labour combined with development that produce for export. The child programs to address the root causes of labourers in manufacturing typically toil child labour such as poverty. In 1988, in supply chains producing for the this led to the National Child Labour

www.ijar.org.in 128 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 domestic market of fireworks, matches discovered and exposed by the or incense sticks. international media in 2013. In 2010, a German news investigative Solutions to the Problem of Child report claimed that in states Labour? like Karnataka, non-governmental Many children in hazardous and organisations had found up to 10,000 dangerous jobs are in danger of injury or children working in the 1,000 silk even death. Between 2000 and the year factories in 1998. In other places, 2020, the vast majority of new workers, thousands of bonded child labourers citizens and new consumers — whose were present in 1994. But today, after skills and needs will build the world’s UNICEF and NGOs got involved, child economy and society — will come from labour figure is drastically lower, with developing countries. the total estimated to be fewer than a thousand child labourers. The released In order to fairly and adequately meet children were back in school, claims the the needs of this growing workforce and report not rely on child labour, a few things must be prioritised, namely: Carpet weaving  Increased family incomes Siddhartha Kara finds about 20% of carpets manufactured in India could  Education — that helps children involve child labour. He notes, learn skills that will help them earn "Determining the extent to which the a living hand-made carpet supply chain from  Social services — that help children India to the U.S.A. is tainted by slavery and families survive crises, such as and child labour requires an additional disease, or loss of home and shelter exercise in supply chain tracing  Family control of fertility — so that Domestic labour families are not burdened by Official estimates for child labour children working as domestic labour and in The ILO’s International Programme for restaurants is more than 2,500,000 while the Elimination of Child Labour (IPEC) NGOs estimate the figure to be around has explored many programs to help 20 million. The Government of child labourers. India expanded the coverage of The Child Labour Prohibition and Regulation Some educators and social scientists Act and banned the employment of believe that one of the most important children as domestic workers and as ways to help child workers is to ask their workers in restaurants, dhabas, hotels, opinions, and involve them in spas and resorts effective from 10 constructing "solutions" to their own October 2006. problems. Coal mining REFRENCES Despite laws enacted in 1952 prohibiting "National Child Labour employment of people under the age of project". Ministry of Labour and 18 in the mines primitive coal mines Employment,Government of in Meghalaya using child labour were India.Retrieved 12 September 2011.

www.ijar.org.in 129 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Child Labour - ILO". ILO, United "Is Child Labour Inefficient?". Harvard. Nations. 2011. Retrieved 12September 2011. THE STATE OF THE WORLD’S CHILDREN - 2011".UNICEF. 2012. K. Suresh Kumar has been working as a senior lecturer and acting as vice principal of C.R. collage, Chilakaluripet, Guntur district. He is also acting as president for the collage development committee. He has been presented 7 papers in national seminars and published one paper in IJAR and had participated in 10 national seminars.

www.ijar.org.in 130 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

INDIAN GOVERNMENT POLICY ON INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS: AN OVERVIEW Dr.Thirupathaiah. Dulla, Lecturer in Economics, SKRBR College, Narasaraopet, Guntur Dt. Abstract: Industrial relations constitute one of the most delicate and complex problems of the modern industrial society. This phenomenon of a new complex industrial set- up is directly attributable to the emergence of ‘Industrial Revolution. Maintaining smooth industrial relation is not an easy task. Almost all the industrialized countries of the world are facing the problem of establishing and maintaining good management worker relationships in their industries. Thus industrial peace is considered as an essential factor. This paper analyses the concepts relating to the industrial relations, factors effecting new industrial policy and Indian Government policy regarding industrial relations. In the heading of Government policy, various issues like The Legal Arrangement: Industrial Disputes Act, 1947, conciliation and adjudication of the Industrial Disputes Act, Lay-off, Retrenchment and Closure, Settlement of Grievance, unfair labour practice, the voluntary arrangement, code of discipline and industrial truce resolution, Industrial Truce Resolution, 1962, regulation of wages, Industrial Employment Standing Orders and,Trade Unionism in industrial relations. 1. Introduction Employment Standing Orders and ,Trade Unionism in industrial relations. Industrial relations constitute one of the most delicate and complex 2. Factors effecting new industrial problems of the modern industrial policy society. This phenomenon of a new Industry today is neither viewed as a complex industrial set-up is directly venture of employers alone nor profit if attributable to the emergence of considered as its sole objective. It is ‘Industrial Revolution”. Thus industrial considered to be a venture based on peace is considered as an essential purposeful cooperation between factor. This paper analyses the concepts management and labour in the process of relating to the industrial relations, production and maximum social good is factors effecting new industrial policy regarded as its ultimate end and both and Indian Government policy regarding management and employees contribute industrial relations. In the heading of in their own way towards its success. Government policy, various issues like Similarly, labour today is no more an The Legal Arrangement: Industrial unorganized mass of ignorant works Disputes Act, 1947, conciliation and ready to obey without resentment or adjudication of the Industrial Disputes protest the arbitrary and discretionary Act, Lay-off, Retrenchment and Closure, dictates of management. The Settlement of Grievance, unfair labour management has to deal with employees’ practice ,the voluntary arrangement, today nto as individuals but also as code of discipline and industrial truce members of organized social groups who resolution: are very much conscious about their Industrial Truce Resolution, 1962, rights and have substantial bargaining ,regulation of wages, ,Industrial

www.ijar.org.in 131 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 strength. Hence, the objective of evolving 3. GOVERNMENT POLICY AND and maintaining sound industrial LEGAL ARRANGEMENTS relations is not only to find our ways and India’s industrial relations policy means to solve conflicts to resolve has had the following two basic differences but also to secure the objectives: (I) prevention and peaceful cooperation among the employees in the settlement of disputes, and (ii) conduct of industry. promotion of good industrial relations But maintaining smooth industrial via labour-management cooperation. Let relation is not an easy task. Almost all us consider below some of the statutory the industrialized countries of the world and voluntary arrangements devised for are facing the problem of establishing the prevention and settlement of and maintaining good management industrial disputes in India. We have worker relationships in their industries. already discussed the government policy Industrial conflict still arises and on the issue of bonus. Below we discuss therefore establishment and the various other measures adopted by maintenance of satisfactory industrial the government from time to time. relations forms an important plank in 3.1.The Legal Arrangement towards the personnel policies of modern Industrial relations Industrial organization. Each country has sought to Disputes Act, 1947 find our solution, depending upon its economic, social and political A major step towards environment. accomplishing the first objective was taken in 1947 itself with the passing of As we know that globalization is the Industrial Disputes Act, 1947. The followed by huge investments of capital, object was to pre-empt industrial technology and ideas, so one of the major tensions, provide a mechanism for the aspect on which globalization survives is settlement of disputes and set up the Competitiveness. If India wants to necessary infrastructure. The Act leverage its potential in the classic age of provides for the settlement of industrial globalization, Indian companies need to disputes through conciliation, be highly competitive. The role played arbitration or adjudication. It lays down by the Government agencies varies in the preconditions for the legality of degree. It ranges from only formulation strikes and lockouts. Provision is also of rules for the observance of the two made for payment of compensation for parties-employers and the workers-to lay-off and retrenchment. The Act has direct intervention when the been amended vide the Industrial Government agencies regulate the terms Disputes (Amendment) Act, 2010 and of bargain and intervene in industrial enforced with effect from September 15, disputes to fasten their settlement. India 2010. is being rapidly transformed from a state-driven economy into a market- Conciliation and Adjudication of the driven economy committed to Industrial Disputes Act . privatization, liberalization, and The Act empowers the government to globalization. At the regional level, the appoint conciliation officers for bringing states are forced to enter the rat race of about settlement of disputes through liberalization among them to attract conciliation. If attempts at conciliation funds for investment and development. fail, the government can refer the

www.ijar.org.in 132 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 disputes for adjudication if it so wishes. Unfair Labour Practice. However, it is compulsory to refer a Another chapter introduced by the dispute for adjudication if the parties to amendment in 1982 related to unfair the dispute jointly or separately apply labour practices on the part of the for it or if the dispute relates to some employer and workman as well as public utility service and there is a penalty thereof. The chapter says that no notice of strike or lockout. ‘Disputes’ employer or workman or a trade union which have not occurred but are whether registered under the Trade apprehended, can also be referred for Union Act, 1926 or not is to commit any adjudication. National Tribunals tackle unfair practice. Any person who commits questions of national importance and such a practice is punishable with those that affect establishments situated imprisonment or with fine or both. The in more than one State. The parties can, amendment empowered the Registrar to by agreement, refer a dispute for verify the membership of any union and arbitration before it has been referred to to cancel the registration of any union a Labour Court or an Industrial which ‘calls’ or ‘participates in’ an illegal Tribunal or a National Tribunal for strike. adjudication. 3.2. The Voluntary Arrangement: Lay-off, Retrenchment and Closure. Code of Discipline and Industrial Truce The special provisions relating to lay-off, Resolution: retrenchment and closure are applicable Code of Discipline. to establishments employing 100 or more workmen on an average per working A Code of Discipline was adopted day. The Act also provides for protection in 1958 by all the central organisations in the shape of retrenchment of employers and workers aimed at compensation and notice to the workmen preventing and settling industrial who have completed 240 days continuous disputes on a voluntary basis. The Code service in the establishment in the lays down that there should be no strike preceding 12 months before effecting without notice; no unilateral action retrenchment, closure etc. should be taken in connection with any industrial matter; no deliberate damage Settlement of Grievance. should be done to plant or machinery; The amendment in 1982 introduced a acts of violence, intimidation, coercion or new chapter providing for the setting up instigation should not be resorted to; of Grievance Settlement Authority there should be no recourse to go-slow (GSA). The GSA is concerned with the tactics and normal work should not be settlement of all individual disputes in disturbed; in case of disputes, the an establishment coming within its existing machinery should be utilised purview. An important feature of this with the utmost expedition; the machinery is that no reference to a employers should recognise the majority Tribunal/Labour Court is to be made by union in the establishment and frame a the appropriate government till such grievance procedure; the management time the dispute is heard by this should take prompt action for the authority and its decision becomes settlement of grievances and should unacceptable to any of the parties to the implement the awards and agreements dispute. speedily, etc.

www.ijar.org.in 133 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Industrial Truce Resolution, 1962. 1,596. To protect the wages against inflation, the government introduced The Code of Discipline was Variable Dearness Allowance (VDA), strengthened by an Industrial Truce which is linked to Consumer Price Index. Resolution adopted in November 1962 by The VDA is revised every six months. So the central organizations of employers far, 26 States/Union Territories have and workers. It laid down that there already adopted VDA as a part of would be no interruption or slowing minimum wage. down of production; on the other hand, production will be maximized and In the absence of a uniform national defence effort promoted in all possible minimum wage, the concept of a national ways. A standing committee was set up floor-level minimum wage (NFLMW) in August 1963 to review the working of was mooted by the Central Government the Truce Resolution. This has since in 1996 based on the recommendations been merged with the Central of the National Commission on Rural Implementation Evaluation Committee. Labour in 1991 and subsequent increase in the price level. It was last revised to 4. OTHER MEASURES 115 per day from April 1, 2011. At Regulation of Wages present NFLMW is a non-statutory measure. The payment of wages is governed by the Payment of Wages Act, Industrial Employment Standing 1936, and Minimum Wages Act, 1948, as Orders. amended from time to time. The Model rules were framed by the Payment of Wages Act, 1936 was Government under the Industrial enacted with a view to ensure that Employment (Standing Orders) Act, wages payable to employed persons 1948, for adoption by the industrial covered by the Act are disbursed by the establishments employing 100 or more employers within the prescribed time workers to ensure industrial peace. limit and that no deductions other than Amendments to the Act were made in those authorised by law were made. The 1961 and 1963. The Central Government Act covered only those workers whose by notification on May 19, 1982, wages were below ‘ 1,600 per month. extended the Act to all industrial However, the wage ceiling has been establishments under the control of the raised subsequently in stages. With government for which it is the effect from September 11, 2012, the wage appropriate government and all mines, ceiling has been fixed at ‘ 18,000 per wherein 50 or more but less than 100 month. workers are employed. The Minimum Wages Act, 1948 provides Equal Remuneration for Equal Work. for fixation, review, revision and enforcement of minimum wages by the The Equal Remuneration Act, 1976, Central government and the State provides for payment of equal governments in respect of scheduled remuneration to men and women employments in their respective workers for “the sarr work or a work of jurisdiction. There are 45 scheduled similar nature” and for the prevention of employments in the Central sharç discrimination against women in whereas the number of these matters of employment. The provisions employments in the States’ sphere is

www.ijar.org.in 134 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 of the Act have been extended to all globalization. Thus, there is a need of employments. hour to effective industrial policy to achieve developmental goals of the Trade Unionism -The Trade Unions Act country. was passed in 1926. References: It provides for registration of trade unions of workers and in certain 1). Organizational Behavior – Robbins, respects, it defines the law relating to Judge and Sanghi , Pearson registered trade unions. It confers legal Publications and corporate status on registered trade 2). Organizational Theory, Design and unions. Prior to amendment in January Change – Jones and Mathew – Pearson 2002, the Act allowed any 7 or more Publications. members of a trade union to apply for registration of their union. After the 3. Richardson, J. H., An amendment only such trade union can be introduction to the study of Industrial registered which has at least 10 per cent Relations, George Allen & Unwin, or 100 (whichever is less) members. London, 1954. CONCLUSION: The present paper 4. Dunlop, T. J., Industrial Relations analyses the concepts relating to the System, Henry Holt and Co, New York, industrial relations, factors effecting new 1958. industrial policy and Indian Government 5. Nagaraju, S., Industrial Relations policy regarding industrial relations. It System in India, Chugh Publications, can be said that the role played by the Allahabad, 1981. Government agencies varies in degree. India is being rapidly transformed from 5. Giri, V. V., Labour Problems, Asia a state-driven economy into a market- Publishing House, Mumbai, 1972. driven economy committed to privatization, liberalization, and

Dr.D.Thirupathaiah, M.A;M.Phil;Ph.D has been working as a Faculty member in the Department of Economics and Voice- Principal, SKRBR College, Narasaraopet, Guntur (dt) Andhra Pradesh. He attended for several International and National Seminars and Workshops. He has administrative experience by working in the college. He is one of the Editorial Council Members of International Journal of Academic Research.

www.ijar.org.in 135 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

SPECIAL PROVISITION TOJAMMU &KASHMIR, WHY?

Dr. Pradeepta Kishore Sahoo, Principal, GolaghatLawCollege, Law College Road, Bengenakhowa,Dist-Golaghat, Assam

Abstract It can be proved that what is politically feasible is not necessarily legal or just. A political settlement is therefore not a just and valid legal settlement. Particularly when such a settlement is based on a method, device or principle that is unrecognized and unaccepted as a legal prescription in the treatise of the law of nations relating to the territorial divisions between the sovereign states. Thus India can emphatically reject Pakistan’s demand for a plebiscite in Kashmir on the ground that the principle as such is un –recognized, unaccepted and unfounded in the law of nations and as such is devoid of any legal validity what so ever.

KEY WORDS: State autonomy, provincial autonomy, political entity

INTRODUCTION: 1846 under what is called the treaty of Amritsar. The British government vide The idealistic approach of the this treaty concluded on 16thmay of that founding fathers of the Constitution year, transferred and made over, underwent a remarkable change and “forever in independent possession to some specific provisions relating to State Maharaja Gulab Singh and the heir male autonomy or provincial autonomy or of his body all hilly or mountainous autonomous States have been country with its dependencies situated to incorporated in the Constitution. This the eastward of the river Indus and has been done by taking into westward of the river Ravi.” Consideration about the prevailing situation of the country which has given In consideration of this a practical shape to the Constitution. transfer Gulab Singh paid to the British government the sum of seventy-five lacs The need for formulating a of rupees. comprehensive study of State autonomy or provincial autonomy is a major While Jammu and Ladakh political, social and economical issues were already being ruled by Gulab throughout the developing countries of Singh, the valley of Kashmir which the the world today. The insecurity and lack Lahore Durbar had sold to the British of Status of the actual tiller cannot but government was transferred by the have a disastrous effect on the whole latter to the Dogra ruler who acquired it system and of the country and it is no after stiff local residence. The wonder that if has been at the root of all boundaries of the new state were further social and political up levels in history. extended by its rulers through a number of military expeditions , of course, with AUTONOMY OF STATE UNDER the concurrence of the British BRITISH RAJ : Government, Ranbir Singh son of Gulab The state of Jammu and Kashmir came Singh added Gilgit in life time of his into being as a single political entity in father to his dominion. He subdued

www.ijar.org.in 136 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Yasin in 1863 and Dard valley in 1865. NATIONAL VIEW ON KASHMIR: The Later during the rule of Maharaja genesis of Kashmir’s emotional and Pratap Singh, grandson of GulabSingh , political drift away from the national his forces defeated the rulers of chitral in identity can be traced to centrifugal 1891and of Hunza and Nagar in 1895. forces within the state caused by Who accepted the suzerainty of the tensions between its three principal DograDurbar. regions. But development at the national and international levels also contributed While the Treaty transferred to the same process. the state to Gulab Singh “in independent possession” it unambiguously specified The demand of Jammu British supremacy over his rule. PrajaParishad for what is called “full According to Article -4 of the Treaty of accession” of the state to the Indian Amritsar Maharaja did not change the union by which it meant that the limit of his territories without constitutional status of the states of the concurrence of the British government. country evoked sympathetic response He under took to refer to the arbitration among many of Indian nationalist. of the British government any dispute in Hindu leaders like question that may arise between himself Dr.ShyamaprasadMukerjee and and the government of Lahore or any N.C.Chatterjee were vocal supporters of other neighboring state and to abide by the demand. They were willing to the decision of the British government. concede a special status for the valley if Jammu and Ladakh could be integrated According to Article-6, with India. Maharaja engaged for himself and heirs to join with the whole of his military In a bid to reconcile popular force, the British troops when employed Kashmiri aspirations with the demands within the hills or in the territories of Indian nationalism, Nehru initiated a adjoining his possessions. He further dialogue with Abdullah and concluded engaged in Article-7 never to take or what was called Delhi Agreement in July retain in his service by British subject, 1952. Under it, Abdullah agreed to cede not the subject of any European or a few more subjects to the centre then American state with the consent of the were contemplated in the original British government. Under Article-9 the instrument of Accession. The agreement British government undertook “the between the government of the state and responsibility of protecting the India, inter alia, covered the following territories of Maharaja Gulab Singh points:-- from external enemies. (i) The two governments agreed Finally and more specifically with regard to the extension of according to Article-10 Maharaja Gulab provisions of the constitution of India Singh acknowledged the supremacy of dealing with citizenship to the state, the British Government and will in allowing its legislature the right to token of such supremacy present define and regulate the rights and annually to British Government , one privileges of the “permanent residents” horse, twelve perfect shawl goats and who used to be called state subjects. three pairs of Kashmiri shawls. (ii) Agreement was reached with regard to the application of fundamental rights

www.ijar.org.in 137 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

embodied in the constitution of India, While Sheikh Abdullah and Jana subject to suitable modifications, Sangh leaders debated over the degree of amendments and exceptions so as to accession, Nehru clearly wanted to make protect the land reforms of the state and the issue of accession above controversy deal with the cases of infiltration, by delinking it from that centre state espionage and sabotage. No decision relations. could be taken on whether the character However, the agreement was far on fundamental rights in the Indian from successful in restoring inter- constitution should be extended as such regional harmony. On the eve of its to the state or should form a part of the conclusion, the writer warned the prime Kashmir constitution. minister against the consequences of (iii )Settlement was made with regard to increasing tension among the regions of the extension to the state of the original the state. A written memorandum jurisdiction of the Supreme Court in submitted on the occasion said, regard to the enforcement of the “Kashmir leadership has not been able to fundamental rights and other provisions of come out of the orbit of narrow local the Indian constitution applied to the nationalism of the valley and extend its state. influence to other parts of the state. We apprehend growing deterioration in the (iv) The two Governments agreed to evolve internal relations between different some sort of financial arrangement regions, particularly when the policies of between the state and the Indian union, the Kashmiri leaders are encouraging the state government felt that a detailed communal and reactionary activities of and objective examination of the subject the PrajaParishad in Jammu which also was necessary. banks upon similar regional nationalism. (v) It was agreed that the state In particular it urged that during would retain its flag but the union flag his talks with Kashmiri leaders, would have a supremely distinctive emphasis should be laid on place in the state. “democratization of the political (vi) The head of the state would be structure of the state. Safeguarding elected by the state legislature but democratic rights of the people ensuring would hold office subject to the freedom of judiciary, making recognition of the president of India administration completely neutral and during his pleasure. separate from the National Conference organization, better and more realistic On some other subjects the discussions relations between all regions, granting remained in conclusive. Explaining the them some sort of autonomy and lastly terms of Agreement in parliament, on economic amelioration of the people Nehru categorically stated that special through a planned economic policy of the constitutional provisions for the state state. were only in response to the special political conditions obtaining in it at that A public campaign to press the time and “did not constitute a condition demand for regional autonomy followed. for its accession to India.” He said, the It elicited an assurance from Sheikh accession of the state was complete when Abdullah to the effect that the it first acceded in 1947. constitution of the state, when complete would give limited regional autonomy,

www.ijar.org.in 138 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 particularly in cultural sphere to Jammu instrument for the fulfillment of the and Ladakh. Nehru told a press objectives of Muslim communalists, conference in the presence of Abdullah in Kashmiri Nationalists and communists New Delhi on 24th July 1952 that “the who had one common interest in state government was considering isolating Kashmir valley from the rest of regional autonomies within the larger India. state. SPECIAL STATUS:--However, a distinct Criticizing the agreement in feature of the state’s relations with the parliament Dr. Shyam Prasad Mukerjee paramount power was absence of any advocated, “Kashmir’s complete provision for sectioning British Resident integration with India or alternatively in the state which was the practice in self-determination for Jammu and other princely states of the country. Ladakh.”78 Abdullah was quick to oblige The residents were by saying that, “If any region wished to representative of the central government break away, the government would not in the states under British Raj as the attempt to retain it by force.” governors are in independent India, Delivering the presidential except that they had far greater powers address at the first all India session of undefined and arbitrary than the latter the Bharatiyajanasangh at Kanpur now have which bound by the letter of towards the end of 1952, he said, “we the constitution, albeit without a similar would readily agree to treat the valley ceremonial status. The state thus with Sheik Abdullah as its head in any enjoyed a sort of special status within special manner and such time as he the British India Empire. would like but Jammu and Ladakh must The Anglo-Afghan war of be fully integrated with India according 1878 and the gradual extension of the to the wishes of the people. Russian empire almost up to the borders The Jammu PrajaParishad, of the state increased its strategic value which had reacted similarly, started a for the British empire through loyal powerful agitation from 17th November princes and in particular, entrenching 1952 when the state constituent their administration in the neighboring Assembly started implementing the Punjab the British were now anxious to agreement and passed provisions in its extend their sway over Jammu and regarding termination of the institution Kashmir state as well. of Monarchy. The state government While Maharaja Gulab Singh must have deliberately chosen to start and his son and successor Maharaja the implementation of the agreement Ranbir Singh resisted proposals to with this provision. It was a popular station a British resident in the state, measure in the valley though not so in the British Government succeeded in Jammu. doing so after the latter’s death in 1885. The PrajaParishad and the Lord Kimberley, British National Conference by polarizing the secretary of state for India in a politics of the state helped each other in communication to lord Rippon , the consolidating their hold on their viceroy of India, dated 23 may 1884 respective communities. In fact the confirmed that no resident was Parishad agitation seemed to be an real appointed in the state in 1846, nor was

www.ijar.org.in 139 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 suggestion of his appointment pressed in Abdullah who had been arrested earlier 1873 , because it did not justify in connection with the Quit Kashmir “disregarding objections which were Movement. The congress working expressed by authorities entitled to committee decided on 23rd September respect (referring to Kashmir Durbar).” 1946 to send a deputation “to enquire But he added that in the interval into the reports of repression, circumstances had greatly changed, inter suppression of civil liberties and alia, due to the course of events beyond tempering with votes” in the state the border, which have materially Assembly election. increased the political importance of CONSTITUTIONAL STATUS Kashmir. Accordingly, he advised the RELATING TO JAMMU AND viceroy, to proceed in the matter at any KASHMIR: time after the death of Maharaja Ranbir Singh. Constitutional relations of Jammu And Kashmir State with the ACCESSION OF KASHMIR WITH centre have never been a good measure INDIAN UNION for the success of the process of India Jammu And Kashmir State was federalization. There has been a school of one of those Indian princely states which thought who has attached more did not join the constituent Assembly of importance to constitutional and legal India set-up under the cabinet mission bonds than satisfaction of political plan announced on 16th May 1946. aspirations of the people. The movement Addressing the session of the AISPC for full application of the Indian which met at Gwalior on 17th, 18th April constitution to the state gained 1946. Jawaharlal Nehru warned the momentum in Jammu and powerful princes that “all those who do not join support from many sections of the constituent Assembly now would be population in the rest of the country regarded as hostile states and they will despite enough warning about its have to bear the consequences of being advance effect on the minds of the people so regarded.” in Kashmir valley. Liaqat Ali khan, the leader of the A major political party like the Muslim League in the central Executive Jana Sangh and many eminent jurists declared, on the other hand, that the like the late Supreme Court chief justice states were perfectly entitled to refuse to Mehan Chand Mahajan used to believe have anything to do with the constituent in a unitary form of government as the Assembly. In August 1946, the Muslim best guarantee for the unity of the League finally decided against joining country. Even at the time of the present the Assembly. This encouraged a group survey (1975-76) a little less than half of of princes led by Nawab of Bhopal to sit Hindu respondents favoured a unitary on the fence. The relations of the Indian constitution for India, whereas the National Congress with the government Muslim opinion over 93% supported a of Jammu And Kashmir State were federal constitution for India. particularly strained following the arrest While studying evolution of the of its leader Jawaharlal Nehru at Kohala constitutional status of the state, the in June 1946 when he refused to obey divergent views of its two major the order to leave the state. He had gone communities on the concept of the centre there to arrange for the defence of

www.ijar.org.in 140 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 state relations must be kept in view. The vested with the dominion of the India divergence was obviously much wider in the authority to deal with three subjects the past then is the case now. namely, Defence, External Affairs and communications as also ancillary The constitutional status of the matters. state was almost similar to that of 544 princely states that acceded to the Retaining the residual sovereignty Indian union after independence of the with the state, the accession document country in 1947. But political specifically noted, “Nothing in this compulsions created divergent Instrument affects the continuance of expectations about the future of this ruler’s sovereignty in and over this state status among people belonging to as provided under the Instrument. The different regions and communities of the exercise of any powers, authority and state. rights now enjoyed by the ruler of this state.” Under section-7 of the Indian Independence Act, passed by the British The instrument also made the parliament in 1947, the suzerainty of the following two provisions:-- British crown over the Indian states (1) The terms of this my instrument of including the state of Jammu and accession shall not be varied by any Kashmir lapsed and “His Highness amendment of the Act of the Indian became as uncontrolled and absolute Independence Act 1947 unless such sovereign.” In exercise of this sovereign amendment is accepted by me by an right to ruler of the state signed the instrument supplementary to this instrument of Accession on 26th October instrument. 1947 which made it constitutionally a part of India. (2) Nothing in this instrument shall be deemed to commit me in any way to In course of time when India’s acceptance of any future constitution commitment to hold a plebiscite to of India or to fetter my discretion to determine future of Kashmir started enter into arrangement with the fading out and she shifted her stand on government of India any such future Kashmir from moral and political to constitution. constitutional grounds, the Maharaja’s sovereign position in 1947 gained SCOPE OF ARTICLE-370 IN THE importance in India’s official arguments. CONSTITUTION: Interestingly while only 39% of Muslim This article was included in the respondents in the valley believed in the constitution as a special provision in moral validity of the state’s accession to view to the problems arising in respect of India. 80% of them believed that the the state of Jammu and Kashmir and accession was constitutionally valid. also the fact that government of India The Instrument of Accession had given their assurance to the people sighed by the ruler of Jammu and of the state that their political future Kashmir state was also of the standard would be finally determined by from used by all the states, provided themselves. under section-6 of the government of The policy of the constitution India Act1935, as adapted by the Indian which appears from this article is that (provisional constitution) order 1947. It the constitution was framed for the

www.ijar.org.in 141 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 entire union of India but the provisions the ruler of a state whose territory of the constitution should not apply to comprised of all these three taken the territories of the state of Jammu and together as one unit or whole. Hence Kashmir until and unless the president Kashmir minus Jammu and Ladakh is made an order that they shall apply. not the state. So Pakistan’s demand because of this Muslim majority in The effect of the article was to Kashmir must be rejected as untenable. give jurisdiction to the union parliament to make laws for the state on matters With regard to the people of specified either in the instrument of Kashmir when the constitution of India accession or by later additions made grants, guarantees and protects all the with the concurrence of the state fundamental rights and treats the people government. It is no way altered the of Kashmir on absolute parity with the basis of relationship between the state rest of the Indians what more is left and the union government and left the there for them to determine for which state to be governed by its own laws and Pakistan has been wasting her constitution in the residuary field. crocodile’s tears all these 18 years and till now. This article was inserted as a temporary provision until the CONCLUSION: Thus having made a constituent assembly of the state met through survey of the political and legal and decided the political future of the aspect of the Indo-Pakistani dispute over state. The president was empowered by Kashmir the conclusion is that the article itself to decide at the International Law is always a very appropriate moment whether the article serious handicap for the weaker powers. should be abrogated or be retained Whereas the mighty powers always twist subject to exceptions and modification. and turn it as they will for their own Now the constituent Assembly of the selfish interests. They impose their state has decided that Jammu and actions and decisions upon the weaker Kashmir is and shall be an integral part powers and try to pass them off as of the “Union of India”. How it would International Law by their force. come into reality. International law is always subjected to and dominated by the power-politics. It PAKISTAN’S CLAIM TOWARDS is because of all these that it is said and KASHMIR:. believed that the so called International Pakistan claims Kashmir because of a Law is not truly a law. If at all it is a law Muslim Majority. Well, if Kashmir has a then it must be admitted that it is Muslim Majority, then Jammu has a merely a law by courtesy. Observance of Hindu Majority and Ladakh has which primarily and most heavily rests Buddhist preponderance. Is not then the upon the conduct of the mighty powers of demand counter-balanced when Jammu the world. The future, importance, and Ladakh are combined with validity, affectivity, sanctity and the Kashmir? Again Kashmir cannot be binding force of International law as a excluded or separated from either means and as an instrument for settling Jammu or Ladakh. Because the princely and adjusting the various interests and state of Kashmir comprised of both issues of and between the sovereign Jammu as well as Ladakh. At the time of states in a world community of nations accession the Maharaja had signed as all depends upon the big powers.

www.ijar.org.in 142 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

It can be proved that what is politically the result of Pakistan’s outright feasible is not necessarily legal or just. A aggression against the former princely political settlement is therefore not a state of Jammu and Kashmir which just and valid legal settlement. subsequently became a part of the Particularly when such a settlement is territory of the Indian union through the based on a method, device or principle Instrument of Accession. Thus the so that is unrecognized and unaccepted as a called “Azad Kashmir” has no legal legal prescription in the treatise of the recognition behind it. Legally India’s law of nations relating to the territorial sovereignty and right extends to this divisions between the sovereign states. part of the state as well even though it is Thus India can emphatically reject now under Pakistan’s illegal occupation. Pakistan’s demand for a plebiscite in REFERENCE: Kashmir on the ground that the principle as such is un –recognized,  White paper on Indian States part – unaccepted and unfounded in the law of XI nations and as such is devoid of any  M. SubhanVs State , AIR 1956 J & K legal validity what so ever. 1  Magher Singh Vs Principal Secretary Thus the present so called “Azad J & K Govt. AIR 1953 J & K -25 Kashmir” which has come to stay as the  Ph. LakhantalVs State of J & K AIR de -facto boundary in Kashmir between 1956-SC -197 India and Pakistan all these years is without any legal validity behind it. It is

www.ijar.org.in 143 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

ECOTOURISM TOURISM IN EAST GODAVARI, ANDHRA PRADESH

Dr.NomulaVenkateshwarlu,Assistant Professor, V.K.V. Govt. Degree College, Kothapeta, East Godavari, Andhra Pradesh.

Abstract: An attempt has been made in this paper to highlight the different variants’ of ecotourism in East Godavri district of Andhra Pradeh. There are many forms of tourism in East Godavri classified by typical features like nature, culture, heritage, time, health and many other things. This may be useful to the 28 lakh tourists who are visiting every year this district from all over the country, besides 3,000 foreign visitors, in attaining the true purpose of their travel. Ecotourism or green tourism is ecological tourism, with the main objective to preserve the nature or approach to rare species. Ecotourism activity involves an important education and interpretation component, as well as support for raising awareness on the necessity of natural and cultural capital preservation. Ecotourism must have minimum consequences on the environment and must also contribute to the welfare of local populations. That is why the author opted Ecotourism in this paper. Key words: Ecotourism, culture, heritage, tourism industry

Introduction: visitors, in attaining the true purpose of their travel An attempt has been made in this paper to highlight the different variants’ of ecotourism in East Godavri district of Andhra Pradeh. This may be useful to the 28lakh tourists who are i . District Gazetteer – East Godavari visiting every year this district from all 2010, Government of Andhra over the countryi, besides 3,000 foreign Pradesh.

Nestled beautifully on the river heritage, time, health and many other Godavri, East Godavari is located in the things. north east of the state of Andhra Forms of tourism Pradesh. Here you can behold sheer magnificence of eternal nature through The major heads are as follows veils of time you can see amazing after summarizing the latest findings of temples reflecting the zenith of tourism. architectural brilliance and unmatched (A) Eco-natural tourism craftsmanship. Behold Mother Nature in all her glory. Give in to your spirit of (B) Cultural tourism adventure. Quench your thirst for (C) Pilgrimage(religious tourism) knowledge of our pristine culture and rich heritage.There are many forms of (D) Rural tourism tourism in East Godavri classified by (E) Health tourism typical features like nature, culture, (F) Holiday tourism

www.ijar.org.in 144 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

(G) Educational tourism of the Vali-Sugriva during the Ramayana period. The remarkable (H) Business tourism variation of the battleground with the (I) Tourism on water / seaside tourism presence of grass land, encircled by forests on the other hillocks makes the (J) Mountain tourism visitor to pay attention on the legendary (K) Rural tourism story. (L) City tourism As a part of Tourism Development Maredumilli Forest Rest House was Maredumilli Eco Tourism constructed in the year 1914, the Forest The Maredumilli Forests of East Rest House is in Maredumilli Village Godavari District are having rich with all facilities. The name of the rest biodiversity and the area is having semi house is Abhayaranya Forest Rest evergreen forests with undulating House. Suits are available here for stay terrain, which forms part of the Eastern of Tourists. Ghats.T heMaredumilli Community Papikonda wild life sanctuary2 Conservation & Eco Tourism Area is situated on Maredumilli – Papikonda wild life sanctuary situated Bhadrachalam road, nearly 4 Km. away in the fertile godavaribasin, the 591km from Maredumilli village. The area is Papikonda wild life sanctuary has having many streams flowing over the abundant vegetation that is native to the undulating rocks in the deep woods and easternGhats. It is located about 50km any visitor feel thrilling experience in from rjaahumundry. The animals that the Nature. can be spotted here include tiger, panther, gaur, The Eco-tourism project is deer,Chowsingha,Sambar, block,mouse managed by the local indigenous tribal and deer, barking deer,sloth bear and community of Valamuru, marshcrocodile,apart from avriety of Somireddypalem and Valmeekipeta birds. You can also enjoy aboat ride from Vana Samrkshana Samithi people with Rajahmundry upstreamand the godavari the active support of Andhra Pradesh river with packed lunch Konaseema is Forest Department. The project was an oasis of enchanting beauty. Peace and successfully completed in a short span of tranquility that is adreamtour time due to the commitment of the destination for all. The northern side is highly motivated community bounded by godavari. It is one of most participation coupled with the timely fertile lands present in Coromandel cost. financial assistance from the World The entire region is rich in coconut trees, Bank aided Andhra Pradesh Community mango groves, cashew and paddy fields. Forest Management Project. This also Every January of Konaseema is a provided unique opportunity to the witness for its great ‘Konaseema festival’ native ethnic community to spread the boat competitions make us to remember message of conservation to the masses. Kerala. They are held in different The jungle star campsite is steams of fiver Godavari. located adjoining the Valamururiver An exciting launch ride on the Godavari with the stream flowing on 3 sides river from Divipatnam takesthe tribal overlooking the Vali-SugrivaKonda villages of gandipochama and which is believed to be the battle ground

www.ijar.org.in 145 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 rampachodavaram.you can reach Small waterfalls, water streams,), rampachodavaram by road from thick rain forest and other flora and rajamundry,wich is at a distance of fauna adds to scenic beauty of 50km.here one can witness the PapiKondalu. A legend about traditional tribal dance’’vela’’performed PapiKondalu is the Lord Rama and by women dressed in bright attire the goddess sita dwelled here during the dance is highly rhythmic accompanied by vanavasa. singing.yet another tribal dance called Considerable percentage Telugu movies kommu is performed by men are shot in Rajahmundry and east only,dressed in typical tribal attir with Godavari district. (PapiKondalu is aheodgear of horns wihike at important attractions for these movie rampachodavaram,one can drive down to makers). Ramadasu, Apadbhandavudu, maredumilli just 20km away wich is a Godavari, are few of the popular movies little known hill station the drive shot here. The boat takes you till through the dence jungle is quite Parentallapalli in Khammam district the enjoyable and one can expect close abode of lord shiva. encounters wild animals . Konaseema Papi Hills or PapiKondalu (In The Godavari River island Telugu language) is part of Eastern enough to support unending acres of Ghats through which Godavari pierces coconut groves but small enough to offer and flows in twists and turns (called you a secluded holiday. Sun streaked 'malupulu ' in telugu) towards east. riversides, the backbeat of waves Entire area of PapiKondalu is covered by striking shore, a musky earthen tropical rain forests and deciduous rain fragrance, coconut palms gyrating to the forests. breeze off the river. This region Well The boat ride commences at known for Andhra Pradesh hospitality3. Polavaram in summers because of low That Konaseema in season & water levels and in Pattiseema at all and off season. A Must visit on the other times. The boat ride leads you to itinerary of every true blue vacationer. A countryside patch-worked with tiny farm set of breathtakingly picturesque islands plots, the landscapes dotted with tribal floating in a 50 kms. Stretch of river habitations, the river banks forested Godavari, Konaseema brings to mind the with the timber reserves, the fresh air canvas of a master painter. What better and the deep river all blend tighter to than to cruise down the gently lapping make it a magic place. They present water, to set foot on each of these ideal settings to enjoy the nature. The floating gems, to explore their pristine, beauty of the uncrowned spaces all along almost virgin, beauty first hand? If you the river makes people stop and have been dreaming about a kerela stare.Actual PapiKondalu is a place backwater cruise, we suggest you make where the width of Godavari is your way to konaseema now. Narrowest less than a KM). From distance you would feel that both the Andhra Pradesh Tourism makes hills are merging together however the the Konaseema experience even more boat cruises through the narrow width of memorable with its air conditioned 3 Godavari and this is the best of the double bedroomed Houseboat Cruises. entire trip. Now available for private charter are

www.ijar.org.in 146 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 fully furnished boats accommodating bounded by Gautami Godavari and upto four adults. Each is equipped with southern side is bounded by Vasista two double bedrooms with attached Godavari. Coconut palms, the arboreal bathe, and a sit out-cum-dining area on symbol of Konaseema landscape, fringe the deck. On board, to attend to your the backwaters framing the blue tropical comforts, are trained attendants. If to sky during daytime and a starry travel more than 4 members, extra 300 twinkling firmament during evenings. Rs will be charged for each The festivals of Rathotsavam (for member.Theboat can be accomodate Lord Vishnu) and PrabhalaTeertham nearly 12 members. (for Lord Shiva) are famous all through The cruiser which sets sail at 10 the region. Most famous of Rathotsavam am will take you long the winding festivals are of Antarvediteertham and tributaries of Godavari - Vynateyam and Yanamteertham. Vasista. Food is served - breakfast & Konaseema Rural Tourism: lunch (veg) on the boat and dinner (non- veg) on an island in typical rustic style. India is a country of rich culture The menu is a compilation of the best of and heritage. With above 70% ethnic cuisine fresh vegetarian fare and population residing in around 6 million spicy non vegetarian food to bring you plus villages, real India has its roots the true taste of Andhra. right inside this simplistic structure. With Rural Tourism, we try to take you The boat will drop anchor at to a journey of not so known( places like Dindi Resorts (both starting and ending Konaseema, ) – the land and people point). From Dindi resorts the cruise sail which is the back bone of this country. It upstream Rajolu Town and to is a journey to explore diversity and downstreamuptoNarsapur town. The hospitality from nook and corners of tourists can travel in and around nearly Rural India. 50 K.m. The travelers those who wanted to stay night at boat, for them the boat Here is an attempt from vizag will be anchored near the resorts. Air Tourism to take you away to Konaseema conditioned rooms accomodation facility , a dream land full of peace, simplicity provided only to the travelers those who and innocence. Connect with nature, booked for 24 hours, and stay night at unlearn luxury, and spend time looking boat. for smooth and comfortable travel, at surroundings and people who support advance booking is must. your life by providing the raw inputs for complex city life needs. What you explore Backwater Tourism/Houseboat during these tours is a unique Konaseema is a delta located in experience and an eye opener to the the East Godavari and West Godavari basics of a developing economy. For districts of Andhra Pradesh, India. This corporate people, this gives a day off to delta is surrounded on all sides by go back to roots and this gives an waters (of Godavari and the Bay of opportunity to spend time in the rural Bengal).Konaseema is famous for its atmosphere away from the Mouse and scenic greenery and vedic scholars. The the motherboard. origin of the name may be from Telugu word "Kona" meaning corner which The different villages that you visit as a resembles its shape. The northern side is part of Konaseema package are sure to

www.ijar.org.in 147 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 leave lasting memories in your mind. Ridley sea turtle estuarine crocodiles This is an opportunity to see the India and fishing cat. described in novels for people engaged in Kadiyam Nurseries hustle and bustle of daily city life. Kadiyam nurseries spread in The best part is while visiting 3,500 acres in 11 villages of these places you would get an Kadiyammandal. On December 25th of opportunity to experience the tradition of every year a unique ‘Exhibition of art, culture and lifestyles of Rural Flowers / The Festival of Flowers’ is Andhra. You can enjoy a blend of rural organized by the nurseries nearby.World and Temple Tourism as you would get a class variants of flowers is a good worthy chance to visit various temples in your feast to natural lovers5. World Heritage rural tourism itinerary. There is an day is celebrated on April 18 of every option to stay in a farm House equipped year at Adurru 6 , an ancient historical with all facilities to have a feel of the Buddhist site. It is known for Buddist rural atmosphere. monuments. It is a village located in Back Water Tourism of Konaseema: RazoleTaluk. The ruins of Buddhist stupas, chityas and viharas were Konaseema is known for its discovered by the Archaeological Survey backwaters. They as a whole, form an of India(ASI) in the year 1953. intricate network of lagoons, lakes, Mahastupa is the major attraction of the canals, estuaries, and rivers that drain place. into the bay of bengal.. Boating along the backwaters offers spectacular views and Rampachodavaram is a tribal village, vistas of konaseema’s pristine natural 50 km from Rajahmundry in East beauty 4 .Coconut palms, the arboreal Godavari District. The surrounding symbol of Konaseema landscape, fringe villages are very popular with regional the backwaters framing the blue tropical film makers for its untouched natural sky during daytime and a starry beauty. At Rampachodavaram, the twinkling firmament during evenings. tourists can see the traditional tribal There are diverse sceneries along the dance, Vela, performed by women backwaters crisscrossing the coastal dressed in bright clothes. Another tribal areas. dance called Kommu, performed by men dressed in typical tribal clothes with a Coringa Sanctuary headgear of horns, is also interesting. Gurgling streams invite you to beautiful Rest houses and huts of forest lakes and wild life sanctuaries and department are available in where lush paddy fields swaying in the Rampachodvaram, Maredimilli, breeze appear to dance celebrating life. Devipatnam for those who would like Coringa sanctuary is an amazing scenic spend nights in deep forest. Hope Island place to visit and is situated in east is a narrow stretch of sandy formation in Godavri which is close to Kakinada city the mighty Bay of Bengal which was and is widespread over an area of 235 responsible for the formation of the Bay square kms. Rich flora and found can be of Kakinada. experienced in the Coringa sanctuary Hope Island protect .there are around 35varieties of mangrove plants which are present at Hope Island protects the city of this place. It is very famous for olive Kakinada from the strong cyclone/tidal

www.ijar.org.in 148 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 waves coming from the Bay of Bengal and offers shelter to ships which berth at Research and study – anchor in the Kakinada Bay.This RamachandraPuram. enchanting island was formed during the last 200 years by the sand drifting from ------the tributary of Godavari River. The picturesque island presents a beautiful view with backwaters on one side and sandy beaches on the side facing the Bay of Bengal. The northern part of the island is called the "Godavari point" which overlooks the entry point into the Bay of Kakinada and the Kakinada harbour. Dr.N.Venkateshwarlu, M.A (Hist), M.A (Eng), Ph.D, B.Ed, has been working as It is concluded that East Godari district an Assistant Professor in V.K.V. Govt. has famous locations and attracting College, Kothapeta, East Godavari, many pilgrims. But, maintenance is the Andhra Pradesh. He attended to several major problem. Thus, efforts should be International and National Seminars made in this regard. and Workshops and presented more than 15 papers. He received Yuva Kala 2“The Dancing Doras”, - an unpublished Puraskar, Ganhi Bronze Stattue and G.S.B.N.Reddy Trust award from M.A., Dissertation S.N.School, various institutions. He has acting as Department of Dance, Hyderabad – Director, Gandian Study Centre of the 2002. college, and convener to Director JowharKnowlege Center. We wrote 3 3 “KotiandalaKonaseema”, by books and conducted seminars at UGC Dr.Venkateshwarlu, Student State and DRC District Level. At present Research Project, V.K.V GovtDegree he is acting as principal investigator to UGC Minor Research Project college press -2012 East Godavavi .

4 “TurpuGodvariZillaCharitra - Samskruthi”, Dr. P. ChiranjeeviKumari, March 2008, Akash Offset, Smarla Kota, E.G.Dist.

5 Proceedings of the Andhra Historical Research Society, Rajamundry.

6 “Turpu Godavari ZillaloBauddhaStupalu” -2012 -by pilliRambabu – center forBuddist

www.ijar.org.in 149 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

ISSUES IN MAHATMA GANDHI NATIONAL RURAL EMPLOYMENT GUARANTEE ACT, 2005

Dr.Vijayakumar Bandi, 5-20-65/A, Near Ps Park, Padison Pet , IthaNagarTenali Abstract: The aim of the paper is to present the issues involved in the Central Government formulated the National Rural Employment Guarantee Act (MGNREGA) in 2005. In fact mass have an idea about the act as a wage employment programme. But it has providing various rights to the employee in the unorganized sector. Key words: Employment Guarantee, unskilled manual work, Women empowerment, equal wage INTRODUCTION 3. Up to 100 days in a financial year per household, depending on the Evolving the design of the wage actual demand. employment programmes to more effectively fightPoverty, the Central 4. Labor Intensive Works: 60:40 Government formulated the National wage and material ratio for permissible Rural Employment Guarantee Act works; noContractors/machinery. (MGNREGA) in 2005. With its legal 5. Decentralized Planning framework and rights-based approach, MGNREGA provides employment to 6. Gram Sabah’s to recommend those who demand it and is a paradigm works shift from earlierprogrammes. Notified 7. At least 50% of works by Gram on September 7, 2005, MGNREGA aims Panchayats for execution at enhancing Livelihood security by providing at least one hundred days of 8. Principal role of PRIs in planning, guaranteed wage Employment in a monitoring and implementation financial year to every rural household 9. Work site facilities: Crèche, drinking whose adult members volunteer to do water, first aid and shade provided at unskilled manual work. The Act covered worksites 200 districts in its first phase, Implemented on February 2, 2006, and 10. Women empowerment: At least one- was extended to 130 additional districts third of beneficiaries should be women in 2007-2008. All the remaining rural 11. Transparency & Accountability: areas have been notified with effect from Proactive disclosure through Social April 1, 2008. Audits,Grievance Redressed Mechanism, I. Salient features of the Act 12. Implementation Under Sec 3, States 1. Right based Framework: For are responsible for providing work in adult members of a rural household accordance withthe Scheme. Under Sec willing to do unskilled manual work. 4, every state government is required to make a scheme for Providing not less 2. Time bound Guarantee: 15 days than 100 days of guaranteed for provision of employment, else employment in a financial year, to Those unemployment allowance who demand work.

www.ijar.org.in 150 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

13. Funding compared to 10 % households in FY 2008-09, 2009-10 and 2010-11. The 14. Central Government -100% of wages women participation rate in these A for unskilled manual work, 75% of district is 45% Natural Resource Material cost of the schemes including Regeneration and impact on agricultural payment of wages to skilled and semi productivity Skilled workers. I) the works undertaken through 15. State Government- 25% of material MGNREGA give priority to activities including payment of wages to related to Water harvesting, skilledAndsemi skilled workers cost. groundwater recharge, drought-proofing, 100% of unemployment allowance by and flood protection. Its focus on eco- stateGovernment restoration and sustainable livelihoods II. Non Negotiable will lead over time, to an Increase in land productivity and aid the workers in I. Only Job Card holders to be employed moving from wage Employment to for MGNREGA works sustainable employment. Almost 80% II. To provide employment within 15 works relate to soil andWater days of application conservation. MGNREGA works by their very nature place stress on Increasing III. No contractor land productivity, recharging ground IV. Task to be performed by using water and increasing water Availability. manual labour& not machines ii) Recent amendment of the Act to V. Muster rolls to be maintained on permit MGNREGA works on individual work sites land of Small and marginal farmers who constitute 89% of the farming VI. Proactive disclosure of information. community, in Addition to the individual VII. Wage payments to be through land of SC/ST/BPL/IAY/ land reform accounts in banks/post offices beneficiaries will Augment the impact on agricultural productivity and household VIII. Wage material ratio- 60:40 income. In order to appraise the IX. At least 50% of the works in terms of performance and impact of the main cost under a Scheme to be implemented findings of the study are: Through GPsProgramme 1. Increase in household income: In Implementation and Outcomes in LWE LWE areas of Chhattisgarh, Orissa, Districts: The Ministry is also Jharkhand and Andhra Pradesh, income Continually reviewing the of rural labour households has gone up implementation of MGNREGA in LWE as a result of thisProgramme. districts. In FY 2008-09, the average 2. Increase in agricultural wages: person days of employment per In LWE areas of Chhattisgarh, Orissa, household was 48 days for the year 2008- Jharkhand andAndhra Pradesh, wages 09 And 2009-10 and 47 days for 2010-11. in various agricultural operations have 93% of rural households have been gone up as a result of provided job Cards against the national average of 68% up to FY 2009-10 and 3. Implementation of over 9% households Completed 100 days MGNREGA.This has lead to an increase in FY 2008-09, 2009-10 and 2010-11 as in fertilizer use, and qualitySeeds

www.ijar.org.in 151 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

4. Reduction in distress migration: V. Deposit of wages in the account of In village Besrapal, located in Bastar wage earners 13th day. District of Chhattisgarh, village VI. Entry of disbursement of wage into Nawagarh, located in Gumla District MIS within 16th day. and village Mahel, located inKhunti District of Jharkhand, the incidence of II. As mentioned in operational guideline out-migration from the village to distant (section 6.4.4) Mates/Barefoot Engineers Places for manual works had come down who Would work under the guidance of as a result of MGNREGA works. 5. In the Technical Assistants to help out with order to address constraints like timely the technical Surveys and readings, measurement of works, preparation of worksite layouts and maintenance of shelf of works, and technical records. Executive instructions on deployment of personnel: The Delays in wage payments, the Ministry Ministry has issued a circular on has taken the following initiatives: Recruitment of personnel within this 6%. A) Timely measurement of works: The circular recommends recruitment of Recognizing the need for adequate ThePanchayats Development Officer in human resource for timely measurement select Panchayats, 1 technical assistant of work, the Ministry took the following for every 6000 HHs. initiatives: b. Timely wage PaymentThe Ministry is All activities required to process also instructing the states to payment of wages must invariably be operationalize the BC model and completed as per Timelines given in the reportregularly on progress. The states circular of the Ministry dated 29th Oct are to identify unsaved areas for BC 2010. This includes; closure of muster on model and discuss with banks. The 6th day, MB to be brought to appropriate Ministry has also issued executive authority on 8th day or before and So on. instructions for appointment of Business Penal provision (Sec 25 of the Act) correspondent (BC) system Many Post should invariably be invoked for delays. Offices do not keep adequate cash amount. Ministry has issues instruction A. flow chart with time schedule has to Many Post Offices do not keep been suggested to the States. adequate cash amount. Ministry has I. Closing of muster roll by 6th day after issues instruction to State that the start of the work. District Administration should place adequate amounts with all the post II. Bringing muster roll measurement Offices to facilitate payment; State that book by 8th day. the District Administration should place III Entry of muster roll in MIS and adequate amounts with all the post generation of pay orders by 9th and 10th Offices to facilitate payment; Days. * District Administration should IV. Submission of pay order at the Block facilitate transport and security for post office/bank, generation of carrying cash Information wage slip transfer of pay * Alternate Institutions like SHG order at the village post office/bank Federations, LAMPS, and Non- within 11th and 12th day. Scheduled Commercial Banks

www.ijar.org.in 152 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

And Private Banks like Cooperative Construction of contour/ graded bund, Bank, RRBs, Garmin Banks etc, JFM land leveling &Shaping, reclamation of Groups of provenTrack records and saline/ alkaline land, construction of others could be authorized to act as BCs. drainage channels, wasteland by transporting silt from nearby tank, * Pending complete roll out of BCs / Post development of waste land/ fallow land. offices, alternative arrangements such as Horticulture, Plantation: all activities mobile related to horticulture including nursery Bankingetc should be provided. rising. C: Social Audits E: District Level Ombudsman: District Level Ombudsman for effective Social Audits enable the rural grievance redressed: The Ombudsman communities to monitor and analyze the will beappointed by the State quality, durabilityAnd usefulness of Government on the recommendation of MGNREGA works as well as mobilizes the selection committee. Appointed by awareness and enforcement on Their the State Government on the rights. Social Audit is an important tool recommendation of the selection by which the people can improve and committee. Ombudsmen will be well- devise Strategies to enhance the quality known persons from civil society who of implementation of MGNREGA. The have experience in the field of public Ministry has Accorded utmost administration, law, academics, social importance to the organization of Social work or management. Ombudsman will Audits by the Gram Panchayatsand be an agency independent of the central issued instructions to the States to make or state government. The Ombudsman necessary arrangements for the purpose. willOmbudsmen will be well-known The Mahatma Gandhi National Rural persons from civil society who have Employment Guarantee Audit of experience in the Field of public Schemes Rules, 2011 have been administration, law, academics, social formulated and shared with States/ UTs work or management. Ombudsman will for Action. be an agency independent of the central D: work on individual land permitted or state government. The Ombudsman under MGRNEGA will receive complaints from MGNREGA workers and others on any matters Amendment of the Act to permit consider such Complaints and facilitate MGNREGA works on individual land of their disposal in accordance with law. small and Marginal farmers who constitute 89% of the farming F: Leveraging MGNREGA for community, in addition to the Individual sustainable development through land of SC/ST/BPL/IAY/ land reform convergence: In view of the inter-sectoral beneficiaries will augment the impact on of MGNREGA, the need to create Agricultural productivity and household durable assets and Improve livelihood income. Following works can be taken up security and the common target groups –Irrigation facility: Construction of Dug of certain development Programmes with well, Farm ponds, Tanka, Ground water MGNREGA, the Ministry has developed recharge Structure, Construction/ lining and disseminated convergence of water courses/ Irrigation channel Guidelines with different Schemes and etc.Land development facilities: specific programmes viz. Indian Council

www.ijar.org.in 153 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 of Agricultural Research, National A forestation Programme and other schemes of the Ministry of Forest & Environment, Schemes of the Ministry of Water Resources, PMGSY(Department of Rural Development), SGSY (Department of Rural Development), Watershed Development Programmes (Department of Land Resources, Ministry of Rural Development), Ministry of Agriculture and Fisheries

Dr.VijayakumarBandi is working as faculty in Andhra Pradesh Tribal Welfare Residential discipline, Yerragondapalem, Prakasam District, Navyandhra Pradesh Since 2001.He worked as Teaching Assistant in Department of Buddist Studies and Philosophy in Acharya Nagarjuna University, Guntur (1996-199). He has 3years post graduate experience and 15 years experience in Gurukulam College and etc. He has published 20 Articles Various Journals, National & International journals. 15 Papers are presented at Various National and International Conferences and seminars.

www.ijar.org.in 154 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

SUCCESS THROUGH SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY: A UNIQUE MODEL OF TATA GROUP

Dr.Santanu Kumar Das,Assistant Professor (MBA),Kalam Institute of Technology,GovindaVihar , GanjamDist, Odisha

Abstract In this paper an attempt made by the authors to highlight the Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) activities, finding out its scope taking the case of the TATA Group under Mr.Ratan Tata who has exemplified the sense of responsibility towards the upliftment of common masses and protection of the environment and development of the nation. CSR initiatives, to really bear fruit, must result in a mutuality of benefits for the society/stakeholders as well as for the corporation itself. CSR initiatives should be so integrated and internalized by the corporations that they are placed at the very heart of the business and not merely as an appendage to it. Key words: Achievement, Corporate, Responsibility, Sustainability

Tata Corporate Sustainability Policy: “No success or achievement in material terms is worthwhile unless it serves the needs or interests of the country and its people”. - J R D Tata I. Introduction have determined that their impact on the economic, social and environmental As per the Companies Act, 2013, section landscape directly affects their 135, every company having a net worth relationships with stakeholders, in of rupees five hundred crore or more, or particular investors, employees, a turnover of rupees one thousand crore customers, business partners, or more or a net profit of rupees five governments and communities crore or more, during any financial year, shall ensure that the company spends, in every financial year, at least two per Literature Review cent of the average net profits of the company made during the three The concept of CSR originated in the immediately preceding financial years, 1950‘s in the USA but it became in pursuance of its Corporate Social prevalent in early 1970s. At that time Responsibility policy. Corporate Social US had lots of social problems like Responsibility is a management concept poverty, unemployment and pollution. whereby companies integrate social and Consequently a huge fall in the prices of environmental concerns in their business Dollar was witnessed. Corporate Social operations and interactions with their Responsibility became a matter of stakeholders. In recent years CSR has utmost importance for diverse groups become a fundamental business practice demanding change in the business. and has gained much attention from During the 1980‘s to 2000, corporations management teams of larger recognized and started accepting a international companies. Companies responsibility towards society. Corporate

www.ijar.org.in 155 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 social responsibility (CSR) focuses on the know by the name private enterprise is wealth creation for the optimal benefit of to continue, some way must be found to all stakeholders – including embrace many interests whom we go to shareholders, employees, customers, make up industry in a common purpose. environment and society. The term CSR implies some sort of commitment, stakeholder means all those on whom an through corporate policies and action. organization's performance and activities This operational view of CSR is reflected have some impact either directly or in a firm‘s social performance, which can indirectly. This term was used to be assessed by how a firm manages its describe corporate owners beyond societal relationships, its social impact shareholders as a result of a book titled and the outcomes of its CSR policies and Strategic management: a stakeholder actions (Wood, 1991). approach by R. Edward Freeman in the Objectives of the study year 1984. The objectives of this research paper are According to Bowen, “CSR refers to the to: obligations of businessmen to pursue those policies to make those decisions or 1) Understand the concept of CSR; to follow those lines of relations which 2) Find out the operational dimension are desirable in terms of the objectives of CSR in Tata Group and and values of our society”.Frederick (1960) stated Social responsibility means 3) Examine how far Tata Group has that businessmen should oversee the been successful in discharging the operation of an economic system that Social Responsibilities to all its fulfils the expectations of the stakeholders people.Davis (1960) argued that social Research Methodology Exhaustive responsibility is a nebulous idea but literature survey regarding the topic and should be seen in a managerial context. related concepts has been done. He asserted that some socially Secondary data inclusive of quantitative responsible business decisions can be and qualitative data as well collected justified by a long, complicated process of from various sources including books, reasoning as having a good chance of research papers, newspapers, bringing long-run economic gain to the magazines, and websites is used for the firm, thus paying it back for its socially purpose of study. responsible outlook (p. 70). An ideal CSR has both ethical and philosophical ANALYSIS OF THE STUDY dimensions, particularly in India where II. Tata Group and its CSR Initiatives there exists a wide gap between sections of people in terms of income and Ranging from steel, automobiles and standards as well as socio-economic software to consumer goods and status (Bajpai, 2001).Goyder (2003) telecommunications the Tata Group argues: Industry in the 20th century can operates more than 80 companies. It has no longer be regarded as a private around 200,000 employees across India arrangement for enriching shareholders. and thus has the pride to be nation‘s It has become a joint enterprise in which largest private employer. Mr.Ratan N. workers, management, consumers, the Tata has led the eminent Tata Group locality, govt. and trade union officials successfully.Under Tata, the group went all play a part. If the system which we through major organisational phases —

www.ijar.org.in 156 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 rationalisation, globalisation, and now in place a green supply chain. In the innovation, as it attempts to reach a context of biodiversity, TCS is working reported $500 billion in revenues by on conservation and sustainable 2020-21, roughly the size of what economic development. Walmart is today. Tata is accredited to Human rights:The TATA code of conduct initiate various labor welfare laws. For enunciates basic values of integrity, example- the establishment of Welfare leading change, excellence, and respect Department was introduced in 1917 and for individuals and fostering an enforced by law in 1948; Maternity environment of learning and sharing. Benefit was introduced in 1928 and TCS has been certified People Capability enforced by law in 1946. A pioneer in Maturity Model (PCMM) Level 5, which several areas, the Tata group has got the was valid till 2007-08 (Curtis, Hefley and credit of pioneering India's steel Miller, 2002). At the board level, the industry, civil aviation and starting the Ethics and Compliance Committee has country's first power plant. It had the been set up to ensure all codes of conduct world's largest integrated tea operation. are followed and corporate disclosure It is world's sixth largest manufacturer practised. of watches (Titan). Introducing Changes in the Company’s Recognition of CSR ―In a free Article and Rules for Sustaining CSR enterprise, the community is not just Clause No. 10 of Tata Group another stakeholder in business but is in fact the very purpose of its existence." - A Tata Company shall be committed to JamsetjiNusserwanji, Tata Founder, be a good corporate citizen not only in Tata Group. "Corporate Social compliance with all relevant laws and Responsibility should be in the DNA of regulations but also by actively assisting every organization. Our processes should in the improvement of the quality of life be aligned so as to benefit the society. If of the people in the communities in society prospers, so shall the which it operates with the objective of organization..." - Manoj Chakravarti, G making them self-reliant. Such social M - Corporate Affairs & Corporate Head responsibility would comprise, to initiate - Social Responsibility, Titan Industries and support community initiatives in the Limited in 2004. Corporate Social field of community health and family Responsibility has always been taken welfare, water management, vocational care of by the Tata group. training, education and literacy and encourage application of modern The CSR initiatives of Tata Group are scientific and managerial techniques and in several areas such as environment, expertise. To institutionalize the CSR human rights and product responsibility. charter, a clause on this was put into the Environment: The objectives of the group's 'Code of Conduct.' This clause company’s environmental policy are states that group companies had to pollution prevention and compliance actively assist in improving quality of with all applicable legal requirements. life in the communities in which they The organization has ISO-14001 certified operated. All the group companies were auditors. The Green Procurement Policy signatories to this code. CSR was was formulated by the company with the included as one of the key business following objectives- adopt reduce-reuse- processes in TISCO. It was one of the recycle, buy recycled materials and put eight key business processes identified

www.ijar.org.in 157 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 by TISCO's management and considered Healthcare Projects:In its 100th year, critical to the success of the company. the Tata Steel Centenary Project has just been announced. The healthcare CSR Activities of Tata Companies & projects of Tata Steel include facilitation Societies: of child education, immunization and Through the companies and societies childcare, plantation activities, creation LIKE Tata Steel, Tata Motors, Tata of awareness of AIDS and other Chemicals Ltd (TCL) , Tata Tea, Titan, healthcare projects. TISCO, TELCO, Tata Consultancy (d) Economic Empowerment:A program Services (TCS) aiming at economic empowerment , Tata Archery Academy, Tata Quality through improvised agriculture has been Management Services (TQMS) TCSRD taken up in three backward tribal blocks Tata Chemicals Limited (TCL) , Tata in Jharkhand, Orissa and Chhattisgarh. Relief Committee AND Tata Council for An expenditure of Rs 100 crore has been Community Initiatives (TCCI) Tata estimated for the purpose and this group keeps on heading towards the program is expected to benefit 40,000 fulfilment of corporate social tribal living in over 400 villages in these responsibility in various dimensions. three States. Tata Steel spends 5-7 per cent of its (e)Assistance to Government Tata Steel profit after tax on several CSR has hosted 12 Lifeline Expresses in initiatives. association with the Ministry of Railways, Impact India Foundation and Self-help groups: Over 500 self-help the Government of Jharkhand. It has groups are currently operating under served over 50,000 people. Five thousand various poverty alleviation programs; people have got surgical facilities and out of which over 200 are engaged in over 1,000 people received aids and activities of income generation thorough appliances. Over seven lakh rural and micro enterprises. Women empowerment another seven Lac urban population programs through Self-Help Groups have been benefited by the CSR have been extended to 700 villages. activities of Tata Steel. The National Social Welfare Organizations: Tata Horticulture Mission program that has Steel supports various social welfare been taken up in collaboration with the organizations. These include the Tata Government of Jharkhand has benefited Steel Rural Development Society, Tata more than a thousand households. In Tribal Cultural Society, Tata Steel collaboration with the Ministry of Non- Foundation for Family Initiatives, Conventional Energy and the National Association for the Blind, Confederation of Indian Industry, focus ShishuNiketan, School of Hope, Centre is laid on renewable energy aiming at for Hearing Impaired Children, Indian enhancing rural livelihood. Red Cross Society, East Singhbhum. Pollution Control: Tata Motors has also Tata steel has hosted 12 made investments in the establishment LifelineExpresses in association with the of an advanced emission-testing Ministry of Railways, Impact India laboratory. foundation and the Government of Jharkhand. It has served over 50, 000 people.

www.ijar.org.in 158 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

Ecological Balance: than 100,000 saplings were planted throughout the monsoon. Tata Motors has planted 80,000 trees in the works and the township and more Hospital on wheels than 2.4 million trees have been planted Tata Chemicals Limited was also the in Jamshedpur region. first organization to run world's first Employment Generation: The Tata hospital on wheels - the Life Line Motors Grihini Social Welfare Society Express, through Jamnagar district for assists employees' women dependents; the first time between November 21, they make a variety of products, ranging 2004 and December 21, 2004. from pickles to electrical cable harnesses Tata Tea has been working hard since etc; thereby making they financially the 1980s to fulfil the needs of specially- secure. able people and various programs (d) Economic Capital provide education, training and rehabilitation of children and young In Lucknow, two Societies - SamajVikas adults with special needs. Kendra & Jan ParivarKalyanSanthan have been formed for rural development & for providing healthcare to the rural The DARE: It provides the students with areas. These societies have made great training in basic academics, self-help efforts for health, education and women skills and skills like gardening, cooking, empowerment in rural areas. weaving etc. Children are taught to Human Capital paint and some of the paintings are printed and sold as greeting cards. The Tata motors have introduced many sales proceeds of which are used back scholarship programs for the higher into the units. education of the children. Through a scholarship program Vidyadhanam, the The DARE strawberry:It preserves unit company supports 211 students. Out of trains youngsters to make natural these students 132 students are from the strawberry preserve. The trainees are marginalized sections of the society. paid for the work; they receive social These students get books, copies and cover, free medical aid and other other study materials. They also undergo benefits. different kinds of workshops, creative & Athulya:It has two units:A vocational outdoor sessions and residential camps training centre that imparts training in as well. The company has entered into stationery-making and another one is a Public-Private Partnership (PPP) for handmade paper-making unit which upgrading 10 Industrial Technical trains physically challenged persons in Institutes (ITI) across the country. the art of making recycled paper Natural Capital Aranya:This project was started to On the World Environment Day, Tata nurture the lives of the disabled and also Motors has launched a tree plantation to revive the ancient art of natural dye. drive across India and countries in the Individuals are given training in various SAARC region, Middle East Russia and natural dyeing techniques including Africa. As many as 25,000 trees were block printing, tie and dye, batik work, planted on the day. Apart from this more

www.ijar.org.in 159 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 etc. Their products are sold in and Tata Relief Committee Tata Relief outside the country. Committee (TRC) works to provide relief at disaster affected areas. During Community development natural calamities there are two phases Titan Company has embarked on and of assistance - (a) relief measures and (b) completed several community rehabilitation program. After the development programmes as part of its Gujarat earthquake the group built 200 CSR initiative. A few among these schools in two years and they rendered successful projects are: help during the Orissa floods when people lost cattles. Even after the Titan Scholarship - Have been awarded Tsunami disaster members of TRC to students in Dharmapuri and immediately reached the places and Krishnagiri districts (Tamil Nadu), supplied the things required. based on academic performance and socio-economic background for over 550 Conclusion students from the economically The foregoing analysis succinctly reveals backward section. In 2013-14, this that in order to bring back and maintain programme has been extended to balance between economic and social Uttarakhand. parameters, corporate entities today are Titan Township: A sustainable increasingly required to focus and act community in Hosur (Tamil Nadu), that decisively on CSR front. It is also crystal provides housing to 1300 residents clear from the study that the Tata Group collaborating with NGOs MCA and has gone a long way in fulfilling its Ashraya. duties and responsibilities towards society and nation besides pursuing the Titan Kanya - Educating the Girl Child: economic objectives. The concept of A pan-India programme to empower the private-public partnership (PPP) should girl child by ensuring that she completes be applied in the effective her primary education upto class X. implementation of CSR i.e. government About 5000 girls have benefited from and business houses should act in this programme. collaboration for the cause. Besides, Meadow Project (Myrada): an inclusive periodic review of the CSR activities growth programme in collaboration with should be conducted by every business a local NGO ensured a collaborated entity so as to identify the pitfalls and effort with self-help groups of rural the areas left out. Innovation should women to provide gainful employment to essentially be a matter of concern; be it more than 510 rural women in and searching the untouched areas and scope around Hosur, with our three of CSR or the formulation of CSR manufacturing plants (Tamil Nadu). strategy or the implementation thereof. NGOs should be encouraged to act in TISCO was awarded The Energy collaboration for the CSR activities Research Institute (TERI) award for under different schemes and projects as Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) they play a crucial role in the upliftment for the fiscal year 2002-03 in recognition of the masses. of its corporate citizenship and sustainability initiatives.

www.ijar.org.in 160 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

References Management Review, Vol.2, 1960) pp. 54-61 Ackerman, R. W., & Bauer, R. A.,Corporate social responsiveness. Freeman, R.E. Strategic Management: (Reston,VA: Reston.1976). A Stakeholder Approach (Pitman Publishing: Marshfield, MA, 1984). Andrews, Kenneth R, “The Concept of Corporate Strategy” (Homewood, IL: Halal,W. E, Corporate community:A Dow Jones-Irwin, 1971) theory of the firm uniting profitability &responsibility,strategy&leadership. Archie B. Carrol, “The pyramid of (vol 28. No 2. , 2000), pp10-16 Corporate Social Responsibility: Toward the moral management of organizational Innovation is a Journey with a Compass, stakeholders, from Business Horizons”, may21, 2012 July-August 1991,TheFaundation for the Mark Goyder, Redefining CSR: From School of Business at Indiana the Rhetoric of Accountability to the University. Reality of Earning Trust (Tomorrow's Bajpai, G.N.,Corporate Social Company, 2003). Responsibility in India and Europe: Tata Motors: Corporate Social Cross Cultural Perspective, 2001; Responsibility Annual Report 2009-10 Bowen, H. R, Social responsibilities of Wood, D.J. , Towards improving the businessman(New York: Harper & corporate social performance (Business Row, 1953). Horizons, Vol. 34 No. 4, World Business Davis, Keith, Can Business Afford to Council for Sustainable Development Ignore Social Responsibilities? 1991) pp. 66-73 (California Management Review, Spring, www.tatachemicals.com 1960). www.tata.com Forerunners in corporate social responsibility, March 16, 2005 | The www.pluggd.in/india Indian Express, www.tatamotors.com/sustainability/CSR Frederick, W.C., The growing concern -10/content.php over business responsibility (California www.financialexpress.com Dr. Santanu Kumar Das is an assistant Professor, P.G. Department of Business Administration, Kalam Institute of Technology, Berhampur, Orissa. He has more than Ten years of teaching experience. He has presented a number of papers in seminars. He has Present 15 papers in different international conferences and 15 papers in national conferences. His 20 research papers were published in various international and national journals. He is the Life Member of several reputed associations.

www.ijar.org.in 161 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

ANTI-COMPETITIVE AGREEMENTS: CONCEPTS UNDER COMPETITION ACT 2002 Gunda veda sree, Asst Professor and Research scholar, Adarsha Law College, Hanamkonda, Kakatiya University, Warangal.

ABSTRACT The competition laws of various countries absorb the idea that no enterprise or association of enterprises or person or association of persons shall enter into any agreement which relates to production, supply or distribution of goods or provision or services which causes or is likely to cause an appreciable effect on competition in their country and that such an agreement would be declared void. The same rests on the premise that competition law is designed to be a comprehensive charter of economic liberty aimed at preserving free and unfettered competition as the rule of trade, and that unrestrained interaction of competitive forces will yield the best allocation of economic resources of the country, the lowest prices, the highest quality and greatest material progress. This Article provides key insights into the agreements which are Anti-Competitive in nature and what can potentially tantamount to an anti-competitive behaviour. Key words: Anti-Competitive Agreements – Cartels, Price fixing- Bid rigging- Predatory pricing.

INTRODUCTION 2012.Competition is irrefutably beneficial for every market participant. “A dynamic and competitive Competitive markets give consumers environment, underpinned by sound wider choice at lower prices. It gives competition law and policy, is an sellers stronger incentives to minimize essential characteristic of a successful their costs through innovation and other market economy”. productivity enhancing techniques. This The Indian economy underwent enables firms to pass on cost savings to a paradigm shift owing to the the customers and offer better products widespread economic reforms that were and greater choice at lower prices. undertaken in the nineties, moving away Competition Act, 2002 from ‘command and control economy to an economy reliant on free market Competition Act, 2002was principles. Consequently, the extant of enacted to provide, keeping in view of competition law regime governed by the the economic development of the Monopolies and Restrictive Trade country, the establishment of a Practices Act (MRTP Act) called for an Commission with the following overhaul in order for it to address the objectives:- needs and challenges of the new  prevent practices having adverse economic paradigm. The Competition Act effect on competition, 2002 was subsequently amended by the Competition (Amendment) Act 2007, the  promote and sustain competition in Competition (Amendment) Act 2009 the markets, Competition (Amendment) Act

www.ijar.org.in 162 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

 Protect the interests of consumers Further, the agreements, which are and to ensure freedom of trade entered into in respect of various carried on by other participants in intellectual property rights and which markets, in India, and for matters recognize the proprietary rights of one connected therewith or incidental party over the other in respect of thereto. trademarks, patents, copyrights, geographical indicators, industrial  Ensuring freedom of trade. designs and semi conductors have been The term appreciable adverse effect has withdrawn from the purview of "anti not been defined in the Act, but section competitive agreements". The inherently 19(3) of the Act provides for certain monopolistic rights created in favour of factors to be given due regard by the bona fide holders of various forms of commission while determining whether intellectual property have been treated an agreement have Appreciable Adverse as sacrosanct. Effect on Competition (AAEC) or not, Anticompetitive agreements can be The species of agreement which would be said to be agreements that negatively or considered to have an ‘appreciable adversely impact the process of adverse effect on competition" would be competition in the market. According to those agreements which: an OECD/World Bank Glossary,  Directly or indirectly determine sale or anticompetitive practices refer to a wide purchase prices; range of business practices that a firm or group of firms may engage in order to  Limit or control production, supply, restrict inter-firm competition to markets, technical development, maintain or increase their relative investment or provision of services; market position and profits without  Share the market or source of necessarily providing foods and services production or provision of services by at a lower cost or higher quality. allocation of inter alia geographical Similarly, it can be said that area of market, nature of goods or anticompetitive agreements are number of customers or any other agreements between firms or enterprises similar way that restrict or prevent or otherwise unfavourably affect competition, and  Directly or indirectly result in bid that may help increase the market rigging or collusive bidding. position or share of the parties and may  creation of barriers to new entrants in also be to the disadvantage of the the market; consumer as the products and services may be available at a higher cost than  driving existing competitors out of the are available in a competitive market market; and also may be of a lower quality. foreclosure of competition by hindering  Prohibition of anti-Competitive entry into the market; Agreements has been provided under  accrual of benefits to consumers; Section 3 Chapter II of the Act dealing with prohibition of certain agreements,  improvements in production or abuse of dominant position and distribution of goods or provision of regulation of combinations of the Act. services; The provisions of the Competition Act

www.ijar.org.in 163 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 relating to anti-competitive agreements between ―horizontal‖ and ―vertical‖ were notified on 20th May, 2009. agreements between firms. The former, namely the horizontal agreements are Section 3 prescribes certain practices those among competitors and the latter, which will be anti-competitive and the namely the vertical agreements are Act has also provided a wide definition of those relating to an actual or potential agreement under section 2 (b). relationship of purchasing or selling to Section 3(1) is a general prohibition each other. A particularly pernicious of an agreement relating to the type of horizontal agreements is the production, supply, distribution, storage, cartel. Vertical agreements are acquisition or control of goods or pernicious, if they are between firms in a provision of services by enterprises, position of dominance. Most competition which causes or is likely to cause an laws view vertical agreements generally AAEC within India. more leniently than horizontal agreements, as, prima facie, horizontal Section 3(2) simply declares agreement agreements are more likely to reduce under section 3(1) void. competition than agreements between Section 3(3) deals with certain specific firms in a purchaser seller relationship. anti competitive agreements, practices The Act have not used the term and decisions of those supplying horizontal agreements and vertical identical or similar goods or services, agreements, however the language used acting in concert for example agreement in the Act suggests that agreements between manufacturer and referred to in section 3(3) and section 3 manufacturer or supplier and supplier, (4) are horizontal and vertical and also includes such action by cartels. agreements respectively. It is to be noted Section 3(4) deal with restraints imposed that section 3(3) and section 3(4) are the through agreements among enterprises main provisions which are mainly in different stages of production or attracted to prove the existence of any supply etc. for example agreement anti competitive agreements. amongst manufacturer and supplier. Practices recognised as Anti-competitive Section 3 (5) provides for exceptions, it practice under Section 3 saves the rights of proprietor of any Anti-competitive practices are those intellectual property right listed in it to practices which reduce competition in a restrain the infringement of any of those market and hamper consumer interests. rights regardless of section 3. These practices include: Competition laws in all over the Cartels:Cartels are agreements between world usually places anti-competitive enterprises (including association of agreements in two categories namely – enterprises) not to compete on price, horizontal agreements and vertical product (including goods and services) or agreements. Horizontal agreements are customers. The objective of a cartel is to generally viewed more seriously than the raise price above competitive levels, vertical agreements. Firms enter into resulting in injury to consumers and to agreements, which may have the the economy. For the consumers, potential of restricting competition. A cartelization results in higher prices, scan of the competition laws in the world will show that they make a distinction

www.ijar.org.in 164 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 poor quality and less or no choice for retailer receives discounts based on its goods or/and services. proportion of its sales coming from the manufacturer. Such arrangements could If there is effective competition make entry difficult for the in the market, cartels would findit manufacturer and retailers. difficult to be formed and sustained. Some of the conditions that are Slotting fees: this requires the advantageous to cartelization are: manufacturer to pay a fee to get its product stocked. Such entry could make high concentration - few competitors o difficult for entry of the new o high entry and exit barriers manufacturers. o homogeneity of the products (similar Non-linear and franchise fees: These products) involve payment of non-cost related discounts to existing retailers or similar production costs o franchise fees, thus raising the sunk cost o excess capacity of entry and making difficult for entry for other retailers. o high dependence of the consumers on the product Price fixing: It is an agreement between the potential competitors wherein they history of collusion o lay down a price to sell their goods. The Resale price maintenance: this is a aim and result of every effective price concerted practice having their direct or fixing agreement is the elimination of indirect object the establishment of a one form of competition. Agreements fixed price or a minimum price level to which create such potential power may be observed by the buyer. In this type of well be held to be ain themselves practice resellers are not allowed to set unreasonable or unlawful restraints, prices independently. without the necessity of minute inquiry whether a particular price is reasonable Exclusive dealing and purchasing: under or unreasonable. such an agreement a retailer agrees to purchase or deal in the goods of only one Bid rigging: Bid rigging agreements are manufacturer making entry difficult for agreements among competing bidders or the new manufacturers. In this type of potential bidders that affect the prices practice a retailer or wholesaler is they will bid for, or the attempt to obliged by contract to only purchase from secretly influence the outcome of a the contracted supplier. contract or series of contracts. Bid rigging is per se illegal irrespective of Tie in sales, full time forcing, quantity the fact that it does not matter whether forcing and fidelity discounts: Tie in the agreement concerns what the low bid sales make the purchase of one product would be, the quantum of the individual conditional on the same of another bidders bidding and the bidder who product. Full line forcing is an extreme would win the contract. case of the former where the retailer must stockthe full range of the Output or production restrictions: manufacturers’ products. Under quantity Output or production restrictions are forcing the retailer is required to agreements between competitors purchase a minimum quantity of certain wherein the competitors agree to curtail product. Under fidelity discounts, the output or restrict production. There is a

www.ijar.org.in 165 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 resumption that such kinds of but leaving the buyer free to buy and sell agreements are made to limit supply and competing products. gain the ability to raise prices and such Predatory pricing/Dumping: It is a sort of agreements are treated illegal per pricing strategy where a product or se. service is set at a very low price, Concerted refusal to deal: A concerted intending to drive competitors out of the refusal not to deal with particular or market, or create barriers to entry for specified group of suppliers or potential new competitors. If competitors customers. This is also known as group or potential competitors cannot sustain boycott wherein there is a horizontal equal or lower prices without losing concerted refusal to deal involves an money, they go out of business or choose agreement between two or more not to enter the business. The predatory competitors to refuse to deal with other merchant then has fewer competitors or competitors or class of competitors, or is even a de facto monopoly. with one or group of suppliers or Dividing territories: An agreement by customers. two companies to stay out of each other’s Single branding: Single branding way and reduce competition in the involves the agreements which have as agreed upon territories. their main element that the buyer is Absorption of a competitor or competing induced to concentrate his orders for a technology: where the powerful firm particular type of product with one effectively co-opts or swallows its supplier. This component can be found in competitor rather than see it either non-compete and quantity forcing on the compete directly or be absorbed by buyer, where an obligation or incentive another firm. scheme agreed between the supplier and the buyer makes the latter purchase the Here it is noteworthy to say that requirements for a particular products the new economic policy of 1991 on one and its substitutes from one supplier. hand has made our life comfortable as The possible anti-competitive effects and the goods and services required for our 0otential suppliers, facilitation of use are available in abundance and on collusion between suppliers in case of the other hand it has also opened new cumulative use and where the buyer is challenges for preventing anti- the retailer selling to the final competitive agreements by consumers, a loss of inter brand manufacturers and service providers. competition. Competition law is the principal legislative instrument for furthering Market partitioning: This covers the competition policy and combating anti- agreements directly or indirectly competitive agreements. Under the limiting a buyer to buy or sell a Competition Act, 2002 there has been particular product in a particular area. made adequate provisions for preventing This component can be found in anti-competitive agreements and has exclusive purchasing, where an also created an institution i.e. obligation or incentive scheme agreed Competition Commission of India (CCI) between the supplier and the buyer to ensure effective implementation of the makers the later purchase the Act. requirements for a particular product exclusively from the designated supplier

www.ijar.org.in 166 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

However Competition Act and CCI are to be adequately empowered to Khemani R. S.A framework for the take off such situations. Provisions design and implementation of relating to prohibition of anti- competition law and policy, World Bank competitive agreements under the Act publications (1999), PgV(Preface). are, to some extent adequate to maintain Pradeep D Mehta (ed.), TOWARDS A fair competition in the market and thereby protect interest of consumers. FUNCTIONAL COMPETITION However they are needed to be strictly POLICY FOR INDIA AN OERVIEW, observed and implemented. 2005, Academic Foundation, New Delhi Conclusion Ramappa T. ‘Competition Law in India- It is needless to say that this Policy, issues and Developments’ dynamic statute can touch and change Oxford University Press, (2006). the way trade functions on a day to day basis. What is important for companies Smith Adam, an Inquiry into the Nature to note is the fact that some age old and Causes of the Wealth of Nations, practices, which earned legitimacy London Publication (1776) Pg 88. because of their permanence and failure of the MRTP Commission to address Whish Richard, ‗Competition Law‘ them, would become the primary targets Oxford University Press. 6th Edition, of the well-empowered CCI. Enterprises (2009). in India, therefore, need to understand World Bank/OECD: “Glossary of the new law and update themselves Industrial Organization on Economics regularly on the new policies and and Competition Law”. regulations. http://www.cci.gov.in/index.php?option=c om_content&task=view&id=140 References: http://globalcompetitionreview.com/revie Abir Roy Jayant Kumar, Competition ws/60/sections/206/chapters/2341/india- Law in India. Eastern Law House, 2008 overview/ DhallVinod, ‗Competition Law Today; http://en.wik Concepts, Issues, and Law in Practice‘, Oxford University Press, (2007).

Gundavedasree has been working in Adarsha Law College, Hanamkonda, as Assistant Professor and Research scholar in law from Kakatiya University, Warangal.

www.ijar.org.in 167 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

JUDICIAL ACCOUNTABILITY: An over view

P.Venkata Subba Rao, Asst. Professor, P.G. Department of Public Administration, Dr.C.S.Rao P.G. Centre, Sri Y.N.College, Narsapur, W.G.Dt

V.Rama Rao, Lecturer, Department of Commerce, ANR College, Gudivada, Krishna District, A.P.

Abstract Judicial accountability is a phrase which sounds incongruous and can convey conflicting messages. It has assumed importance in the wake of the improper, irregular, incorrect manner of functioning of judicial officers. In the true sense of the phrase “Judicial accountability” an order passed on the Judicial side can be made accountable only before a higher appellate forum. This paper presents an over view on judicial accountability in India. Key words: Judicial accountability, legislature, Supreme Court

Introduction district courts in a state – are all made accountable in respect of their acts as In a democratic state there are three they are amendable to the disciplinary instrumentalities constituting the state control enforced and supervised by the and its executing functions. These are respective high courts of the states. In so the executive, the legislature and the far as the Judges of the superior courts Judiciary. Though the Judiciary has are concerned the only way of neither the power of purse nor the disciplining an errant judge of a High sword, yet in recent years its role has Court or the Supreme Court is by way of assumed considerable importance impeachment by Parliament as provided because it seeks to prevent the excessive in Article 124 of the Constitution of of the executive and the legislature and India, particularly, Clauses 4 and 5 of acts for protection and enforcement of Article 124, which read as under. their rights and as a keeper of their liberties. Judicial accountability is Article 124 : Establishment and a phrase which sounds incongruous and constitution of Supreme Court: can convey conflicting messages. It has assumed importance in the wake of the improper, irregular, incorrect manner of Clause (4) : A judge of the functioning of judicial officers. In the Supreme Court shall not be removed true sense of the phrase “Judicial from his office except by an order of the accountability” an order passed on the President of India passed after an judicial side can be made accountable address by each House of Parliament only before a higher appellate forum. supported by a majority of the total membership of that House and by a Provisions: majority of not less than two thirds of Judges of the subordinate Judiciary – the members of that House present and which is Judiciary upto the level of voting has been presented to the

www.ijar.org.in 168 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015

President in the same session for such term of office in respect of their personal removal on the grounds of proved acts. The Ministers do not enjoy such misbehavior or incapacity. immunities and hence they can be sued in ordinary courts like common citizens Clause(5): Parliament may by for crimes as well as torts. law regular the procedure for the presentation of an address and for the For the present, there is no other investigation of an address and for the mechanism or procedure to discipline an investigation and proof of the errant Judge of a superior court and if misbehaviour or incapacity of a Judge the past experience is any indication, the under Clause(4) impeachment procedure does not work in reality and in practice. More so in the In respect of the Judges of the present political system in our country High Courts, the provisions of Article where motions and debates in 217 of the Constitution of India, Parliament are based only on political particularly, as indicated in Clause(b) of considerations, impeachment mechanism Sub-Article (1) of Article 217, is the may never be a practical methodology of procedure envisaged for the removal of a disciplining an errant Judge of superior Judge of a High Court. court, unless there is consensus amongst Art.217 – Appointment and the political parties. That virtually conditions of the office of a Judge of a leaves the Judges of the superior courts High Court – Clause (1) Every judge of a immune from any accountability and High Court… shall hold office, in the that is why the phrase ‘Judicial case of an additional or acting Judge, as accountability assumes importance and provided in Article 224, and in any other significance.’ case, until he attains the age of 62 years; Every Judge of this country is a provided that – (a) a Judge may, by public servant and every public servant writing under his hand addressed to the is, without any second opinion, President, resign his office, (b) a Judge accountable to the people of this country. may be removed from his office by the The conduct of Judge outside his office President in the manner provided in should also be one which can pass clause (4) of article 124 for the removal muster in the eyes of the people. of a Judge of the Supreme Court or by his being transferred by the President to The Judges of the Supreme any other High Court within the Court did not take long to make their territory of India presence felt and began to actively pursue their functions assigned to them SUIT AGAINST TO PUBLIC by the constitution. The role of the OFFICIALS:- In India, the President Judiciary is extremely delicate in such and the State Governors enjoy personal cases because it must not appear to be immunity from legal liability for their playing to the gallery or playing a role official acts. During their term of Office, which may be described partisan. Great they are immune from any criminal care must be taken to ensure that the proceedings, even in respect of their Judge or Judges play a participatory personal acts. They cannot be arrested role. or imprisoned. However, after giving two months’ notice, civil proceedings can With the constitutional be instituted against them during their mechanism and the inside mechanism

www.ijar.org.in 169 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 failing to usher in any measure of have great powers over the rest of the Judicial accountability, the only community, but who are otherwise alternative is by taking the issue to the isolated from them and misunderstood people who are the master in our polity, by them, to their mutual disadvantage. and alert judicious public opinion. In The court as an advisor (Art.143) : The moulding such public opinion, legal role of Judiciary as advisor to the fraternity has the most important role to executive or legislative department of play. Our courts are open courts and the government was unknown to India the functioning of Judges is in the glare until the inauguration of the Govt. of of members of the public. That is the India Act of 1935. Judicial circles in greatest safety and assurance of an India were by and large convinced of the upright judiciary. Public opinion should usefulness of conferring a Jurisdiction of be motivated and guided in this direction this nature on the highest court of the and our lawyers have a definite and land. A Judge in the modern age, like a great role to play in this regard. physician who is not only concerned with If a citizen is aggrieved with any curative but also preventive medicine, action or inaction of the administration, ought to be interested not only in he may seek redress through a court of settling conflicts but also in preventing law, so Judicial processes are alsot here their occurrence. Advisory opinions are a to make the administration accountable. help to preventing litigation or reducing But the Courts are already flooded with it to a considerable extent. That alone cases, and we have to add to this the should justify the role of the Supreme enormous increase in work due to new Court as an advisor to the executive. and emerging subjects such as legal aid The trend of Judicial scrutiny of to the poor, and also due to the courts governmental action and the readiness taking up cases suo moto on the basis of even of the executive to seek Judicial a mere petition from a citizen if it is in determination of debatable or the public interest to do so. (Public controversial issues have resulted in interest litigation cases). enhancing the significance of the role of The Judiciary is not the ‘least Judiciary in India. Judiciary has dangerous branch’ of government – intervened in certain areas because of Judges are not mere lions under the the people’s perception that Judicial throne. They send people to prison and intervention is perhaps the only feasible decide the scope and application of all correctional remedy available. manner of rights and duties with Conclusions: It is concluded that important consequences for individuals Judiciary cannot be an imperium in and for society. Because the Judiciary imperio. That is why its accountability is has such a central role in the important. The performance and government of society, we should discipline of Judges and the audit and ‘wash…… with cynical acid…’ this enquiry in this behalf cannot be ruled aspect of public life. Unless and until we out altogether but may be reasonably treat Judges as fallible human beings restrained by carefully drawn up whose official conduct is subject to the procedures. No democratic institution same critical analysis as that of other including the Judiciary can be above the organs of government, Judges will rule of accountability in the absence of remain members of a Priesthood who which there is the possible danger of

www.ijar.org.in 170 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1(3), January-March, 2015 developing absolutism. The people of guarantor of the great ideals enshrined India look upon the Supreme Court as in the preamble of our Constitution. an instrument of social justice and a

P.Venkata Subbarao has been working as Asst.professor in Dr. C.S.Rao PG Centre, Sri Y.N.College, Narsapur, West Godavari Dist, AP. He has 17 years teaching experience. He has published 27 articles in various standard and academic journals and books in India. He has presented more than 20 papers at national and international seminars/ conferences. He is pursuing his Ph.D programme from Andhra University.

V. Rama Rao has been working as Lecturer in Commerce ANR college. Gudivada, Ap. He has 10 years teaching experience. He has presented several papers at national and international seminars/ conferences

www.ijar.org.in 171 International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1 (3), January-March 2015

GUIDELINES TO THE AUTHORS: The following guidelines give credentials to your paper

Plagiarism is strictly prohibited. Authors are jointly and severely responsible for any sort of plagiarism. Manuscript must be on a standard A4 size paper setting. It must be prepared on 1.5 spaces and typed in 12 point Times New Roman Font with page numbers at the bottom of the page. 1. Author Name(S) & Affiliations: The author (s) full name, designation, affiliation (s), address, mobile/landline numbers, and email/alternate email address should be underneath the title. 2. Abstract: Abstract should be in fully italicized text, not exceeding 300 words. The abstract must be informative and present overall idea (explain background, aims, methods, results and conclusion) of the paper. 3. Keywords: Abstract must be followed by list of keywords, subject to the maximum of five. These should be arranged in alphabetic order 4. Introduction : A short introduction of the research problem followed by a brief review of literature and objectives of the research 5. Materials and Methods: Describe the materials used in the experiments and methods used for data collection, statistical tools used in data collection 6. Results and Discussion: This segment should focus on the fulfillment of stated objectives as given in the introduction. It should be contain the findings presented in the form of tables, figures and photographs8. Conclusion: Analysis conclude with suitable and effective suggestions (if any) (Papers relating to the Languages may be followed as their research (Ph.D/M.Phil) style) 7. Style of Referencing: The list of all references should be alphabetically arranged. It must be single spaced, and at the end of the manuscript. The author (s) should mention only the actually utilized references in the preparation of manuscript and they are supposed to follow Harvard Style of Referencing. The author (s) is supposed to follow the references as per following: Books Sundara Rao M., (1996), "Tribal Development." Tata McGraw, Hill, New Delhi, page. 250 Contributions to books Ramana T.V (2008),” Education- A multi Dimensional weapon for all-round Development: Edited by D.Pulla Rao, Development of Education-Emerging Dimensions in 21st Century, Chapter 13, pp.190-202. Journal and other articles Schemenner, R.W., Huber, J.C. and Cook, R.L. (1987), "Geographic Differences and the Location of New Manufacturing Facilities," Journal of Urban Economics, Vol. 21, No. 1, pp. 83-104. Conference papers Chandel K.S. (2009): "Ethics in Commerce Education." Paper presented at the Annual International Conference for the All India Management Association, New Delhi, India, 19–22 June. International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1 (3), January-March 2015

Unpublished dissertations and theses Kumar S. (2006): "Customer Value: A Comparative Study of Rural and Urban Customers," Thesis, Kurukshetra University, Kurukshetra. Online resources Always indicate the date that the source was accessed, as online resources are frequently updated or removed.

Website Kelkar V. (2009): Towards a New Natural Gas Policy, Economic and Political Weekly, Viewed on February 17, 2011 http://epw.in/epw/user/viewabstract.jsp

International Journal of Academic Research ISSN: 2348-7666 Vol.2, Issue-1 (3), January-March 2015

Multidisciplinary & Multiple languages Refereed and Indexed Journal

Dear Sir/Madam, Greetings from ajar:

IJAR invites original unpublished research Papers / review/articles of all disciplines/subjects and Multiple Languages not submitted in the earlier for publication. No Subscription fee to Authors. Only nominal Publication fee. Authors can get printed book, Electronic copy and E-Certificate

IJAR covers all the subjects: Philosophy, psychology-Meteorology Economics, Statistics Marine Monetary & Fiscal Policy Education Rural Development Organizational Development Entrepreneurship Financial Institutions & Markets International Finance & Business Tourism, Hospitality and Leisure Economic Development Corporate Finance Public Private Partnership Transportation Management: Marketing, Finance, Geography HR Retailing, Advertising Public Administration Commerce Political Science Production/Operations Management Anthropology Science & Technology Mathematics Engineering Physical Education Computer Science Journalism & Mass Communication Biology, Chemistry, Physics Social Work Technology & Innovation Languages Library and Information Science (Any other discipline) Mail articles to: [email protected] : [email protected] Sincerely Yours - (Editor –In-Chief) Dr.T.V.Ramana Mobile: 9948440288 M.A., MBA, PGDCA, DIM, PGDHRM, (BL), PhD Andhra University Campus, Kakinada, 533005 Andhra Pradesh, India, Office: 46-8-10/4 opp. Aditya School, Jagannaikpur, Kakinada-2, AP, India